Benzothiazole kinase inhibitors and methods of use

ABSTRACT

The present invention provides chemical entities or compounds and pharmaceutical compositions thereof that are capable of modulating lipid kinases such PI3 kinases, tryosine kinases and protein kinases such as mTOR. Also provided in the present invention are methods of using these compositions to modulate these kinases especially for therapeutic applications.

This application is a continuation of U.S. application Ser. No.12/920,966, filed on Jan. 13, 2011, which is a national phase ofPCT/US2009/37324, filed on Mar. 16, 2009, published as WO2009/114874,which claims the benefit under 35 USC §119(e) of U.S. ProvisionalApplication Ser. No. 61/069,637, filed on Mar. 14, 2008, which is herebyincorporated by reference in its entirety.

BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION

Kinases represent a class of important signaling molecules. Kinases cangenerally be classified into protein kinases and lipid kinases, andcertain kinases exhibit dual specificities. Protein kinases are enzymesthat phosphorylate other proteins and/or themselves (i.e.,autophosphorylation). Protein kinases can be generally classified intothree major groups based upon their substrate utilization: tyrosinekinases which predominantly phosphorylate substrates on tyrosineresidues (e.g., erb2, PDGF receptor, EGF receptor, VEGF receptor, src,abl), serine/threonine kinases which predominantly phosphorylatesubstrates on serine and/or threonine residues (e.g., mTorC1, mTorC2,ATM, ATR, DNA-PK), and dual-specificity kinases which phosphorylatesubstrates on tyrosine, serine and/or threonine residues.

Lipid kinases are enzymes that catalyze the phosphorylation of lipidswithin cells. These enzymes, and the resulting phosphorylated lipids andlipid derived biologically active organic molecules, play a role in manydifferent physiological processes, including cell proliferation,migration, adhesion, and differentiation. A particular group of lipidkinases comprises membrane lipid kinases, i.e., kinases that catalyzethe phosphorylation of lipids contained in or associated with cellmembranes. Examples of such enzymes include phosphinositide(s) kinases(such as PI3-kinases, PI4-Kinases), diacylglycerol kinases, andsphingosine kinases.

The phosphoinositide 3-kinases (PI3Ks) signaling pathway is one of themost highly mutated systems in human cancers. PI3K signaling is involvedin many other disease states including allergic contact dermatitis,rheumatoid arthritis, osteoarthritis, inflammatory bowel diseases,chronic obstructive pulmonary disorder, psoriasis, multiple sclerosis,asthma, disorders related to diabetic complications, and inflammatorycomplications of the cardiovascular system such as acute coronarysyndrome.

PI3Ks are members of a unique and conserved family of intracellularlipid kinases that phosphorylate the 3′-OH group onphosphatidylinositols or phosphoinositides. The PI3K family comprises 15kinases with distinct substrate specificities, expression patterns, andmodes of regulation (Katso et al., 2001). The class I PI3Ks (p110α,p110β, p110δ, and p110γ) are typically activated by tyrosine kinases orG-protein coupled receptors to generate PIP3, which engages downstreameffectors such as those in the pathways of Akt/PDK1, mTor, the Tecfamily kinases, and the Rho family GTPases. The class II and III PI3Ksplay a key role in intracellular trafficking through the synthesis ofPI(3)P and PI(3,4)P2.

The production of phosphatidylinositol-3,4,5-trisphosphate initiatespotent growth and survival signals. In some epithelial cancers the PI3Kpathway is activated by direct genetic mutation. Additionally, the PI3Ksignaling pathway appears to be a crucial survival and growth signal ina broad spectrum of cancers. As PI3K signaling pathway plays a pivotalrole in cell proliferation and differentiation, inhibition of thispathway is believed to be beneficial in hyperproliferative diseases.

Likewise, dysregulation of signaling pathways mediated by many otherkinases is a key factor in the development of human diseases. Aberrantor excessive protein kinase activity or expression has been observed inmany disease states including benign and malignant proliferativediseases, disorders such as allergic contact dermatitis, rheumatoidarthritis, osteoarthritis, inflammatory bowel diseases, chronicobstructive pulmonary disorder, psoriasis, multiple sclerosis, asthma,disorders related to diabetic complications, and inflammatorycomplications of the cardiovascular system such as acute coronarysyndrome.

Downstream mediators of the PI3K signal transduction pathway include Aktand mammalian target of rapamycin (mTOR). Akt possesses a plckstrinhomology (PH) domain that binds PIP3, leading to Akt kinase activation.Akt phosphorylates many substrates and is a central downstream effectorof PI3K for diverse cellular responses. One important function of Akt isto augment the activity of mTOR, through phosphorylation of TSC2 andother mechanisms. mTOR is a serine-threonine kinase related to the lipidkinases of the PI3K family. mTOR has been implicated in a wide range ofbiological processes including cell growth, cell proliferation, cellmotility and survival. Disregulation of the mTOR pathway has beenreported in various types of cancer. mTOR is a multifunctional kinasethat integrates growth factor and nutrient signals to regulate proteintranslation, nutrient uptake, autophagy, and mitochondrial function.

As such, kinases particularly protein kinases such as mTor and lipidkinases such as PI3Ks are prime targets for drug development. Thepresent invention addresses a need in the art by providing a new classof kinase inhibitors.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION

In one aspect, a compound of Formula I or a pharmaceutically acceptablesalt thereof, is provided wherein

M₁ is benzothiazolyl substituted with —(W²)_(k)—R²; k is 0 or 1; R₁ is—H, -L-alkyl, -L-cycloalkyl, -L-alkyl-cycloalkyl, -L-aryl,-L-heteroaryl, -L-alkylaryl, -L-alkylheteroaryl, -L-alkylheterocylyl,-L-alkenyl, -L-alkynyl, -L-alkenyl-cycloalkyl, -L-alkynyl-cycloalkyl, or-L-heterocyclyl, each of which is unsubstituted or substituted by one ormore independent R³ substituents; L is absent, C═O, —C(═O)O—,—C(═O)NR³¹—, —S—, —S(O)—, —S(O)₂—, —S(O)₂NR³¹—, or —NR³¹—; X₁ is N orC-E¹ and X₂ is N; or X₁ is NH or CH-E¹ and X₂ is C; E¹ and E² areindependently —(W¹)_(j)—R⁴; j, in each instance, is 0 or 1; W¹ is —O—,—NR⁶—, —S(O)₀₋₂—, —C(O)—, —C(O)N(R⁶)—, —N(R⁶)C(O)—, —N(R⁶)S(O)—,—N(R⁶)S(O)₂—, —C(O)O—, —CH(R⁶)N(C(O)OR⁷)—, —CH(R⁷)N(C(O)R⁷)—,—CH(R⁶)N(SO₂R⁷)—, —CH(R⁶)N(R⁷)—, —CH(R⁶)C(O)N(R⁷)—, —CH(R⁶)N(R⁷)C(O)—,—CH(R⁶)N(R⁷)S(O)—, or —CH(R⁶)N(R⁷)S(O)₂—; W² is —O—, —NR⁶—, —S(O)₀₋₂—,—C(O)—, —C(O)N(R⁶)—, —N(R⁶)C(O)—, —N(R⁶)S(O)—, —N(R⁶)S(O)₂—, —C(O)O—,—CH(R⁶)N(C(O)OR⁷)—, —CH(R⁷)N(C(O)R⁷)—, —CH(R⁶)N(SO₂R⁷)—, —CH(R⁶)N(R⁷)—,—CH(R⁶)C(O)N(R⁷)—, —CH(R⁶)N(R⁷)C(O)—, —CH(R⁶)N(R⁷)S(O)—, or—CH(R⁶)N(R⁷)S(O)₂—; R³ and R⁴ are independently hydrogen, halogen, aryl,heteroaryl, alkyl, cycloalkyl, -alkyl-cycloalkyl, -alkylheterocyclyl,C₂₋₁₀alkenyl, or C₂₋₁₀alkynyl; R² is hydrogen, bicyclic aryl,substituted monocyclic aryl, hetaryl, alkyl, cycloalkyl,-alkyl-cycloalkyl, -alkyl-monocyclic aryl, -alkylbicycloaryl,-alkylhetaryl, -alkylheterocyclyl, alkenyl, or alkynyl; R⁶ and R⁷ areeach independently hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, aryl, heteroaryl,heterocyclyl or cycloalkyl, wherein each alkyl, alkenyl, aryl,heteroaryl, heterocyclyl or cycloalkyl is unsubstituted or substitutedby one or more independent R⁸ substituents; and R⁸ is halo, —OR³¹, —SH,NH₂, —NR³⁴R³⁵, —NR³¹R³², —CO₂R³¹, —CO₂aryl-C(═O)NR³¹R³², C(═O)NR³⁴R³⁵,—NO₂, —CN, —S(O)₀₋₂ alkyl, —S(O)₀₋ ₂ aryl, —SO₂NR³⁴R³⁵, —SO₂NR³¹R³²,alkyl, alkenyl, or alkynyl; R³¹, R³², and R³³, in each instance, areindependently H or alkyl; and R³⁴ and R³⁵ are taken together with thenitrogen atom to which they are attached to form a 3-10 membered ring.

In a second aspect, a compound of Formula I or a pharmaceuticallyacceptable salt thereof, is provided wherein

wherein M₁ is benzothiazolyl substituted with —(W²)_(k)—R²; k is 0 or 1;R₁ is —H, -L-alkyl, -L-cycloalkyl, -L-alkyl-cycloalkyl, -L-aryl,-L-heteroaryl, -L-alkylaryl, -L-alkylheteroaryl, -L-alkylheterocylyl,-L-alkenyl, -L-alkynyl, -L-alkenyl-cycloalkyl, -L-alkynyl-cycloalkyl, or-L-heterocyclyl, each of which is unsubstituted or substituted by one ormore independent R³ substituents; L is absent, C═O, —C(═O)O—, —C(═O)NR³¹—, —S—, —S(O)—, —S(O)₂—, —S(O)₂NR³¹—, or —NR³¹—; X₁ is N or C-E¹ andX₂ is N; or X₁ is NH or CH-E¹ and X₂ is C; E¹ and E² are independently—(W¹)_(j)—R⁴; j, in each instance, is 0 or 1; W¹ is —O—, —NR⁶—,—S(O)₀₋₂—, —C(O)—, —C(O)N(R⁶)—, —N(R⁶)C(O)—, —N(R⁶)S(O)—, —N(R⁶)S(O)₂—,—C(O)O—, —CH(R⁶)N(C(O)OR⁷)—, —CH(R⁷)N(C(O)R⁷)—, —CH(R⁶)N(SO₂R⁷)—,—CH(R⁶)N(R⁷)—, —CH(R⁶)C(O)N(R⁷)—, —CH(R⁶)N(R⁷)C(O)—, —CH(R⁶)N(R⁷)S(O)—,or —CH(R⁶)N(R⁷)S(O)₂—; W² is —O—, —NR⁶—, —S(O)₀₋₂—, —C(O)—, —C(O)N(R⁶)—,—N(R⁶)C(O)—, —N(R⁶)S(O)—, —N(R⁶)S(O)₂—, —C(O)O—, —CH(R⁶)N(C(O)OR⁷)—,—CH(R⁷)N(C(O)R⁷)—, —CH(R⁶)N(SO₂R⁷)—, —CH(R⁶)N(R⁷)—, —CH(R⁶)C(O)N(R⁷)—,—CH(R⁶)N(R⁷)C(O)—, —CH(R⁶)N(R⁷)S(O)—, or —CH(R⁶)N(R⁷)S(O)₂—; R³ and R⁴are independently hydrogen, halogen, aryl, heteroaryl, alkyl,cycloalkyl, -alkyl-cycloalkyl, -alkylheterocyclyl, C₂₋₁₀alkenyl, orC₂₋₁₀alkynyl; R² is hydrogen, bicyclic aryl, substituted monocyclicaryl, hetaryl, alkyl, cycloalkyl, -alkyl-cycloalkyl, -alkyl-monocyclicaryl, -alkylbicycloaryl, -alkylhetaryl, -alkylheterocyclyl, or alkenyl,alkynyl; R⁶ and R⁷ are each independently hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl,aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl or cycloalkyl, wherein each alkyl,alkenyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl or cycloalkyl is unsubstitutedor substituted by one or more independent R⁸ substituents; R⁸ is halo,—OR³¹, —SH, NH₂, —NR³⁴R³⁵, —NR³¹R³², —CO₂R³¹, —CO₂aryl-C(═O)NR³¹R³²,C(═O) NR³⁴R³⁵, —NO₂, —CN, —S(O)₀₋₂ alkyl, —S(O)₀₋₂aryl, —SO₂NR³⁴R³⁵,—SO₂NR³¹R³², alkyl, alkenyl, or alkynyl; R³¹, R³², and R³³, in eachinstance, are independently H or alkyl; and R³⁴ and R³⁵ are takentogether with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached to form a3-10 membered ring.

In a third aspect of the invention, a compound of Formula I is providedhaving a structure of Formula II, Formula III, Formula IV, or Formula V,or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein

k is 0 or 1; R₁ is —H, -L-alkyl, -L-cycloalkyl, -L-alkyl-cycloalkyl,-L-aryl, -L-heteroaryl, -L-alkylaryl, -L-alkylheteroaryl,-L-alkylheterocylyl, -L-alkenyl, -L-alkynyl, -L-alkenyl-cycloalkyl,-L-alkynyl-cycloalkyl, or -L-heterocyclyl, each of which isunsubstituted or substituted by one or more independent R³ substituents;L is absent, C═O, —C(═O)O—, —C(═O) NR³¹—, —S—, —S(O)—, —S(O)₂—,—S(O)₂NR³¹—, or —NR³¹; W² is —O—, —NR⁶—, —S(O)₀₋₂—, —C(O)—, —C(O)N(R⁶)—,—N(R⁶)C(O)—, —N(R⁶)S(O)—, —N(R⁶)S(O)₂—, —C(O)O—, —CH(R⁶)N(C(O)OR⁷)—,—CH(R⁷)N(C(O)R⁷)—, —CH(R⁶)N(SO₂R⁷)—, —CH(R⁶)N(R⁷)—, —CH(R⁶)C(O)N(R⁷)—,—CH(R⁶)N(R⁷)C(O)—, —CH(R⁶)N(R⁷)S(O)—, or —CH(R⁶)N(R⁷)S(O)₂—; R³ and R⁴are independently hydrogen, halogen, aryl, heteroaryl, alkyl,cycloalkyl, -alkyl-cycloalkyl, -alkylheterocyclyl, C₂₋₁₀alkenyl, orC₂₋₁₀alkynyl; R² is hydrogen, bicyclic aryl, substituted monocyclicaryl, hetaryl, alkyl, cycloalkyl, -alkyl-cycloalkyl, -alkyl-monocyclicaryl, -alkylbicycloaryl, -alkylhetaryl, -alkylheterocyclyl, alkenyl, oralkynyl; R⁶ and R⁷ are each independently hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl,aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl or cycloalkyl, wherein each alkyl,alkenyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl or cycloalkyl is unsubstitutedor substituted by one or more independent R⁸ substituents; and R⁸ ishalo, —OR³¹, —SH, NH₂, —NR³⁴R³⁵, —NR³¹R³², —CO₂R³¹,—CO₂aryl-C(═O)NR³¹R³², C(═O) NR³⁴R³⁵, —NO₂, —CN, —S(O)₀₋₂ alkyl,—S(O)₀₋₂aryl, —SO₂NR³⁴R³⁵, —SO₂NR³¹R³², alkyl, alkenyl, or alkynyl; R³¹,R³², and R³³, in each instance, are independently H or alkyl; and R³⁴and R³⁵ are taken together with the nitrogen atom to which they areattached to form a 3-10 membered ring.

In a fourth aspect of the invention, a compound of Formula I is providedhaving a structure of Formula II, Formula III, Formula IV, or Formula V,or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein

In a fifth aspect of the invention, a compound of Formula II, FormulaIII, Formula IV, or Formula V, or a pharmaceutically acceptable saltthereof, is provided wherein:

k is 1; R₁ is —H, -L-alkyl, -L-cycloalkyl, -L-alkyl-cycloalkyl, -L-aryl,-L-heteroaryl, -L-alkylaryl, -L-alkylheteroaryl, -L-alkylheterocylyl,-L-alkenyl, -L-alkynyl, -L-alkenyl-cycloalkyl, -L-alkynyl-cycloalkyl, or-L-heterocyclyl, each of which is unsubstituted or substituted by one ormore independent R³ substituents; L is absent, C═O, —C(═O)O—, —C(═O)NR³¹—, —S—, —S(O)—, —S(O)₂—, —S(O)₂NR³¹—, or —NR³¹—; W² is —NR⁶—,—N(R⁶)C(O)—N(R⁶)S(O)—, or —N(R⁶)S(O)₂—; R³ and R⁴ are independentlyhydrogen, halogen, aryl, heteroaryl, alkyl, cycloalkyl,-alkyl-cycloalkyl, -alkylheterocyclyl, C₂₋₁₀alkenyl, or C₂₋₁₀alkynyl; R²is hydrogen, bicyclic aryl, substituted monocyclic aryl, hetaryl, alkyl,cycloalkyl, -alkyl-cycloalkyl, -alkyl-monocyclic aryl,-alkylbicycloaryl, -alkylhetaryl, -alkylheterocyclyl, alkenyl, oralkynyl; R⁶ and R⁷ are each independently hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl,aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl or cycloalkyl, wherein each alkyl,alkenyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl or cycloalkyl is unsubstitutedor substituted by one or more independent R⁸ substituents; and R⁸ ishalo, —OR³¹, —SH, NH₂, —NR³⁴R³⁵, —NR³¹R³², —CO₂R³¹,—CO₂aryl-C(═O)NR³¹R³², C(═O) NR³⁴R³⁵, —NO₂, —CN, —S(O)₀₋₂ alkyl,—S(O)₀₋₂ aryl, —SO₂NR³⁴R³⁵, —SO₂NR³¹R³², alkyl, alkenyl, or alkynyl;R³¹, R³², and R³³, in each instance, are independently H or alkyl; andR³⁴ and R³⁵ are taken together with the nitrogen atom to which they areattached to form a 3-10 membered ring.

In some embodiments, the compound of Formula I, Formula II, Formula III,Formula IV, or Formula V, is a compound wherein L is optionally—N(R³¹)C(O)—. In other embodiments, R³ and R⁴ are optionally alkoxy,heterocyclyl, —OH, —R³¹, —CF₃, —OCF₃, —OR³¹, —NR³¹R³², —NR³⁴R³⁵,—C(O)R³¹, —CO₂R³¹, —(═O)NR³¹R³², —C(═O)NNR³⁴R³⁵, —NO₂, —CN, —S(O)₂R³¹,—SO₂NR³¹R³², —SO₂NR³⁴R³⁵, —NR³¹C(═O)R³², —NR³¹C(═O)OR³²,—NR³¹C(═O)NR³²R³³, —NR³¹S(O)₀₋₂R³², —C(═S)OR³¹, —C(═O)SR³¹,—NR³¹C(═NR³²)NR³³R³², —NR³¹C(═NR³²)OR³³, —NR³¹C(═NR³²)SR³³, —OC(═O)OR³³,—OC(═O)NR³¹R³², —OC(═O)SR³¹, —SC(═O)OR³¹, —P(O)OR³¹OR³², or—SC(═O)NR³¹R³².

In yet other embodiments, R² is optionally-alkyl-substituted monocyclicaryl, heterocyclyl, -cycloalkyl-heterocyclyl, or-heterocyclyl-heterocyclyl. In further embodiments, W² is optionally—N(R⁶)C(O)N(R⁷)—, or —NR³⁴R³⁵.

In a sixth aspect of the invention, a compound of Formula X, or apharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, is provided wherein:

k is 0 or 1; R₁ is —H, -L-alkyl, -L-cycloalkyl, -L-alkyl-cycloalkyl,-L-aryl, -L-heteroaryl, -L-alkylaryl, -L-alkylheteroaryl,-L-alkylheterocylyl, -L-alkenyl, -L-alkynyl, -L-alkenyl-cycloalkyl,-L-alkynyl-cycloalkyl, or -L-heterocyclyl, each of which isunsubstituted or substituted by one or more independent R³ substituents;L is absent, C═O, —C(═O)O—, —C(═O) NR³¹—, —S—, —S(O)—, —S(O)₂—,—S(O)₂NR³¹—, or —NR³¹—; X₁ is N or C-E¹ and X₂ is N; or X₁ is NH orCH-E¹ and X₂ is C; E¹ and E² are independently —(W¹)_(j)—R⁴; j, in eachinstance, is 0 or 1; W¹ is —O—, —NR⁶—, —S(O)₀₋₂—, —C(O)—, —C(O)N(R⁶)—,—N(R⁶)C(O)—, —N(R⁶)S(O)—, —N(R⁶)S(O)₂—, —C(O)O—, —CH(R⁶)N(C(O)OR⁷)—,—CH(R⁷)N(C(O)R⁷)—, —CH(R⁶)N(SO₂R⁷)—, —CH(R⁶)N(R⁷)—, —CH(R⁶)C(O)N(R⁷)—,—CH(R⁶)N(R⁷)C(O)—, —CH(R⁶)N(R⁷)S(O)—, or —CH(R⁶)N(R⁷)S(O)₂—; W² is —O—,—NR⁶—, —S(O)₀₋₂—, —C(O)—, —C(O)N(R⁶)—, —N(R⁶)C(O)—, —N(R⁶)S(O)—,—N(R⁶)S(O)₂—, —C(O)O—, —CH(R⁶)N(C(O)OR⁷)—, —CH(R⁷)N(C(O)R⁷)—,—CH(R⁶)N(SO₂R⁷)—, —CH(R⁶)N(R⁷)—, —CH(R⁶)C(O)N(R⁷)—, —CH(R⁶)N(R⁷)C(O)—,—CH(R⁶)N(R⁷)S(O)—, or —CH(R⁶)N(R⁷)S(O)₂—; R², R³, and R⁴ areindependently hydrogen, halogen, aryl, heteroaryl, alkyl, cycloalkyl,alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, heterocyclyl, alkyl-aryl,-alkyl-cycloalkyl, -alkylheterocyclyl, or -alkynyl-cycloalkyl; R⁶ and R⁷are each independently hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, aryl, heteroaryl,heterocyclyl or cycloalkyl, wherein each alkyl, alkenyl, aryl,heteroaryl, heterocyclyl or cycloalkyl is unsubstituted or substitutedby one or more independent R⁸ substituents; R⁸ is halo, —OR³¹, —SH, NH₂,—NR³⁴R³⁵, —NR³¹R³², —CO₂R³¹, —CO₂aryl-C(═O)NR³¹R³², C(═O) NR³⁴R³⁵, —NO₂,—CN, —S(O)₀₋₂ alkyl, —S(O)₀₋₂aryl, —SO₂NR³⁴R³⁵, —SO₂NR³¹R³², alkyl,alkenyl, or alkynyl; R³¹, R³², and R³³, in each instance, areindependently H or alkyl; and R³⁴ and R³⁵ are taken together with thenitrogen atom to which they are attached to form a 3-10 membered ring.

In a seventh aspect of the invention, a compound of Formula X, or apharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, is provided wherein

k is 0 or 1; R₁ is —H, -L-alkyl, -L-cycloalkyl, -L-alkyl-cycloalkyl,-L-aryl, -L-heteroaryl, -L-alkylaryl, -L-alkylheteroaryl,-L-alkylheterocylyl, -L-alkenyl, -L-alkynyl, -L-alkenyl-cycloalkyl,-L-alkynyl-cycloalkyl, or -L-heterocyclyl, each of which isunsubstituted or substituted by one or more independent R³ substituents;L is absent, C═O, —C(═O)O—, —C(═O) NR³¹—, —S—, —S(O)—, —S(O)₂—,—S(O)₂NR³¹—, or —NR³¹—; X₁ is N or C-E¹ and X₂ is N; or X₁ is NH orCH-E¹ and X₂ is C; E¹ and E² are independently —(W¹)_(j)—R⁴; j, in eachinstance, is 0 or 1; W¹ is —O—, —NR⁶—, —S(O)₀₋₂—, —C(O)—, —C(O)N(R⁶)—,—N(R⁶)C(O)—, —N(R⁶)S(O)—, —N(R⁶)S(O)₂—, —C(O)O—, —CH(R⁶)N(C(O)OR⁷)—,—CH(R⁷)N(C(O)R⁷)—, —CH(R⁶)N(SO₂R⁷)—, —CH(R⁶)N(R⁷)—, —CH(R⁶)C(O)N(R⁷)—,—CH(R⁶)N(R⁷)C(O)—, —CH(R⁶)N(R⁷)S(O)—, or —CH(R⁶)N(R⁷)S(O)₂—; W² is —O—,—NR⁶—, —S(O)₀₋₂—, —C(O)—, —C(O)N(R⁶)—, —N(R⁶)C(O)—, —N(R⁶)S(O)—,—N(R⁶)S(O)₂—, —C(O)O—, —CH(R⁶)N(C(O)OR⁷)—, —CH(R⁶)N(C(O)R⁷)—,—CH(R⁶)N(SO₂R⁷)—, —CH(R⁶)N(R⁷)—, —CH(R⁶)C(O)N(R⁷)—, —CH(R⁶)N(R⁷)C(O)—,—CH(R⁶)N(R⁷)S(O)—, or —CH(R⁶)N(R⁷)S(O)₂—; R², R³, and R⁴ areindependently hydrogen, halogen, aryl, heteroaryl, alkyl, cycloalkyl,alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, heterocyclyl, -alkyl-aryl,-alkyl-cycloalkyl, -alkylheterocyclyl, or -alkynyl-cycloalkyl; R⁶ and R⁷are each independently hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, aryl, heteroaryl,heterocyclyl or cycloalkyl, wherein each alkyl, alkenyl, aryl,heteroaryl, heterocyclyl or cycloalkyl is unsubstituted or substitutedby one or more independent R⁸ substituents; R⁸ is halo, —OR³¹, —SH, NH₂,—NR³⁴R³⁵, —NR³¹R³², —CO₂R³¹, —CO₂aryl-C(═O)NR³¹R³², C(═O) NR³⁴R³⁵, —NO₂,—CN, —S(O)₀₋₂ alkyl, —S(O)₀₋₂aryl, —SO₂NR³⁴R³⁵, —SO₂NR³¹R³², alkyl,alkenyl, or alkynyl; R³¹, R³², and R³³, in each instance, areindependently H or alkyl; and R³⁴ and R³⁵ are taken together with thenitrogen atom to which they are attached to form a 3-10 membered ring.

In a eighth aspect of the invention, a compound of Formula X has astructure of Formula XI or Formula XII:

In an ninth aspect of the invention, a compound of Formula XI or FormulaXII, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, is provided wherein:

k is 1; R₁ is H, L-alkyl, -L-cycloalkyl, -L-alkyl-cycloalkyl, -L-aryl,-L-heteroaryl, -L-alkylaryl, -L-alkylheteroaryl, -L-alkylheterocylyl,-L-alkenyl, -L-alkynyl, -L-alkenyl-cycloalkyl, -L-alkynyl-cycloalkyl, or-L-heterocyclyl, each of which is unsubstituted or substituted by one ormore independent R³ substituents; L is absent, C═O, —C(═O)O—, —C(═O)NR³¹—, —S—, —S(O)—, —S(O)₂—, —S(O)₂NR³¹—, or —NR³¹—; W² is NR⁶,—N(R⁶)C(O)—, —N(R⁶)S(O)—, or —N(R⁶)S(O)₂—; R², R³, and R⁴ areindependently hydrogen, halogen, aryl, heteroaryl, alkyl, cycloalkyl,alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, heterocyclyl, -alkyl-aryl,-alkyl-cycloalkyl, -alkylheterocyclyl, or alkynyl-cycloalkyl; R⁶ and R⁷are each independently hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, aryl, heteroaryl,heterocyclyl or cycloalkyl, wherein each alkyl, alkenyl, aryl,heteroaryl, heterocyclyl or cycloalkyl is unsubstituted or substitutedby one or more independent R⁸ substituents; R⁸ is halo, —OR³¹, —SH,—NH₂, —NR³⁴R³⁵, —NR³¹R³², —CO₂R³¹, —CO₂aryl-C(═O)NR³¹R³², C(═O)NR³⁴R³⁵,—NO₂, —CN, —S(O)₀₋₂ alkyl, —S(O)₀₋₂aryl, —SO₂NR³⁴R³⁵, —SO₂NR³¹R³²,alkyl, alkenyl, or alkynyl; R³¹, R³², and R³³, in each instance, areindependently H or alkyl; and R³⁴ and R³⁵ are taken together with thenitrogen atom to which they are attached to form a 3-10 membered ring.

In a tenth aspect of the invention, a compound of Formula XI or FormulaXII, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, is provided wherein:

k is 1; R₁ is H, L-alkyl, -L-cycloalkyl, -L-alkyl-cycloalkyl, -L-aryl,-L-heteroaryl, -L-alkylaryl, -L-alkylheteroaryl, -L-alkylheterocylyl,-L-alkenyl, -L-alkynyl, -L-alkenyl-cycloalkyl, -L-alkynyl-cycloalkyl, or-L-heterocyclyl, each of which is unsubstituted or substituted by one ormore independent R³ substituents; L is absent, C═O, —C(═O)O—, —C(═O)NR³¹—, —S—, —S(O)—, —S(O)₂—, —S(O)₂NR³¹—, or —NR³¹—; W² is NR⁶ orN(R⁶)C(O); R², R³, and R⁴ are independently hydrogen, halogen, aryl,heteroaryl, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl,heterocyclyl, alkyl-aryl, -alkyl-cycloalkyl, -alkylheterocyclyl, oralkynyl-cycloalkyl; R⁶ and R⁷ are each independently hydrogen, alkyl,alkenyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl or cycloalkyl, wherein eachalkyl, alkenyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl or cycloalkyl isunsubstituted or substituted by one or more independent R⁸ substituents;R⁸ is halo, —OR³¹, —SH, NH₂, —NR³⁴R³⁵, —NR³¹R³², —CO₂R³¹,—CO₂aryl-C(═O)NR³¹R³², C(═O) NR³⁴R³⁵, —NO₂, —CN, —S(O)₀₋₂ alkyl,—S(O)₀₋₂aryl, —SO₂NR³⁴R³⁵, —SO₂NR³¹R³², alkyl, alkenyl, or alkynyl; R³¹,R³², and R³³, in each instance, are independently H or alkyl; and R³⁴and R³⁵ are taken together with the nitrogen atom to which they areattached to form a 3-10 membered ring.

In some embodiments of the compound of Formula X, XI, or XII, L isoptionally —N(R³¹)C(O)—. In other embodiments, R³ and R⁴ are optionallyalkoxy, —OH, —R³¹, —CF₃, —OCF₃, —OR³¹, —NR³¹R³², —NR³⁴R³⁵, —C(O)R³¹,—CO₂R³¹, —C(═O)NR³¹R³², —C(═O)NNR³⁴R³⁵, —NO₂, —CN, S(O)₀₋₂R³¹,—SO₂NR³¹R³², —SO₂NR³⁴R³⁵, —NR³¹C(═O)R³², —NR³¹C(═O)OR³²,—NR³¹C(═O)NR³²R³³, —NR³¹S(O)₂R³², —C(═S)OR³¹, —C(═)SR³¹,—NR³¹C(═NR³²)NR³³R³², —NR³¹C(═NR³²)OR³³, —NR³¹C(═NR³²)SR³³, —OC(═O)OR³³,—OC(═O)NR³¹R³², —OC(═O)SR³¹, —SC(═O)OR³¹, —P(O)OR³¹OR³², or—SC(═O)NR³¹R³². In some other embodiments, R² is optionally-cycloalkyl-heterocyclyl, or heterocyclyl-heterocyclyl. Alternatively,W² is optionally N(R⁶)C(O)N(R⁷)—, CH(R⁷)C(O)—, or NR³⁴R³⁵.

In some embodiments of the invention, a compound having one of thefollowing formulae is provided:

In some embodiments of the invention, X₁ is N and X₂ is N or X₁ is C-E¹and X₂ is N.

In some embodiments of the invention, M₁ is 5-benzothiazolyl substitutedat the 2-position with (W²) R². In other embodiments of the invention,M₁ is 6-benzothiazolyl substituted at the 2-position with (W²) R².

In some embodiments of the invention, —(W²)_(k)— is —NR⁷—, —N(R⁷)C(O)—or —N(R⁷)S(O)₂. In other embodiments of the invention, R² is —H, alkyl,cycloalkyl, or alkyl-cycloalkyl. In further embodiments, R₁ is alkyl,cycloalkyl or heterocyclyl.

In some embodiments, the compound of Formula I, II, III, IV, V, X, XI,or XII inhibits a protein kinase. In some embodiments, the compound ofFormula I, II, III, IV, V, X, XI, or XII inhibits a lipid kinase. Insome embodiments, the compound of Formula I, II, III, IV, V, X, XI, orXII inhibits a protein kinase and a lipid kinase. In some embodiments,the compound of Formula I, II, III, IV, V, X, XI, or XII inhibits mTorC1and/or mTorC2.

In a tenth aspect of the invention, a pharmaceutical compositioncomprising a compound of Formula I, II, III, IV, V, X, XI, or XII and apharmaceutically acceptable carrier is provided.

In an eleventh aspect of the invention, a method is provided to inhibitactivity of a protein kinase and/or a lipid kinase present in a cell,comprising; contacting said cell with an effective amount of a compoundof Formula I, II, III, IV, V, X, XI, or XII. In some embodiments of themethod, the inhibiting takes place in a subject suffering from adisorder selected from the group consisting of cancer, bone disorder,inflammatory disease, immune disease, nervous system disease, metabolicdisease, respiratory disease, and cardiac disease. In some otherembodiments, the method further comprises administering a secondtherapeutic agent.

In a twelfth aspect of the invention, a method is provided to inhibitcell proliferation comprising contacting a cell with a compound ofFormula I, II, III, IV, V, X, XI, or XII that selectively inhibitsmTorC1 and/or mTorC2 activity relative to one or more type Iphosphatidylinositol 3-kinases (PI3-kinase) ascertained by an in vitrokinase assay, wherein the one or more type I PI3-kinase is selected fromthe group consisting of PI3-kinase α, PI3-kinase β, PI3-kinase γ, andPI3-kinase δ.

In a thirteenth aspect of the invention, a method is provided toameliorate a medical condition mediated by mTorC1 and/or mTorC2,comprising administering to a subject in need thereof a therapeuticallyeffective amount of a compound of any one of Formula I, II, III, IV, V,X, XI, or XII that selectively inhibits mTorC1 and/or mTorC2 activityrelative to one or more type I phosphatidylinositol 3-kinases(PI3-kinase) as ascertained in a cell-based assay or an in vitro kinaseassay, wherein the one or more type I PI3-kinase is selected from thegroup consisting of PI3-kinase α, PI3-kinase β, PI3-kinase γ, andPI3-kinase δ.

INCORPORATION BY REFERENCE

All publications and patent applications mentioned in this specificationare herein incorporated by reference to the same extent as if eachindividual publication or patent application was specifically andindividually indicated to be incorporated by reference.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS

FIG. 1 depicts the pharmacokinetics parameters of compound 4 in Table 5when tested in CD-1 mice following intravenous or oral administration.

FIG. 2 summaries the absorption distribution metabolism and excretiondata of compound 3 and compound 5 in Table 5. The data is obtained byperforming the procedures disclosed herein in the Example section.

FIG. 3 summarizes the inhibitory effects of Compound 3 and Compound 4 inTable 5on a variety of kinases. The symbols “+”, “++” and “+++” are usedto show the effectiveness of Compound 3 and Compound 4 in inhibiting agiven kinase in the Table.

DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION

While preferred embodiments of the present invention have been shown anddescribed herein, it will be obvious to those skilled in the art thatsuch embodiments are provided by way of example only. Numerousvariations, changes, and substitutions will now occur to those skilledin the art without departing from the invention. It should be understoodthat various alternatives to the embodiments of the invention describedherein may be employed in practicing the invention. It is intended thatthe appended claims define the scope of the invention and that methodsand structures within the scope of these claims and their equivalents becovered thereby.

Unless defined otherwise, all technical and scientific terms used hereinhave the same meaning as is commonly understood by one of skill in theart to which this invention belongs. All patents and publicationsreferred to herein are incorporated by reference.

As used in the specification and claims, the singular form “a”, “an” and“the” include plural references unless the context clearly dictatesotherwise.

The term “effective amount” or “therapeutically effective amount” refersherein to that amount of a compound described herein that is sufficientto effect the intended application including but not limited to diseasetreatment, as defined below. The therapeutically effective amount mayvary depending upon the intended application (in vitro or in vivo), orthe subject and disease condition being treated, e.g., the weight andage of the subject, the severity of the disease condition, the manner ofadministration and the like, which can readily be determined by one ofordinary skill in the art. The term also applies to a dose that willinduce a particular response in target cells, e.g. activation of aparticular signaling pathway including but not limited to activation ofPI3K pathway, reduction of platelet adhesion and/or cell migration,reduction in foci formation and other tumorigenic responses. Thespecific dose will vary depending on the particular compounds chosen,the dosing regimen to be followed, whether it is administered incombination with other compounds, timing of administration, the tissueto which it is administered, and the physical delivery system in whichit is carried.

As used herein, “treatment” or “treating,” or “palliating” and“ameliorating” are used interchangeably herein. These terms refers to anapproach for obtaining beneficial or desired results including but notlimited to therapeutic benefit and/or a prophylactic benefit. Bytherapeutic benefit is meant eradication or amelioration of theunderlying disorder being treated. Also, a therapeutic benefit isachieved with the eradication or amelioration of one or more of thephysiological symptoms associated with the underlying disorder such thatan improvement is observed in the patient, notwithstanding that thepatient may still be afflicted with the underlying disorder. Forprophylactic benefit, the compositions may be administered to a patientat risk of developing a particular disease, or to a patient reportingone or more of the physiological symptoms of a disease, even though adiagnosis of this disease may not have been made.

A “therapeutic effect,” as that term is used herein, encompasses atherapeutic benefit and/or a prophylactic benefit as described above. Aprophylactic effect includes delaying or eliminating the appearance of adisease or condition, delaying or eliminating the onset of symptoms of adisease or condition, slowing, halting, or reversing the progression ofa disease or condition, or any combination thereof.

The term “co-administration,” “administered in combination with,” andtheir grammatical equivalents, as used herein, encompassesadministration of two or more agents to an animal so that both agentsand/or their metabolites are present in the animal at the same time.Co-administration includes simultaneous administration in separatecompositions, administration at different times in separatecompositions, or administration in a composition in which both agentsare present.

The term “pharmaceutically acceptable salt” refers herein to saltsderived from a variety of organic and inorganic counter ions well knownin the art and include, by way of example only, sodium, potassium,calcium, magnesium, ammonium, tetraalkylammonium, and the like; and whenthe molecule contains a basic functionality, salts of organic orinorganic acids, such as hydrochloride, hydrobromide, tartrate,mesylate, acetate, maleate, oxalate and the like.

The terms “antagonist” and “inhibitor” are used interchangeably, andthey refer herein to a compound having the ability to inhibit abiological function of a target protein, whether by inhibiting theactivity or expression of the target protein. Accordingly, the terms“antagonist” and “inhibitors” are defined in the context of thebiological role of the target protein. While preferred antagonistsherein specifically interact with (e.g. bind to) the target, compoundsthat inhibit a biological activity of the target protein by interactingwith other members of the signal transduction pathway of which thetarget protein is a member are also specifically included within thisdefinition. A preferred biological activity inhibited by an antagonistis associated with the development, growth, or spread of a tumor.

The term “agonist” as used herein refers herein to a compound having theability to initiate or enhance a biological function of a targetprotein, whether by inhibiting the activity or expression of the targetprotein. Accordingly, the term “agonist” is defined in the context ofthe biological role of the target polypeptide. While preferred agonistsherein specifically interact with (e.g. bind to) the target, compoundsthat initiate or enhance a biological activity of the target polypeptideby interacting with other members of the signal transduction pathway ofwhich the target polypeptide is a member are also specifically includedwithin this definition.

As used herein, “agent” or “biologically active agent” refers herein toa biological, pharmaceutical, or chemical compound or other moiety.Non-limiting examples include simple or complex organic or inorganicmolecule, a peptide, a protein, an oligonucleotide, an antibody, anantibody derivative, antibody fragment, a vitamin derivative, acarbohydrate, a toxin, or a chemotherapeutic compound. Various compoundscan be synthesized, for example, small molecules and oligomers (e.g.,oligopeptides and oligonucleotides), and synthetic organic compoundsbased on various core structures. In addition, various natural sourcescan provide compounds for screening, such as plant or animal extracts,and the like. A skilled artisan can readily recognize that there is nolimit as to the structural nature of the agents of the presentinvention.

“Signal transduction” is a process during which stimulatory orinhibitory signals are transmitted into and within a cell to elicit anintracellular response. A modulator of a signal transduction pathwayrefers to a compound which modulates the activity of one or morecellular proteins mapped to the same specific signal transductionpathway. A modulator may augment (agonist) or suppress (antagonist) theactivity of a signaling molecule.

An “anti-cancer agent”, “anti-tumor agent” or “chemotherapeutic agent”refers herein to any agent useful in the treatment of a neoplasticcondition. One class of anti-cancer agents comprises chemotherapeuticagents. “Chemotherapy” means the administration of one or morechemotherapeutic drugs and/or other agents to a cancer patient byvarious methods, including intravenous, oral, intramuscular,intraperitoneal, intravesical, subcutaneous, transdermal, buccal, orinhalation or in the form of a suppository.

The term “cell proliferation” refers herein to a phenomenon by which thecell number has changed as a result of division. This term alsoencompasses cell growth by which the cell morphology has changed (e.g.,increased in size) consistent with a proliferative signal.

As used herein, the term “selective inhibition” or “selectively inhibit”as referred to a biologically active agent refers to the agent's abilityto preferentially reduce the target signaling activity as compared tooff-target signaling activity, via direct or interact interaction withthe target.

As used herein, “mTorC1 and/or mTorC2 activity” as applied to abiologically active agent refers to the agent's ability to modulatesignal transduction mediated by mTorC1 and/or mTorC2. For example,modulation of mTorC1 and/or mTorC2 activity is evidenced by alterationin signaling output from the PI3K/Akt/mTor pathway.

The term “B-ALL” as used herein refers to B-cell Acute LymphoblasticLeukemia.

As used herein, “subject” refers to an animal, such as a mammal, forexample a human. The methods described herein can be useful in bothhuman therapeutics and veterinary applications. In some embodiments, thepatient is a mammal, and in some embodiments, the patient is human.

An “anti-cancer agent”, “anti-tumor agent” or “chemotherapeutic agent”refers herein to any agent useful in the treatment of a neoplasticcondition. One class of anti-cancer agents comprises chemotherapeuticagents. “Chemotherapy” means the administration of one or morechemotherapeutic drugs and/or other agents to a cancer patient byvarious methods, including intravenous, oral, intramuscular,intraperitoneal, intravesical, subcutaneous, transdermal, buccal, orinhalation or in the form of a suppository.

“Prodrug” as used herein is meant to indicate a compound that may beconverted under physiological conditions or by solvolysis to abiologically active compound described herein. Thus, the term “prodrug”refers to a precursor of a biologically active compound that ispharmaceutically acceptable. A prodrug may be inactive when administeredto a subject, but is converted in vivo to an active compound, forexample, by hydrolysis. The prodrug compound often offers advantages ofsolubility, tissue compatibility or delayed release in a mammalianorganism (see, e.g., Bundgard, H., Design of Prodrugs (1985), pp. 7-9,21-24 (Elsevier, Amsterdam). A discussion of prodrugs is provided inHiguchi, T., et al., “Pro-drugs as Novel Delivery Systems,” A.C.S.Symposium Series, Vol. 14, and in Bioreversible Carriers in Drug Design,ed. Edward B. Roche, American Pharmaceutical Association and PergamonPress, 1987, both of which are incorporated in full by reference herein.The term “prodrug” is also meant to include any covalently bondedcarriers, which release the active compound in vivo when such prodrug isadministered to a mammalian subject. Prodrugs of an active compound, asdescribed herein, may be prepared by modifying functional groups presentin the active compound in such a way that the modifications are cleaved,either in routine manipulation or in vivo, to the parent activecompound. Prodrugs include compounds wherein a hydroxy, amino ormercapto group is bonded to any group that, when the prodrug of theactive compound is administered to a mammalian subject, cleaves to forma free hydroxy, free amino or free mercapto group, respectively.Examples of prodrugs include, but are not limited to, acetate, formateand benzoate derivatives of an alcohol or acetamide, formamide andbenzamide derivatives of an amine functional group in the activecompound and the like.

The term “in vivo” refers to an event that takes place in a subject'sbody.

The term “in vitro” refers to an event that takes places outside of asubject's body. For example, an in vitro assay encompasses any assay runoutside of a subject assay. In vitro assays encompass cell-based assaysin which cells

Unless otherwise stated, the connections of compound name moieties areat the rightmost recited moiety. That is, the substituent name startswith a terminal moiety, continues with any bridging moieties, and endswith the connecting moiety. For example, hetarylthio C₁₋₄ alkyl has aheteroaryl group connected through a thio sulfur to a C₁₋₄ alkyl radicalthat connects to the chemical species bearing the substituent. Thiscondition does not apply where a formula such as, for example “-L-C₁₋₁₀alkyl-C₃₋₈ cycloalkyl is represented. In such case, the terminal groupis a C₃₋₈ cycloalkyl group attached to a bridging C₁₋₁₀ alkyl moietywhich is attached to an element L.

Unless otherwise stated, structures depicted herein are also meant toinclude compounds which differ only in the presence of one or moreisotopically enriched atoms. For example, compounds having the presentstructures except for the replacement of a hydrogen by a deuterium ortritium, or the replacement of a carbon by ¹³C- or ¹⁴C-enriched carbonare within the scope of this invention.

The compounds of the present invention may also contain unnaturalproportions of atomic isotopes at one or more of atoms that constitutesuch compounds. For example, the compounds may be radiolabeled withradioactive isotopes, such as for example tritium (³H), iodine-125(¹²⁵I) or carbon-14 (¹⁴C). All isotopic variations of the compounds ofthe present invention, whether radioactive or not, are encompassedwithin the scope of the present invention.

The term “alkyl” as used herein refers to 1-10 carbons, that is 1, 2, 3,4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10 in either branched or straight chain configuration.As used herein, for example, “C_(1-n)alkyl” is used to mean an alkylhaving 1−n carbons—that is 1 or n carbons in a straight or branchedconfiguration, wherein n is an integer no more than 10. Typical alkylgroups are methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, n-butyl, sec-butyl,isobutyl, tert-butyl, n-pentyl, isopentyl, n-hexyl, n-heptyl, isooctyl,nonyl, decyl, undecyl, dodecyl, tetradecyl, hexadecyl, octadecyl,eicosyl, and the like. Suitable substituents for alkyl group, unlessdisclosed otherwise specifically in the specification, include halogen,aryl, hetaryl, —C₁₋₁₀ alkyl, —C₃₋₈cycloalkyl, —C₁₋₁₀alkylheterocyclyl,—C₂₋₁₀ alkenyl-, —C₂₋₁₀ alkynyl, —OH, —C₁₋₁₀alkyl, —CF₃, —O-aryl, —OCF₃,—OC₁₋₁₀alkyl, —NH₂, —N(C₁₋₁₀alkyl)(C₁₋₁₀alkyl), —NH(C₁₋₁₀alkyl),—NH(aryl), —NR³⁴R³⁵, —C(O)(C₁₋₁₀alkyl), —C(O)(C₁₋₁₀alkyl-aryl),—C(O)(aryl), —CO₂—C₁₋₁₀ alkyl, —CO₂—C₁₋₁₀alkylaryl, —CO₂-aryl,—C(═O)N(C₁₋₁₀alkyl)(C₁₋₁₀alkyl), —C(═O)NH(C₁₋₁₀alkyl), —C(═O)NR³⁴R³⁵,—(═O)NH₂, —OCF₃, —O(C₁₋₁₀ alkyl), —O-aryl, —N(aryl)(C₁₋₁₀ alkyl), —NO₂,—CN, —S(O)₀₋₂ C₁₋₁₀alkyl, —S(O)₀₋₂ C₁₋₁₀alkylaryl, —S(O)₀₋₂ aryl,—SO₂N(aryl), —SO₂N(C₁₋₁₀alkyl)(C₁₋₁₀alkyl), —SO₂NH(C₁₋₁₀alkyl) or—SO₂NR³⁴R³⁵ substituents. The term “halo” or “halogen” refers to fluoro,chloro, bromo, or iodo.

The term “haloalkyl” refers to an alkyl group substituted with one ormore halo groups, for example chloromethyl, 2-bromoethyl, 3-iodopropyl,trifluoromethyl, perfluoropropyl, 8-chlorononyl, and the like.

The term “acyl” refers to the structure —C(═O)—R, in which R is ageneral substituent variable such as, for example R¹ described above.Examples include, but are not limited to, (bi)(cyclo)alkylketo,(cyclo)alkenylketo, alkynylketo, arylketo, hetarylketo,heterocyclylketo, heterobicycloalkylketo.

As used herein, “cycloalkyl” refers to a 3-8 carbon cyclic aliphaticring structure, unsubstituted or substituted, such as cyclopropyl,methylcyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, 2-hydroxycyclopentyl,cyclohexyl, 4-chlorocyclohexyl, cycloheptyl, cyclooctyl, and the like.Cycloalkyl may be substituted by one or more substituents. Suitablesubstituents, unless specifically disclosed otherwise in thespecification, are: aryl, hetaryl, C₁₋₄alkyl, C₁₋₁₀alkyl,C₃₋₈cycloalkyl, —C₁₋₁₀alkylheterocyclyl, —C₂₋₁₀alkenyl-, —C₂₋₁₀alkynyl,—C₂₋₁₀alkynylheterocylyl, halo, —OH, —R³¹, —CF₃, —OCF₃, —OR³¹, —NR³¹R³²,—NR³⁴R³⁵, —C(O)R³¹, —CO₂R³¹, —C(═O)NR³¹R³², —C(═O)NNR³⁴R³⁵, —NO₂, —CN,—S(O)₀₋₂R³¹, —SO₂NR³¹R³², —SO₂NR³⁴R³⁵, —NR³¹C(═O)R³², —NR³¹C(═O)OR³²,—NR³¹C(═O)NR³²R³³, —NR³¹S(O)₀₋₂R³², —C(═S)OR³¹, —C(═O)SR³¹,—NR³¹C(═NR³²)NR³³R³², —NR³¹C(═NR³²)OR³³, —NR³¹C(═NR³²)SR³³, —OC(═O)OR³³,—OC(═O)NR³¹R³², —OC(═O)SR³¹, —SC(═O)OR³¹, —P(O)OR³¹OR³², or—SC(═O)NR³¹R³² substituents.

“C₁₋₁₀alkyl-C₃-8cycloalkyl” refers herein to an alkyl group, branched orstraight chain and containing 1 to 10 carbon atoms, attached to acycloalkyl group which contains 3 to 8 carbons, for example, 2-methylcyclopropyl, and 4-(cyclopropropyl) but-1yl.

As used herein, the term “heteroatom” or “ring heteroatom” is meant toinclude oxygen (O), nitrogen (N), sulfur (S), phosphorus (P), andsilicon (Si).

As used herein, the term “heteroalkyl,” by itself or in combination withanother term, means, unless otherwise stated, a stable straight orbranched chain, or cyclic hydrocarbon radical, or combinations thereof,consisting of at least one carbon atoms and at least one heteroatomselected from the group consisting of O, N, P, Si and S, and wherein thenitrogen, phosphorus, and sulfur atoms may optionally be oxidized andthe nitrogen heteroatom may optionally be quaternized. The heteroatom(s)O, N, P and S and Si may be placed at any interior position of theheteroalkyl group or at the position at which alkyl group is attached tothe remainder of the molecule. Examples include, but are not limited to,—CH₂—CH₂—O—CH₃, —CH₂—CH₂—NH—CH₃, —CH₂—CH₂—N(CH₃)—CH₃, —CH₂—S—CH₂—CH₃,—CH₂—CH₂, —S(O)—CH₃, —CH₂—CH₂—S(O)₂—CH₃, —CH═CH—O—CH₃, —Si(CH₃)₃,—CH₂—CH═N—OCH₃, —CH═CH—N(CH₃)—CH₃, O—CH₃, —O—CH₂—CH₃, and —CN. Up to twoheteroatoms may be consecutive, such as, for example, —CH₂—NH—OCH₃ and—CH₂—O—Si(CH₃)₃. As described above, heteroalkyl groups, as used herein,include those groups that are attached to the remainder of the moleculethrough a heteroatom, such as —C(O)R′, —C(O)NR′, —NR′R″, —OR′, —SR′,and/or —SO₂R′. Where “heteroalkyl” is recited, followed by recitationsof specific heteroalkyl groups, such as —NR′R″ or the like, it will beunderstood that the terms heteroalkyl and —NR′R″ are not redundant ormutually exclusive. Rather, the specific heteroalkyl groups are recitedto add clarity. Heteroalkyl is unsubstituted or substituted by one ormore substituents. Suitable substituents, unless specifically disclosedotherwise in the specification, are: aryl, hetaryl, C₁₋₄alkyl,C₁₋₁₀alkyl, C₃-8cycloalkyl, —C₁₋₁₀alkylheterocyclyl, —C₂10 alkenyl-,—C₂₋₁₀alkynyl, —C₂₋₁₀ alkynylheterocylyl, halo, —OH, —R³¹, —CF₃, —OCF₃,—OR³¹, —NR³¹R³², —NR³⁴R³⁵, —C(O)R³¹, —CO₂R³¹, —C(═O)NR³¹R³²,—C(═O)NNR³⁴R³⁵, —NO₂, —CN, —S(O)₀₋₂R³¹, —SO₂NR³¹R³², —SO₂NR³⁴R³⁵,—NR³¹C(═O)R³², —NR³¹C(═O)OR³², —NR³¹C(═O)NR³²R³³, —NR³¹S(O)₀₋₂R³²,—C(═S)OR³¹, —C(═O)SR³¹, —NR³¹C(═NR³²)NR³³R³², —NR³¹C(═NR³²)OR³³,—NR³¹C(═NR³²)SR³³, —OC(═O)OR³³, —OC(═O)NR³¹R³², —OC(═O)SR³¹,—SC(═O)OR³¹, —P(O)OR³¹OR³², or —SC(═O)NR³¹R³² substituents.

The term “heteroalkylaryl” as used herein, refers to a heteroalkyl groupas defined above which is attached to an aryl group, and may be attachedat a terminal point or through a branched portion of the heteroalkyl,for example, an benzyloxymethyl moiety or a 3-methoxymethylphenylmoiety.

The term “heteroalkylheteroaryl” as used herein refers likewise to aheteroalkyl group which is attached to a hetaryl moiety, for example, anethoxymethylpyridyl group.

The term “heteroalkyl-heterocylyl” as used herein refers to aheteroalkyl group as defined above, which is attached to a heterocyclicgroup, for example, 4(3-aminopropyl)-N-piperazinyl.

The term “heteroalkyl-C₃₋₈cycloalkyl” as used herein refers to aheteroalkyl group as defined above, which is attached to a cyclic alkylcontaining 3 to 8 carbons, for example, 1-aminobutyl-4-cyclohexyl.

As used herein, the term “alkenyl” refers to an ethylenicallyunsaturated hydrocarbon group having 2-10 carbon atoms in, straight orbranched configuration, for example vinyl, allyl, 1-butenyl, 2-butenyl,isopropenyl, 2-pentenyl, and the like. The term “C₂₋₁₀ alkenyl” refersto an alkenyl having 2-10 carbon atoms, substituted or unsubstituted.Alkenyl can substituted by one or more substituents. Suitablesubstituents, unless specifically disclosed otherwise in thespecification, are: aryl, hetaryl, C₁₋₄alkyl, C₁₋₁₀ alkyl,C₃₋₈cycloalkyl, —C₁₋₁₀alkylheterocyclyl, —C₂₋₁₀alkenyl-, —C₂₋₁₀alkynyl,—C₂₋₁₀alkynylheterocylyl, halo, —OH, —R³¹, —CF₃, —OCF₃, —OR³¹, —NR³¹R³²,—NR³⁴R³⁵, —C(O)R³¹, —CO₂R³¹, —C(═O)NR³¹R³², —C(═O)NNR³⁴R³⁵, —NO₂, —CN,—S(O)₀₋₂R³¹, —SO₂NR³¹R³², —SO₂NR³⁴R³⁵, —NR³¹C(═O)R³², —NR³¹C(═O)OR³²,—NR³¹C(═O)NR³²R³³, —NR³¹S(O)₀₋₂R³², —C(═S)OR³¹, —C(═O)SR³¹,—NR³¹C(═NR³²)NR³³R³², —NR³¹C(═NR³²)OR³³, —NR³¹C(═NR³²)SR³³, —OC(═O)OR³³,—OC(═O)NR³¹R³², —OC(═O)SR³¹, —SC(═O)OR³¹, —P(O)OR³¹OR³², or—SC(═O)NR³¹R³² substituents.

As used herein, the term “C₂₋₁₀ alkenyl-C₃₋₈ cycloalkyl” refers to agroup containing an alkenyl group, containing 2 to 10 carbons andbranched or straight chain, which is attached to a cycloalkyl groupcontaining 3 to 8 carbons, such as, for example3-prop-3-enyl-cyclopent-1yl, 3-(cyclopentyl)propen-1-yl, and the like.

As used herein, the term “C₂₋₁₀ alkenyl-heteroalkyl” refers to a grouphaving an alkenyl moiety, containing 2 to 10 carbon atoms and isbranched or straight chain, which is attached to a heteroalkyl group,such as, for example, allyloxy, and the like.

As used herein, the term “C₂₋₁₀ alkynyl-heteroalkyl” refers to a grouphaving an alkynyl moiety, containing 2 to 10 carbon atoms and isbranched or straight chain, which is attached to a heteroalkyl group,such as, for example, 4-but-1-ynoxy, and the like.

Unless otherwise specified, the term “cycloalkenyl” refers to a cyclicaliphatic 3 to 8 membered ring structure, optionally substituted withalkyl, hydroxy and halo, having 1 or 2 ethylenic bonds such asmethylcyclopropenyl, trifluoromethylcyclopropenyl, cyclopentenyl,cyclohexenyl, 1,4-cyclohexadienyl, and the like.

As used herein, the term “alkynyl” as used herein refers to anunsaturated hydrocarbon group having 2-10 carbon atoms in straight orbranched configuration, having at least one acetylenic bond, for exampleethynyl, propargyl, and the like. The term C₂₋₁₀ alkynyl refers to anaklynyl group having 2-10 carbon atoms. Alkynyl can be unsubstituted orsubstituted by one or more substituents. Suitable substituents, unlessspecifically disclosed otherwise in the specification, are: aryl,hetaryl, C₁₋₄alkyl, C₁₋₁₀alkyl, C₃₋₈cycloalkyl, —C₁₋₁₀alkylheterocyclyl,—C₂₋₁₀alkenyl-, —C₂₋₁₀alkynyl, C₂₋₁₀alkynylheterocylyl, halo, —OH, —R³¹,—CF₃, —OCF₃, —OR³¹, —NR³¹R³², —NR³⁴R³⁵, —C(O)R³¹, —CO₂R³¹,—C(═O)NR³¹R³², —C(═O)NNR³⁴R³⁵, —NO₂, —CN, —S(O)₀₋₂R³¹, —SO₂NR³¹R³²,—SO₂NR³⁴R³⁵, —NR³¹C(═O)R³², —NR³¹C(═O)OR³², —NR³¹C(═O)NR³²R³³,—NR³¹S(O)₀₋₂R³², —C(═S)OR³¹, —C(═O)SR³¹, —NR³¹C(═NR³²)NR³³R³²,—NR³¹C(═NR³²)OR³³, —NR³¹C(═NR³²)SR³³, —OC(═O)OR³³, —OC(═O)NR³¹R³²,—OC(═O)SR³¹, —SC(═O)OR³¹, —P(O)OR³¹OR³², or —SC(═O)NR³¹R³² substituents.

As used herein, the term “C₂₋₁₀ alkynyl-C₃₋₈ cycloalkyl” refers to agroup containing an alkynyl group, containing 2 to 10 carbons andbranched or straight chain, which is attached to a cycloalkyl groupcontaining 3 to 8 carbons, such as, for example3-prop-3-ynyl-cyclopent-1yl, and the like.

As used herein, the term “aryl” as used herein refers to phenyl ornaphthyl which may be optionally substituted. Examples of aryl include,but are not limited to, phenyl, 4-chlorophenyl, 4-fluorophenyl,4-bromophenyl, 3-nitrophenyl, 2-methoxyphenyl, 2-methylphenyl,3-methyphenyl, 4-methylphenyl, 4-ethylphenyl, 2-methyl-3-methoxyphenyl,2,4-dibromophenyl, 3,5-difluorophenyl, 3,5-dimethylphenyl,2,4,6-trichlorophenyl, 4-methoxyphenyl, naphthyl, 2-chloronaphthyl,2,4-dimethoxyphenyl, 4-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl, and2-iodo-4-methylphenyl. As used herein, the term “monocyclic aryl” asused herein refers to an an aryl moiety which has one ring, such as, forexample, phenyl, which may be optionally substituted. Examples ofmonocyclic aryl include, but are not limited to, phenyl, 4-chlorophenyl,4-fluorophenyl, 4-bromophenyl, 3-nitrophenyl, 2-methoxyphenyl,2-methylphenyl, 3-methyphenyl, 4-methylphenyl, 4-ethylphenyl,2-methyl-3-methoxyphenyl, 2,4-dibromophenyl, 3,5-difluorophenyl,3,5-dimethylphenyl, 2,4,6-trichlorophenyl, 4-methoxyphenyl,2,4-dimethoxyphenyl, 4-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl, and2-iodo-4-methylphenyl. As used herein, the term “bicyclic aryl” refersto an aryl with two fused rings, such as, for example, naphthyl, whichmay be optionally substituted. Examples of bicyclic aryl include but arenot limited to 2-chloronaphthyl, 1-iodonaphthyl, naphthol, and2-hydroxy-1-naphthoic acid. Aryl is optionally substituted by one ormore substituents. Suitable substituents, unless specifically disclosedotherwise in the specification, are: aryl, hetaryl, C₁₋₄akyl,C₁₋₁₀alkyl, C₃₋₈cycloalkyl, —C₁₋₁₀alkylheterocyclyl, C₂₋₁₀alkenyl-,—C₂₋₁₀alkynyl, —C₂₋₁₀alkynylheterocylyl, halo, —OH, —R³¹, —CF₃, —OCF₃,—OR³¹, —NR³¹R³², —NR³⁴R³⁵, —C(O)R³¹, —CO₂R³¹, —C(═O)NR³¹R³²,—C(═O)NNR³⁴R³⁵, —NO₂, —CN, —S(O)₀₋₂R³¹, —SO₂NR³¹R³², —SO₂NR³⁴R³⁵,—NR³¹C(═O)R³², —NR³¹C(═O)OR³², —NR³¹C(═O)NR³²R³³, —NR³¹S(O)₀₋₂R³²,—C(═S)OR³¹, —C(═O)SR³¹, —NR³¹C(═NR³²)NR³³R³², —NR³¹C(═NR³²)OR³³,—NR³¹C(═NR³²)SR³³, —OC(═O)OR³³, —OC(═O)NR³¹R³², —OC(═O)SR³¹,—SC(═O)OR³¹, —P(O)OR³¹OR³², or —SC(═O)NR³¹R³² substituents.

As used herein, the term “heteroaryl” or “hetaryl” or “heteroar-” or“hetar-” refer to a substituted or unsubstituted 5- or 6-memberedunsaturated ring containing one, two, three, or four independentlyselected heteroatoms, preferably one or two heteroatoms independentlyselected from oxygen, nitrogen, and sulfur or to a bicyclic unsaturatedring system containing up to 10 atoms including at least one heteroatomselected from oxygen, nitrogen, and sulfur. Examples of heteroarylsinclude, but are not limited to, 2-, 3- or 4-pyridinyl, pyrazinyl, 2-,4-, or 5-pyrimidinyl, pyridazinyl, triazolyl, tetrazolyl, imidazolyl, 2-or 3-thienyl, 2- or 3-furyl, pyrrolyl, oxazolyl, isoxazolyl, thiazolyl,isothiazolyl, oxadiazolyl, thiadiazolyl, quinolyl, isoquinolyl,benzimidazolyl, benzotriazolyl, benzofuranyl, and benzothienyl. Theheteroaryl may be optionally substituted with one or more substituents.Suitable substituents, unless specifically disclosed otherwise in thespecification are: aryl, hetaryl, C₁₋₄alkyl, C₁₋₁₀alkyl, C₃₋₈cycloalkyl,—C₁₋₁₀alkylheterocyclyl, —C₂₋₁₀alkenyl-, —C₂₋₁₀alkynyl,—C₂₋₁₀alkynylheterocylyl, halo, —OH, —R³¹, —CF₃, —OCF₃, —OR³¹, —NR³¹R³²,—NR³⁴R³⁵, —C(O)R³¹, —CO₂R³¹, —C(═O)NR³¹R³², —C(═O)NNR³⁴R³⁵, —NO₂, —CN,—S(O)₀₋₂R³¹, —SO₂NR³¹R³², —SO₂NR³⁴R³⁵, —NR³¹C(═O)R³², —NR³¹C(═O)OR³²,—NR³¹C(═O)NR³²R³³, —NR³¹S(O)₀₋₂R³², —C(═S)OR³¹, —C(═O)SR³¹,—NR³¹C(═NR³²)NR³³R³², —NR³¹C(═NR³²)OR³³, —NR³¹C(═NR³²)SR³³, —OC(═O)OR³³,—OC(═O)NR³¹R³², —OC(═O)SR³¹, —SC(═O)OR³¹, —P(O)OR³¹OR³², or—SC(═O)NR³¹R³² substituents. Heteroaryl ring system can be monocyclic,bicyclic, tricyclic, or otherwise polycyclic. Non-liming examples ofheteroaryls include, but are not limited to, azepinyl, acridinyl,benzimidazolyl, benzindolyl, 1,3-benzodioxolyl, benzofuranyl,benzooxazolyl, benzo[d]thiazolyl, benzothiadiazolyl,benzo[b][1,4]dioxepinyl, benzo[b][1,4]oxazinyl, 1,4-benzodioxanyl,benzonaphthofuranyl, benzoxazolyl, benzodioxolyl, benzodioxinyl,benzoxazolyl, benzopyranyl, benzopyranonyl, benzofuranyl,benzofuranonyl, benzofurazanyl, benzothiazolyl, benzothienyl(benzothiophenyl), benzothieno[3,2-d]pyrimidinyl, benzotriazolyl,benzo[4,6]imidazo[1,2-a]pyridinyl, carbazolyl, cinnolinyl,cyclopenta[d]pyrimidinyl,6,7-dihydro-5H-cyclopenta[4,5]thieno[2,3-d]pyrimidinyl,5,6-dihydrobenzo[h]quinazolinyl, 5,6-dihydrobenzo[h]cinnolinyl,6,7-dihydro-5H-benzo[6,7]cyclohepta[1,2-c]pyridazinyl, dibenzofuranyl,dibenzothiophenyl, furanyl, furazanyl, furanonyl, furo[3,2-c]pyridinyl,5,6,7,8,9,10-hexahydrocycloocta[d]pyrimidinyl,5,6,7,8,9,10-hexahydrocycloocta[d]pyridazinyl,5,6,7,8,9,10-hexahydrocycloocta[d]pyridinyl, isothiazolyl, imidazolyl,indazolyl, indolyl, indazolyl, isoindolyl, indolinyl, isoindolinyl,isoquinolyl, indolizinyl, isoxazolyl,5,8-methano-5,6,7,8-tetrahydroquinazolinyl, naphthyridinyl,1,6-naphthyridinonyl, oxadiazolyl, 2-oxoazepinyl, oxazolyl, oxiranyl,5,6,6a,7,8,9,10,10a-octahydrobenzo[h]quinazolinyl, 1-phenyl-1H-pyrrolyl,phenazinyl, phenothiazinyl, phenoxazinyl, phthalazinyl, pteridinyl,purinyl, pyranyl, pyrrolyl, pyrazolyl, pyrazolo[3,4-d]pyrimidinyl,pyridinyl, pyrido[3,2-d]pyrimidinyl, pyrido[3,4-d]pyrimidinyl,pyrazinyl, pyrimidinyl, pyridazinyl, pyrrolyl, quinazolinyl,quinoxalinyl, quinolinyl, isoquinolinyl, tetrahydroquinolinyl,5,6,7,8-tetrahydroquinazolinyl,5,6,7,8-tetrahydrobenzo[4,5]thieno[2,3-d]pyrimidinyl,6,7,8,9-tetrahydro-5H-cyclohepta[4,5]thieno[2,3-d]pyrimidinyl,5,6,7,8-tetrahydropyrido[4,5-c]pyridazinyl, thiazolyl, thiadiazolyl,thiapyranyl, triazolyl, tetrazolyl, triazinyl, thieno[2,3-d]pyrimidinyl,thieno[3,2-d]pyrimidinyl, thieno[2,3-c]pridinyl, and thiophenyl (i.e.thienyl).

As used herein, the term “aryl-alkyl” or “arylalkyl” or “aralkyl” isused to describe a group wherein the alkyl chain can be branched orstraight chain and is attached to an aryl moiety, as defined above.Examples of aryl-alkyl groups include, but are not limited to,optionally substituted benzyl, phenethyl, phenpropyl and phenbutyl suchas 4-chlorobenzyl, 2,4-dibromobenzyl, 2-methylbenzyl,2-(3-fluorophenyl)ethyl, 2-(4-methylphenyl)ethyl,2-(4-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl)ethyl, 2-(2-methoxyphenyl)ethyl,2-(3-nitrophenyl)ethyl, 2-(2,4-dichlorophenyl)ethyl,2-(3,5-dimethoxyphenyl)ethyl, 3-phenylpropyl, 3-(3-chlorophenyl)propyl,3-(2-methylphenyl)propyl, 3-(4-methoxyphenyl)propyl,3-(4-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl)propyl, 3-(2,4-dichlorophenyl)propyl,4-phenylbutyl, 4-(4-chlorophenyl)butyl, 4-(2-methylphenyl)butyl,4-(2,4-dichlorophenyl)butyl, 4-(2-methoxphenyl)butyl, and10-phenyldecyl.

As used herein, the term “C₁₋₁₀alkylaryl” as used herein refers to analkyl group, as defined above, containing 1 to 10 carbon atoms, branchedor unbranched, wherein the aryl group replaces one hydrogen on the alkylgroup, for example, 3-phenylpropyl.

As used herein, the term C₂₋₁₀ alkyl monocycloaryl” refers to a groupcontaining a terminal alkyl group, branched or straight chain andcontaining 2 to 10 atoms attached to a bridging aryl group which hasonly one ring, such as for example, 2-phenyl ethyl.

As used herein, the term C₁₋₁₀ alkyl bicycloaryl” refers to a groupcontaining a terminal alkyl group, branched or straight chain andcontaining 2 to 10 atoms attached to a bridging aryl group which isbicyclic, such as for example, 2-(1-naphthyl)-ethyl.

As used herein, the term “aryl-cycloalkyl” or “arylcycloalkyl” is usedto describe a group wherein the aryl group is attached to a cycloalkylgroup, for example phenylcyclopentyl, 3-(cyclopentyl)phenyl, and thelike.

As used herein, the term “hetaryl-C₃₋₈cycloalkyl” or“heteroaryl-C₃₋₈cycloalkyl” is used to describe a group wherein thehetaryl group is attached to a cycloalkyl group, which contains 3 to 8carbons, for example pyrid-2-yl-cyclopentyl, 3(cyclopentyl)pyridin-1yl,and the like.

As used herein, the term “hetaryl-heteroalkyl” refers to a group whereinthe hetaryl group is attached to a heteroalkyl group, such as forexample, pyrid-2-yl methylenoxy, and the like.

As used herein, the term “aryl-alkenyl” or “arylalkenyl” or “aralkenyl”is used to describe a group wherein the alkenyl chain can be branched orstraight chain and is attached to an aryl portion, as defined above, forexample styryl (2-phenylvinyl), phenpropenyl, and the like. As usedherein, the term “aryl-C₂₋₁₀ alkenyl” refers to an arylalkenyl asdescribed above wherein the alkenyl moiety contains 2 to 10 carbon atomssuch as for example, styryl (2-phenylvinyl), and the like.

As used herein, the term “C₂₋₁₀alkenyl-aryl” is used to describe a groupwherein the alkenyl group, which contains 2 to 10 carbon atoms and canbe branched or straight chain, is attached to the aryl, such as forexample, 3-propenyl-naphth-1-yl, and the like.

As used herein, the term “aryl-alkynyl” or “arylalkynyl” or “aralkynyl”is used to describe a group wherein the alkynyl chain can be branched orstraight chain and is attached to the aryl, as defined above, forexample 3-phenyl-1-propynyl, and the like. As used herein, the term“aryl-C₂₋₁₀alkynyl” means an arylalkynyl as described above wherein thealkynyl moiety contains two to ten carbons, such as, for example3-phenyl-1-propynyl, and the like.

As used herein, the term “C₂₋₁₀ alkynyl-aryl” means a group containingan alkynyl moiety attached to an aryl group, both as defined above,wherein the alkynyl moiety contains two to ten carbons, such as, forexample 3-propynyl-naphth-1-yl.

As used herein, the term “aryl-oxy” or “aryloxy” or “aroxy” is used todescribe an aryl group attached to a oxygen atom. Typical aryl-oxygroups include phenoxy, 3,4-dichlorophenoxy, and the like.

As used herein, the term “C₁₋₁₀alkoxy-C₁₋₁₀alkyl” refers to a groupwherein an alkoxy group, containing 1 to 10 carbon atoms and an oxygenatom within the branching or straight chain, is attached to an alkylgroup, branched or straight chain which contains 1 to 10 carbon atoms,such as, for example methoxypropyl, and the like.

As used herein, the term “C₁₋₁₀alkoxy-C₂₋₁₀alkenyl” refers to a groupwherein an alkoxy group, containing 1 to 10 carbon atoms and an oxygenatom within the branching or straight chain, is attached to a alkenylgroup, branched or straight chain which contains 1 to 10 carbon atoms,such as, for example 3-methoxybut-2-en-1-yl, and the like.

As used herein, the term “C₁₋₁₀alkoxy-C₂₋₁₀alkynyl” refers to a groupwherein an alkoxy group, containing 1 to 10 carbon atoms and an oxygenatom within the branching or straight chain, is attached to an alkynylgroup, branched or straight chain which contains 1 to 10 carbon atoms,such as, for example 3-methoxybut-2-in-1-yl, and the like.

As used herein, the term “heterocycloalkenyl” refers to a cycloalkenylstructure in which at least one carbon atom is replaced with aheteroatom selected from oxygen, nitrogen, and sulfur.

As used herein, the term “hetaryl-oxy” or “heteroaryl-oxy” or“hetaryloxy” or “heteroaryloxy” or “hetaroxy” or “heteroaroxy” is usedto describe a hetaryl group attached to a oxygen atom. Typicalhetaryl-oxy groups include 4,6-dimethoxypyrimidin-2-yloxy and the like.

As used herein, the term “hetarylalkyl” or “heteroarylalkyl” or“hetaryl-alkyl” or “heteroaryl-alkyl” or “hetaralkyl” or “heteroaralkyl”is used to describe a group wherein the alkyl chain can be branched orstraight chain and is attached to an aryl moiety, as defined above, forexample 3-furylmethyl, thienyl, furfuryl, and the like. As used herein,the term “hetaryl-C₁₋₁₀alkyl” is used to describe a hetaryl alkyl groupas described above where the alkyl group contains 1 to 10 carbon atoms.As used herein, the term “C₁₋₁₀alkyl-hetaryl” is used to describe analkyl attached to a hetaryl group as described above where the alkylgroup contains 1 to 10 carbon atoms.

As used herein, the term “hetarylalkenyl” or “heteroarylalkenyl” or“hetaryl-alkenyl” or “heteroaryl-alkenyl” or “hetaralkenyl” or“heteroaralkenyl” is used to describe a hetarylalkenyl group wherein thealkenyl chain can be branched or straight chain and is attached to anaryl moiety as defined above, for example 3-(4-pyridyl)-1-propenyl. Asused herein, the term “hetaryl-C₂₋₁₀alkenyl” group is used to describe agroup as described above wherein the alkenyl group contains 2 to 10carbon atoms. As used herein, the term “C₂₋₁₀ alkenyl-hetaryl” is usedto describe a group containing an alkenyl group, which is branched orstraight chain and contains 2 to 10 carbon atoms, and is attachedhetaryl group, such as, for example 2-styryl-4-pyridyl, and the like.

As used herein, the term “hetarylalkynyl” or “heteroarylalkynyl” or“hetaryl-alkynyl” or “heteroaryl-alkynyl” or “hetaralkynyl” or“heteroaralkynyl” is used to describe a group wherein the alkynyl chaincan be branched or straight chain and is attached to a heteroaryl, asdefined above, for example 4-(2-thienyl)-1-butynyl, and the like. Asused herein, the term “heteroaryl-C₂₋₁₀alkynyl” is used to describe ahetarylalkynyl group as described above wherein the alkynyl groupcontains 2 to 10 carbon atoms. The term “C₂₋₁₀alkynyl-hetaryl” is usedherein to describe a group containing an alkynyl group which contains 2to 10 carbon atoms and is branched or straight chain, which is attachedto a hetaryl group such as, for example, 4(but-1-ynyl) thien-2-yl, andthe like.

The term “heterocyclyl” or “hetcyclyl” refers herein to a substituted orunsubstituted 3-, 4-, 5-, or 6-membered saturated or partiallyunsaturated ring containing one, two, or three heteroatoms, preferablyone or two heteroatoms independently selected from oxygen, nitrogen andsulfur; or to a bicyclic ring system containing up to 10 atoms includingat least one heteroatom independently selected from oxygen, nitrogen,and sulfur wherein the ring containing the heteroatom is saturated.Examples of heterocyclyls include, but are not limited to,tetrahydrofuranyl, tetrahydrofuryl, pyrrolidinyl, piperidinyl,4-pyranyl, tetrahydropyranyl, thiolanyl, morpholinyl, piperazinyl,dioxolanyl, dioxanyl, indolinyl, and 5-methyl-6-chromanyl. Heterocyclylis unsubstituted or substituted by one or more substituents. Suitablesubstituents, unless specifically disclosed otherwise in thespecification, are: aryl, hetaryl, —C₁₋₄alkyl, —C₁₋₁₀alkyl,C₃₋₈cycloalkyl, —C₁₋₁₀alkylheterocyclyl, —C₂₋₁₀alkenyl-, —C₂₋₁₀alkynyl,—C₂₋₁₀alkynylheterocylyl, halo, —OH, —R³¹, —CF₃, —OCF₃, —OR³¹, —NR³¹R³²,—NR³⁴R³⁵, —C(O)R³¹, —CO₂R³¹, —C(═O)NR³¹R³², —C(═O)NNR³⁴R³⁵, —NO₂, —CN,—S(O)₀₋₂R³¹, —SO₂NR³¹R³², —SO₂NR³⁴R³⁵, —NR³¹C(═O)R³², —NR³¹C(═O)OR³²,—NR³¹C(═O)NR³²R³³, —NR³¹S(O)₀₋₂R³², —C(═S)OR³¹, —C(═O)SR³¹,—NR³¹C(═NR³²)NR³³R³², —NR³¹C(═NR³²)OR³³, —NR³¹C(═NR³²)SR³³, —OC(═O)OR³³,—OC(═O)NR³¹R³², —OC(═O)SR³¹, —SC(═O)OR³¹, —P(O)OR³¹OR³², or—SC(═O)NR³¹R³² substituents.

The term “heterocyclylalkyl” or “heterocyclyl-alkyl” or “hetcyclylalkyl”or “hetcyclyl-alkyl” is used herein to describe a group wherein thealkyl chain can be branched or straight chain and is attached to aheterocyclyl portion, as defined above, for example 3-piperidinylmethyland the like. The term “heterocycloalkylene” refers to the divalentderivative of heterocycloalkyl. The term “C₁₋₁₀alkyl-heterocycyl” refersherein to a group as defined above where the alkyl moiety contains 1 to10 carbon atoms. The term “heterocycyl-C₁₋₁₀alkyl” refers herein to agroup containing a heterocyclic group attached to a alkyl group whichcontains 1 to 10 carbons and is branched or straight chain, such as, forexample, 4-morpholinyl ethyl, and the like.

The term “heterocyclylalkenyl” or “heterocyclyl-alkenyl” or“hetcyclylalkenyl” or “hetcyclyl-alkenyl” are used herein to describe agroup wherein the alkenyl chain can be branched or straight chain and isattached to a heterocyclyl portion, as defined above, for example2-morpholinyl-1-propenyl and the like. The term “heterocycloalkenylene”refers to the divalent derivative of heterocyclylalkenyl.

The term “heterocycyl-C₂₋₁₀ alkenyl” refers herein to a group as definedabove where the alkenyl group contains 2 to 10 carbon atoms and isbranched or straight chain, such as, for example,4-(N-piperazinyl)-but-2-en-1-yl, and the like.

The term “heterocyclylalkynyl” or “heterocyclyl-alkynyl” or“hetcyclylalkynyl” or “hetcyclyl-alkynyl” is used herein to describe agroup wherein the alkynyl chain can be branched or straight chain and isattached to a heterocyclylalkynyl moiety with the terminal heterocyclylportion, as defined above, for example 2-pyrrolidinyl-1-butynyl and thelike.

The term “heterocycyl-C₂₋₁₀ alkynyl” refers herein to a group as definedabove where the alkynyl group contains 2 to 10 carbon atoms and isbranched or straight chain, such as, for example,4-(N-piperazinyl)-but-2-yn-1-yl, and the like.

The term “aryl-heterocycyl” refers herein to a group containing a arylgroup attached to a heterocyclic group, such as for example,N4-(4-phenyl)-piperazinyl, and the like.

The term “hetaryl-heterocycyl” refers herein to a group containing ahetaryl group attached to a heterocyclic group, such as for example,N4-(4-pyridyl)-piperazinyl, and the like.

The term “cycloalkylalkyl” or “cycloalkyl-alkyl” refer to a cycloalkylgroup as defined above attached to an alkyl group, for examplecyclopropylmethyl, cyclohexylethyl, and the like.

The term “cycloalkylalkenyl” or “cycloalkyl-alkenyl” refer to acycloalkyl group as defined above attached to an alkenyl group, forexample cyclohexylvinyl, cycloheptylallyl, and the like.

The term “cycloalkylalkynyl” or “cycloalkyl-alkynyl” refer to acycloalkyl group as defined above attached to an alkynyl group, forexample cyclopropylpropargyl, 4-cyclopentyl-2-butynyl, and the like.

The term “cycloalkenylalkyl” or “cycloalkenyl-alkyl” refer to acycloalkenyl group as defined above attached to an alkyl group, forexample 2-(cyclopenten-1-yl)ethyl and the like.

The term “cycloalkenylalkenyl” or “cycloalkenyl-alkenyl” refer to acycloalkenyl group as defined above attached to an alkenyl group, forexample 1-(cyclohexen-3-yl)allyl and the like.

The term “cycloalkenylalkynyl” or “cycloalkenyl-alkynyl” refer to acycloalkenyl group as defined above attached to an alkynyl group, forexample 1-(cyclohexen-3-yl)propargyl and the like.

The term “alkoxy” includes both branched and straight chain alkyl groupsattached to an oxygen atom.

Typical alkoxy groups include methoxy, ethoxy, n-propoxy, isopropoxy,tert-butoxy and the like.

The term “haloalkoxy” refers herein to an alkoxy group substituted withone or more halo groups, for example chloromethoxy, trifluoromethoxy,difluoromethoxy, perfluoroisobutoxy, and the like.

The term “alkylthio” includes both branched and straight chain alkylgroups attached to a bridging sulfur atom, for example methylthio andthe like.

The term “alkoxyalkyl” refers herein to an alkyl group substituted withan alkoxy group, for example isopropoxymethyl and the like.

The term “alkoxyalkenyl” refers herein to an alkenyl group substitutedwith an alkoxy group, for example 3-methoxyallyl and the like.

The term “alkoxyalkynyl” refers herein to an alkynyl group substitutedwith an alkoxy group, for example 3-methoxypropargyl and the like.

The term “C₂₋₁₀ alkenylC₃₋₈cycloalkyl” refers herein to an alkenyl groupas defined above substituted with a three to eight membered cycloalkylgroup, for example, 4-(cyclopropyl)-2-butenyl and the like.

The term “C₂₋₁₀alkynylC₃₋₈ cycloalkyl” refers herein to an alkynyl groupas defined above substituted with a three to eight membered cycloalkylgroup, for example, 4-(cyclopropyl)-2-butynyl and the like.

The term “heterocyclyl-C₁₋₁₀ alkyl” refers herein to a heterocyclicgroup as defined above substituted with an alkyl group as defined abovehaving 1 to 10 carbons, for example, 4-(N-methyl)-piperazinyl, and thelike.

The term “heterocyclyl-C₂₋₁₀alkenyl” refers herein to a heterocyclicgroup as defined above, substituted with an alkenyl group as definedabove, having 2 to 10 carbons, for example, 4-(N-allyl) piperazinyl, andthe like.

Moieties wherein the heterocyclic group is substituted on a carbon atomwith an alkenyl group are also included.

The term “heterocyclyl-C₂₋₁₀alkynyl” refers herein to a heterocyclicgroup as defined above, substituted with an alkynyl group as definedabove, having 2 to 10 carbons, for example, 4-(N-propargyl) piperazinyl,and the like. Moieties wherein the heterocyclic group is substituted ona carbon atom with an alkenyl group are also included.

The term “oxo” refers to an oxygen that is double bonded to a carbonatom. One in the art understands that an “oxo” requires a second bondfrom the atom to which the oxo is attached. Accordingly, it isunderstood that oxo cannot be substituted onto an aryl or heteroarylring, unless it forms part of the aromatic system as a tautomer.

Compounds described herein can contain one or more asymmetric centersand may thus give rise to diastereomers and optical isomers. The presentinvention includes all such possible diastereomers as well as theirracemic mixtures, their substantially pure resolved enantiomers, allpossible geometric isomers, and pharmaceutically acceptable saltsthereof. The above Formula I is shown without a definitivestereochemistry at certain positions. The present invention includes allstereoisomers of Formula I and pharmaceutically acceptable saltsthereof. Further, mixtures of stereoisomers as well as isolated specificstereoisomers are also included. During the course of the syntheticprocedures used to prepare such compounds, or in using racemization orepimerization procedures known to those skilled in the art, the productsof such procedures can be a mixture of stereoisomers.

The present invention includes all manner of rotamers andconformationally restricted states of a compound of the invention.

The terms “solvent,” “organic solvent,” and “inert solvent” each mean asolvent inert under the conditions of the reaction being described inconjunction therewith including, for example, benzene, toluene,acetonitrile, tetrahydrofuran (“THF”), dimethylformamide (“DMF”),chloroform, methylene chloride (or dichloromethane), diethyl ether,methanol, N-methylpyrrolidone (“NMP”), pyridine and the like. Unlessspecified to the contrary, the solvents used in the reactions describedherein are inert organic solvents. Unless specified to the contrary, foreach gram of the limiting reagent, one cc (or mL) of solvent constitutesa volume equivalent.

Isolation and purification of the chemical entities and intermediatesdescribed herein can be effected, if desired, by any suitable separationor purification procedure such as, for example, filtration, extraction,crystallization, column chromatography, thin-layer chromatography orthick-layer chromatography, or a combination of these procedures.Specific illustrations of suitable separation and isolation procedurescan be had by reference to the examples hereinbelow. However, otherequivalent separation or isolation procedures can also be used.

When desired, the (R)- and (S)-isomers of the compounds of the presentinvention, if present, may be resolved by methods known to those skilledin the art, for example by formation of diastereoisomeric salts orcomplexes which may be separated, for example, by crystallization; viaformation of diastereoisomeric derivatives which may be separated, forexample, by crystallization, gas-liquid or liquid chromatography;selective reaction of one enantiomer with an enantiomer-specificreagent, for example enzymatic oxidation or reduction, followed byseparation of the modified and unmodified enantiomers; or gas-liquid orliquid chromatography in a chiral environment, for example on a chiralsupport, such as silica with a bound chiral ligand or in the presence ofa chiral solvent. Alternatively, a specific enantiomer may besynthesized by asymmetric synthesis using optically active reagents,substrates, catalysts or solvents, or by converting one enantiomer tothe other by asymmetric transformation.

The compounds described herein can be optionally contacted with apharmaceutically acceptable acid to form the corresponding acid additionsalts.

A compound of Formula I or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof isprovided in this invention, wherein:

X₁ is N or C-E¹ and X₂ is N; or X₁ is NH or CH-E¹ and X₂ is C; or X₁ isN or C-E¹, X₂ is S, and R₁ is absent; or X₁ is N or C-E¹, X₂ is O, andR₁ is absent;

R₁ is H, L-C₁₋₁₀alkyl, -L-C₃₋₈cycloalkyl, -L-C₁₋₁₀alkyl-C₃₋₈ cycloalkyl,-L-aryl, -L-heteroaryl, -L-C₁₋₁₀alkylaryl, -L-C₁₋₁₀alkylhetaryl,-L-C₁₋₁₀alkylheterocylyl, -L-C₂₋₁₀alkenyl, -L-C₂₋₁₀alkynyl,-L-C₂₋₁₀alkenyl-C₃₋₈cycloalkyl, -L-C₂₋₁₀alkynyl-C₃₋₈cycloalkyl,-L-heteroalkyl, -L-heteroalkylaryl, -L-heteroalkylheteroaryl,-L-heteroalkyl-heterocylyl, -L-heteroalkyl-C₃₋₈cycloalkyl, -L-aralkyl,-L-heteroaralkyl, or -L-heterocyclyl, each of which is unsubstituted orsubstituted by one or more independent R³ substituents;

L is absent, C═O, —C(═O)O—, —C(═O) NR³¹—, —S—, —S(O)—, —S(O)₂—,—S(O)₂NR³¹—, —NR³¹—, or N(R³¹)C(O)—;

M₁ is benzothiazolyl substituted with (W²)_(k)R²;

k, in each instance, is 0 or 1;

E¹ and E² are independently (W¹)_(j)—R²;

j, in each instance, is 0 or 1;

W¹ is —O—, —NR⁶—, —S(O)₀₋₂—, —C(O)—, —C(O)N(R⁶)—, —N(R⁶)C(O)—,—N(R⁶)S(O)—, —N(R⁶)S(O)₂—, —C(O)O—, —CH(R⁶)N(C(O)OR⁷)—,—CH(R⁷)N(C(O)R⁷)—, —CH(R⁶)N(SO₂R⁷), —CH(R⁶)N(R⁷)—, —CH(R⁶)C(O)N(R⁷)—,—CH(R⁶)N(R⁷)C(O)—, —CH(R⁶)N(R⁷)S(O)—, or —CH(R⁶)N(R⁷)S(O)₂—;

W² is —O—, —NR⁶—, —S(O)₀₋₂—, —C(O)—, —C(O)N(R⁶)—, —N(R⁶)C(O)—,—N(R⁶)S(O)—, —N(R⁶)S(O)₂—, —C(O)O—, —CH(R⁶)N(C(O)OR⁷)—,—CH(R⁷)N(C(O)R⁷)—, —CH(R⁶)N(SO₂R⁷), —CH(R⁶)N(R⁷)—, —CH(R⁶)C(O)N(R⁷)—,—CH(R⁶)N(R⁷)C(O)—, —CH(R⁶)N(R⁷)S(O)—, —CH(R⁶)N(R⁷)S(O)₂—,—N(R⁶)C(O)N(R⁷)—, —CH(R⁷)C(O)—, or —NR³⁴R³⁵;

R³ and R⁴ are independently hydrogen, halogen, aryl, hetaryl, C₁₋₄alkyl,C₁₋₁₀alkyl, C₃₋₈cycloalkyl, —C₁₋₁₀alkyl-C₃₋₈cycloalkyl,—C₃₋₈cycloalkyl-C₁₋₁₀alkyl, —C₃₋₈cycloalkyl-C₂₋₁₀alkenyl,—C₃₋₈cycloalkyl-C₂₋₁₀alkynyl, —C₁₋₁₀alkyl-C₂₋₁₀alkenyl, —C₁₋₁₀alkyl-C₂₋₁₀alkynyl, —C₁₋₁₀alkylaryl, —C₁₋₁₀alkylhetaryl,—C₁₋₁₀alkylheterocyclyl, —C₂₋₁₀alkenyl, C₂₋₁₀alkynyl,—C₂₋₁₀alkenyl-C₁₋₁₀alkyl, —C₂₋₁₀alkynyl-C₁₋₁₀alkyl, —C₂₋₁₀alkenylaryl,—C₂₋₁₀alkenylhetaryl, —C₂₋₁₀alkenylheteroalkyl,—C₂₋₁₀alkenylheterocyclcyl, —C₂₋₁₀alkenyl-C₃₋₈cycloalkyl,—C₂₋₁₀alkynyl-C₃₋₈cycloalkyl, —C₂₋₁₀alkynylaryl, —C₂₋₁₀ alkynylhetaryl,—C₂₋₁₀ alkynylheteroalkyl, —C₂₋₁₀alkynylheterocylyl,—C₂₋₁₀alkynyl-C₃₋₈cycloalkenyl, —C₁₋₁₀alkoxy C₁₋₁₀alkyl,—C₁₋₁₀alkoxy-C₂₋₁₀alkenyl, —C₁₋₁₀alkoxy-C₂₋₁₀alkynyl, -heterocyclyl,-heterocyclyl-C₁₋₁₀alkyl, -heterocyclyl-C₂₋₁₀alkenyl,-heterocyclyl-C₂₋₁₀alkynyl, -aryl-C₁₋₁₀alkyl, -aryl-C₂₋₁₀alkenyl,-aryl-C₂₋₁₀alkynyl, -aryl-heterocyclyl, -hetaryl-C₁₋₁₀alkyl,-hetaryl-C₂₋₁₀alkenyl, -hetaryl-C₂₋₁₀alkynyl, -hetaryl-C₃₋₈cycloalkyl,-heteroalkyl, -hetaryl-heteroalkyl, -hetaryl-heterocyclyl, or -alkoxy,wherein each of said aryl or heteroaryl moieties is unsubstituted or issubstituted with one or more independent halo, —OH, —R³¹, —CF₃, —OCF₃,—OR³¹, —NR³¹R³², —NR³⁴R³⁵, —C(O)R³¹, —CO₂R³¹, —C(═O)NR³¹R³²,—C(═O)NNR³⁴R³⁵, —NO₂, —CN, —S(O)₀₋₂R³¹, —SO₂NR³¹R³², —SO₂NR³⁴R³⁵,—NR³¹C(═O)R³², —NR³¹C(═O)OR³², —NR³¹C(═O)NR³²R³³, —NR³¹S(O)₀₋₂R³²,—C(═S)OR³¹, —C(═O)SR³¹, —NR³¹C(═NR³²)NR³³R³², —NR³¹C(═NR³²)OR³³,—NR³¹C(═NR³²)SR³³, —OC(═O)OR³³, —OC(═O)NR³¹R³², —OC(═O)SR³¹,—SC(═O)OR³¹, —P(O)OR³¹OR³², or —SC(═O)NR³¹R³² substituents, and whereineach of said alkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, or heteroalkyl moieties isunsubstituted or substituted with one or more halo, —OH, —R³¹, —CF₃,—OCF₃, —OR³¹, —O-aryl, —NR³¹R³², —NR³⁴R³⁵, —C(O)R³¹, —CO₂R³¹,—C(═O)NNR³⁴R³⁵, —C(═O)NR³¹R³², —SO₂NR³¹R³², or —SO₂NR³⁴R³⁵ substituents;or R³ and R⁴ are independently —OH, —R³¹, —CF₃, —OCF₃, —OR³¹, —NR³¹R³²,—NR³⁴R³⁵, —C(O)R³¹, —CO₂R³¹, —C(═O)NR³¹R³², —C(═O)NNR³⁴R³⁵, —NO₂, —CN,—S(O)₀₋₂R³¹, —SO₂NR³¹R³², —SO₂NR³⁴R³⁵, —NR³¹C(═O)R³², —NR³¹C(═O)OR³²,—NR³¹C(═O)NR³²R³³, —NR³¹S(O)₀₋₂R³², —C(═S)OR³¹, —C(═O)SR³¹,—NR³¹C(═NR³²)NR³³R³², —NR³¹C(═NR³²)OR³³, —NR³¹C(═NR³²)SR³³, —OC(═O)OR³³,—OC(═O)NR³¹R³², —OC(═O)SR³¹, —SC(═O)OR³¹, —P(O)OR³¹OR³², or—SC(═O)NR³¹R³²;

R² is hydrogen, bicyclic aryl, substituted monocyclic aryl, heteroaryl,C₁₋₄alkyl, C₁₋₁₀ alkyl, C₃₋₈cycloalkyl, —C₁₋₁₀ alkyl-C₃₋₈cycloalkyl,—C₃₋₈cycloalkyl-C₁₋₁₀alkyl, —C₃₋₈cycloalkyl-C₂₋₁₀alkenyl,—C₃₋₈cycloalkyl-C₂₋₁₀alkynyl, —C₂₋₁₀alkyl-monocyclic aryl, -monocyclicaryl-C₂₋₁₀alkyl, —C₁₋₁₀alkylbicycloaryl, -bicycloaryl-C₁₋₁₀alkyl,-substituted C₁₋₁₀alkylaryl, -substituted aryl-C₁₋₁₀alkyl,—C₁₋₁₀alkylheteroaryl, —C₁₋₁₀alkylheterocyclyl, —C₂₋₁₀alkenyl,C₂₋₁₀alkynyl, —C₂₋₁₀alkenylaryl, —C₂₋₁₀alkenylhetaryl,—C₂₋₁₀alkenylheteroalkyl, —C₂₋₁₀alkenylheterocyclcyl, —C₂₋₁₀alkynylaryl,—C₂₋₁₀alkynylhetaryl, —C₂₋₁₀alkynylheteroalkyl,—C₂₋₁₀alkynylheterocylyl, —C₂₋₁₀alkenyl-C₃₋₈cycloalkyl,—C₂₋₁₀alkynyl-C₃₋₈cycloalkenyl, —C₁₋₁₀alkoxy C₁₋₁₀alkyl,—C₁₋₁₀alkoxyC₂₋₁₀alkenyl, —C₁₋₁₀ alkoxyC₂₋₁₀alkynyl, -heterocyclyl,-heteroalkyl, -heterocyclyl C₁₋₁₀alkyl, -heterocyclylC₂₋₁₀alkenyl,-heterocyclyl-C₂₋₁₀alkynyl, -aryl-C₂₋₁₀alkenyl, -aryl-C₂₋₁₀alkynyl,-aryl-heterocyclyl, -hetaryl-C₁₋₁₀alkyl, -heteroaryl-C₂₋₁₀alkenyl,-heteroaryl-C₂₋₁₀alkynyl, -heteroaryl-C₃₋₈cycloalkyl,-heteroaryl-heteroalkyl, -heteroaryl-heterocyclyl, -alkyl-substitutedmonocyclic aryl, heterocyclyl, -cycloalkyl-heterocyclyl, or-heterocyclyl-heterocyclyl; wherein each of said bicyclic aryl orheteroaryl moieties is unsubstituted or substituted, and further whereinsaid substituted monocyclic aryl, substituted bicyclic aryl orsubstituted heteroaryl is substituted with one or more independent halo,—OH, —R³¹, —CF₃, —OCF₃, —OR³¹, —NR³¹R³², —NR³⁴R³⁵, —C(O)R³¹, —CO₂R³¹,—C(═O)NR³¹R³², —C(═O)NNR³⁴R³⁵, —NO₂, —CN, —S(O)₀₋₂R³¹, —SO₂NR³¹R³²,—SO₂NR³⁴R³⁵, —NR³¹C(═O)R³², —NR³¹C(═O)OR³², —NR³¹C(═O)NR³²R³³,—NR³¹S(O)₂R³², —C(═S)OR³¹, —C(═O)SR³¹, —NR³¹C(═NR³²)NR³³R³²,—NR³¹C(═NR³²)OR³³, —NR³¹C(═NR³²)SR³³, —OC(═O)OR³³, —OC(═O)NR³¹R³²,—OC(═O)SR³¹, —SC(═O)OR³¹, —P(O)OR³¹OR³², or —SC(═O)NR³¹R³² substituents,and wherein each of said alkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, or heteroalkylmoieties is unsubstituted or substituted with one or more halo, —OH,—R³¹, —CF₃, —OCF₃, —OR³¹, —O-aryl, —NR³¹R³², —NR³⁴R³⁵, —C(O)R³¹,—CO₂R³¹, —C(═O)NNR³⁴R³⁵, or —C(═O)NR³¹R³² substituents;

R⁶ and R⁷ are each independently hydrogen, C₁₋₁₀alkyl, C₂₋₁₀alkenyl,aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl or C₃₋₁₀ cycloalkyl, each of which exceptfor hydrogen is unsubstituted or substituted by one or more independentR⁸ substituents.

R⁸ is halo, —OR³¹, —SH, NH₂, —NR³⁴R³⁵, —NR³¹R³², —CO₂R³¹,—CO₂aryl-C(═O)NR³¹R³², —C(═O) NR³⁴R³⁵, —NO₂, —CN, —S(O)₀₋₂ C₁₋₁₀alkyl,—S(O)₀₋₂aryl, —SO₂NR³⁴R³⁵, —SO₂NR³¹R³², alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, oralkynyl; or R⁸ is -aryl-alkyl, -aryl-alkenyl, -aryl-alkynyl,-heteroaryl-alkyl, -heteroaryl-alkenyl, -hetaryl-alkynyl, each of whichis unsubstituted or substituted with one or more independent halo,cyano, nitro, —Oalkyl, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, haloalkyl, haloalkenyl,haloalkynyl, —COOH, —C(═O)NR³¹R³², —C(═O)NR³⁴R³⁵, —SO₂NR³⁴R³⁵,—SO₂NR³¹R³², —NR³¹R³², or —NR³⁴R³⁵ substituents;

R³¹, R³², and R³³, in each instance, are H or unsubstituted orsubstituted C₁₋₁₀alkyl with one or more aryl, heteroalkyl, heterocyclyl,or hetaryl substituents, wherein each of said alkyl, aryl, heteroalkyl,heterocyclyl, or hetaryl groups is unsubstituted or substituted with oneor more halo, —OH, —C₁₋₁₀alkyl, —CF₃, —O-aryl, —OCF₃, —OC₁₋₁₀alkyl,—NH₂, —N(C₁₋₁₀alkyl)(C₁₋₁₀alkyl), —NH(C₁₋₁₀alkyl), —NH(aryl), —NR³⁴R³⁵,—C(O)(C₁₋₁₀alkyl), —C(O)(C₁₋₁₀alkyl-aryl), —C(O)(aryl), —CO₂—C₁₋₁₀alkyl,—CO₂—C₁₋₁₀alkylaryl, —CO₂-aryl, —C(═O)N(C₁₋₁₀alkyl)(C₁₋₁₀alkyl),—C(═O)NH(C₁₋₁₀alkyl), —C(═O)NR³⁴R³⁵, —C(═O)NH₂, —OCF₃, —O(C₁₋₁₀alkyl),—O-aryl, —N(aryl)(C₁₋₁₀alkyl), —NO₂, —CN, —S(O)₀₋₂ C₁₋₁₀alkyl, —S(O)₀₋₂C₁₋₁₀alkylaryl, —S(O)₀₋₂ aryl, —SO₂N(aryl),—SO₂N(C₁₋₁₀alkyl)(C₁₋₁₀alkyl), —SO₂NH(C₁₋₁₀alkyl) or —SO₂NR³⁴R³⁵substituents;

R³⁴ and R³⁵ in —NR³⁴R³⁵, —C(═O)NNR³⁴R³⁵, or —SO₂NR³⁴R³⁵, are takentogether with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached to form a3-10 membered saturated or unsaturated ring; wherein said ring in eachinstance is unsubstituted or substituted by one or more —NR³¹R³²,hydroxyl, halogen, oxo, aryl, hetaryl, C₁₋₆alkyl, O-aryl, C(O)R³¹, orS(O)₀₋₂R³¹ substituents, and wherein said 3-10 membered saturated orunsaturated ring in each instance includes 0, 1, or 2 more heteroatomsother than the nitrogen.

Some non-limiting examples of the cyclic moiety formed by R³⁴ and R³⁵ in—NR³⁴R³⁵, —C(═O)NNR³⁴R³⁵, or —SO₂NR³⁴R³⁵, being taken together with thenitrogen to which R³⁴ and R³⁵ are attached, include one of thefollowing:

In some embodiments, for the compounds of Formula I, R₁ is H or -L-(unsubstituted or -substituted C₁₋₁₀alkyl), wherein alkyl includes butis not limited to CH₃, —CH₂CH₃, n-propyl, isopropyl, n-butyl,tert-butyl, sec-butyl, pentyl, hexyl, and heptyl. In some embodiments,L- is absent, and R₁ includes but is not limited to methyl,trifluoromethyl, isopropyl, tert-butyl, sec-butyl, or2-(morpholinyl)ethyl. When R₁ is —C(O)alkyl, non-limiting exemplary R₁include acetyl, propionyl, and 3-(piperazinyl)propionyl. In otherembodiments, R₁ is —C(O)O-alkyl, including but not limited to —COOCH3,—COOCH₂C₆H₆, and —COO-t-butyl. R₁ is also —C(O)NR³¹-alkyl, including butnot limited to —C(O)NHMe, —C(O)N(Et)₂-C(O)NH(isopropyl), and—C(O)NH(ethyl). In other embodiments, R₁ is —S-alkyl (including but notlimited to —S(ethyl), —S(iso-propyl), —S(iso-butyl) and —S(n-pentyl)),—S(O)alkyl (including but not limited to —S(O)-ethyl and —S(O)-methyl),and —S(O)₂-alkyl (including but not limited to methyl sulfonyl,n-butylsulfonyl, and ethylsulfonyl. Alternatively, R₁ is—S(O)₂NR³¹-(alkyl), wherein non limiting examples are —S(O)₂NHMe.,—S(O)₂N(Me)(butyl), and —S(O)₂N(iso-propyl)(ethyl). The invention alsoprovides compounds wherein R₁ is —N(R³¹)C(O)-alkyl (including but notlimited to —NHC(O)CH₂(morpholinyl), —NHC(O)CH₂(piperidin-1-yl), and—NHC(O)CH₂CH₂(cyclopropyl)) or —NR³¹-alkyl (including —NHCH₂CH₂(4-N-methyl-piperazinyl), —NHCH₂CH₂(morpholinyl), and —NHCH₂CH₂CH(CH₃)₂

Other compounds are provided wherein R₁ is -L- (unsubstituted orsubstituted C₃-C₈cycloalkyl) (which includes but is not limited tocyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, and cyclohexyl). In someembodiments, L is absent and R₁ includes but is not limited tocyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, 3-hydroxy cyclobut-1-yl, and 4-morpholinylcyclohex-1yl. In other embodiments, R₁ is —C(O)-cycloalkyl, whichincludes but is not limited to —C(O)— cyclopropyl, —C(O)-cyclopentyl,and —C(O)-(4-diethylamino)cyclohexyl. R₁ may also be —C(O)O-cycloalkyl(including but not limited to —COO-cyclopropyl, —COO-tert-butyl, and—COO-cyclohexyl) or —C(O) NR³¹ (including but not limited to—C(O)NH-cyclopropyl, —C(O)N(Me)-cyclobutyl, and—C(O)N(Et)-(4-morpholinyl)cyclohexyl. In some other embodiments, R₁ is—S-cycloalkyl (including but not limited to —S-cyclobutyl,—S-(3-methyl)cyclopentyl, and —S-(4-(4′N-Me)piperazinyl)cyclohexyl),—S—(O)cycloalkyl (including but not limited to —S(O)-cyclobutyl and—S(O)-cyclopentyl), or —S(O)₂-cycloalkyl (including but not limited to—S(O)₂-cyclobutyl, —S(O)₂— (3-Cl)cyclopentyl, —S(O)₂—(4-imidazolyl)cyclohexyl. Alternatively, R₁ is —S(O)₂NR³¹-cycloalkyl,wherein nonlimiting examples include —S(O)₂NH-cyclopropyl,—S(O)₂N(Me)-(3-azetidinyl)cyclobut-1-yl, and —S(O)₂NH—(2-methyl)cyclohex-1yl. The invention also provides compounds wherein R₁is N(R³¹)C(O)-cycloalkyl (including but not limited to—N(H)C(O)-cyclobutyl, —N(Me)C(O)-cyclopentyl, and N(H)C(O)-(4-methoxycyclohex-1-yl) or —NR³¹-cycloalkyl (exemplary nonlimiting—NR³¹-cycloalkyl include —NHcyclopropyl, N(Me)-cyclobutyl, andNH-(3-Cl-cyclopent-1-yl.

Additionally, R₁ can be -L-C₁₋₁₀ alkyl-C₃-C₈cycloalkyl, whereinC₁₋₁₀alkyl is unsubstituted or -substituted C₁₋₁₀ alkyl. Alkyl includesbut is not limited to CH₃, —CH₂CH₃, n-propyl, isopropyl, n-butyl,tert-butyl, sec-butyl, pentyl, hexyl, and heptyl. C₃-C₈cycloalkyl isunsubstituted or substituted C₃-C₈cycloalkyl, wherein C₃-C₈cycloalkylincludes but is not limited to cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, andcyclohexyl. In some embodiments, R₁ is C₁₋₁₀alkyl-C₃-C₈cycloalkyl,Non-limiting examples of R₁C₁₋₁₀alkyl-C₃-C₈cycloalkyl include—CH₂cyclopropyl, -(3-cyclopentyl)prop-1-yl, and-(4-(3-Cl-cyclohex-1-yl)butyl. R₁ is also —C(O)-alkylcycloalkyl(non-limiting examples include —C(O)methylcyclobutyl,—C(O)ethylcyclopropyl, and —C(O)(3-(4-morpholinyl)cyclohex-1yl)propyl)or —C(O)O-cycloalkyl (including but not limited to —C(O)Ocyclobutyl,—C(O)O(3,5-dimethyl)cyclohexyl, and —C(O)O(3-Cl)-cyclopentyl. In someother embodiments, R₁ is —C(O) NR³¹-alkyl-cycloalkyl, whereinnonlimiting examples include —C(O) NH—CH₂-cyclobutyl, —C(O)NH—(2-(cyclopent-1-yl)ethyl), and—C(O)NH-(3-(4-diethylaminocyclohex-1-yl)propyl. In yet otherembodiments, R₁ is —S-alkyl-cycloalkyl (including but not limited to—SCH₂cyclopropyl, —SCH₂CH₂(3-morpholinyl)cyclobutyl, and—SCH₂CH₂-(4-methoxyl)cyclohexyl), —S(O)-alkyl-cycloalkyl (non-limitingexamples including —S(O)CH₂cyclobutyl and —S(O)CH₂cyclohexyl), or —S(O)₂alkyl-cycloalkyl (including but not limited to —S(O)₂CH₂cyclopropyl,—S(O)₂CH₂CH₂(4-(4′-N Me piperazinyl cyclohex-1yl). Alternatively, R₁ is—N(R³¹)C(O)-alkyl-cycloalkyl (including but not limited to—N(Me)C(O)—CH₂cyclopropyl, —NHC(O)CH₂CH₂— (3-CN)cyclopent-1-yl, and—N(H)C(O)—CH₂(4-(4N-piperidinyl)cyclohexyl) or —NR³¹alkyl-cycloalkyl(nonlimiting examples include —NHCH₂ cyclopropyl, —N(Me) CH₂cyclopentyl,and —NHCH₂CH₂(4-morpholinylcyclhex-1yl).

In other embodiments, R₁ is -L- (unsubstituted or substituted aryl),including but not limited to monocyclic or bicyclic aryl. When L isabsent, R₁ is -aryl, wherein nonlimiting examples include -phenyl,3-methoxyphenyl, and 3-(4-N-Me piperazinyl)phenyl. In other embodiments,R₁ is —C(O)-aryl (including benzoyl, 3-(2-morpholinyl methyl)phenyl, and4-diethylaminomethyl phenyl) or —C(O)O-aryl (including carboxyphenyl).R₁ is also —C(O)NR³¹-aryl, including but not limited to —C(O)NH-phenyl,—C(O) NH(3-(4-N-Me piperazinyl))phenyl, and —C(O)NMe3,5-dimethoxyphenyl. In some other embodiments, R₁ is —S-aryl (includingbut not limited to —S— phenyl), —S(O)-aryl (including but not limited to—S(O)-phenyl), or —S(O)₂-aryl(including but not limited to—S(O)₂-phenyl, —S(O)₂— ((3-(4-N-Me piperazinyl))phenyl, and —S(O)₂—(4-chloro)phenyl.

The invention also provides compounds wherein R₁ is -L- (unsubstitutedor substituted heteroaryl), wherein heteroaryl includes but is notlimited to monocyclic and bicyclic heteroaryl. Monocyclic heteroaryl R₁includes but is not limited to pyrrolyl, thienyl, furyl, pyridinyl,pyranyl, imidazolyl, thiazolyl, pyrazolyl, and oxazolyl. Bicyclicheteroaryl R₁ includes but is not limited to benzothiophenyl,benzofuryl, indolyl, quinolinyl, isoquinolinyl, benzimidazolyl,benzoxazolyl, benzothiazolyl, quinazolinyl, azaindolyl,pyrazolopyrimidinyl, and purinyl. In some embodiments, -L is absent, andR₁ is heteroaryl (including but not limited to thiazolyl, oxazolyl,imidazolyl, thiazolyl, pyridinyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrrolyl, and4-morpholinylmethyl-pyridin-2-yl, and 3-(4N-Mepiperazinyl)pyridin-2-yl). In other embodiments, R₁ is —C(O)-heteroaryl(including but not limited to —C(O)-pyridinyl, —C(O)-thiazolyl, and—C(O) 3-(4N-Me piperazinyl)pyridin-2-yl) or —C(O)O-heteroaryl (includingbut not limited to —COO-pyridinyl). R₁ may also be —C(O)NR³¹-heteroaryl,non-limiting examples including —C(O) NH—(4-morpholinylmethyl)-pyridin-2-yl, —C(O)N(Me)-thiazolyl, and —C(O)NH—(3-(4N-Me piperazinyl)pyridin-2-yl)). In yet other embodiments, R₁ is—S-heteroaryl (including but not limited to —S-pyridinyl),—S(O)-heteroaryl (including but not limited to —S(O)-pyrimidinyl), or—S(O)₂-heteroaryl (exemplary R₁ include, without limitation,—S(O)₂-pyridinyl, —S(O)₂-imidazolyl, and S(O)₂— (3-(4N-Mepiperazinyl)pyridin-2-yl))). In some other embodiments, R₁ is—S(O)₂NR³¹-heteroaryl (including but not limited to —S(O)₂NH-pyridinyl,—S(O)₂N(Me)-thiazolyl, and —S(O)₂NH— (3-(4N-Mepiperazinyl)pyridin-2-yl))). Alternatively, R₁ is —N(R³¹)C(O)-heteroaryl(including but not limited to —N(H)C(O)-pyridinyl, —N(Me)C(O)-oxazolyl,and —N(R³¹)C(O)-(3-(4N-Me piperazinyl)pyridin-2-yl))), or—NR³¹-heteroaryl (including but not limited to —NH-pyridinyl,—N(Me)-thiazolyl, and —NH— (3-(4N-Me piperazinyl)pyridin-2-yl))).

In yet other embodiments, R₁ is -L-alkylaryl, -L-alkylheteroaryl, or-L-alkylheterocylyl, wherein alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclylare as described herein. Each of alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl andheterocyclyl is unsubstituted or substituted. In some embodiments L isabsent and R₁ is -alkylaryl (including but not limited to benzyl,ethylphenyl, and (3-(4N-Me piperazinyl)phenyl), -alkylheteroaryl(including but not limited to —CH₂pyridin-2-yl, —CH₂pyrrolyl, and—CH₂(3-(4N-Me piperazinyl)pyridinyl), or -alkylheterocylyl (includingbut not limited to —CH₂CH₂morpholinyl, —CH₂CH₂-(4N-Me) piperazinyl,—CH₂morpholinyl, and —CH₂CH₂azetidinyl). In other embodiments, R₁ is—C(O)-aryl (including but not limited to —C(O)-benzyl and —C(O)—(3-(4N-Me piperazinyl)phenyl), —C(O)-alkylheteroaryl (including but notlimited to —C(O)CH₂-pyridin-2-yl, and —C(O)CH₂-pyrrolyl), or—C(O)-alkylheterocyly (including but not limited to—C(O)—CH₂CH₂morpholinyl, —C(O)—CH₂CH₂(4N-Me) piperazinyl,—C(O)—CH₂-morpholinyl, and —C(O)—CH₂CH₂-azetidinyl). Additionally, R₁ is—C(O)O-alkylaryl (including but not limited to —C(O)O—CH₂C₆H₆),—C(O)O-alkylheteroaryl (including but not limited to —CH₂-pyridin-2-yl),or —C(O)O-alkylheterocylyl (including but not limited to —C(O)OCH₂CH₂—(4N-Me) piperazinyl). In some other embodiments, R₁ is —C(O)NR³¹-alkylaryl (including but not limited to C(O)NHCH₂C₆H₆),—C(O)NR³¹-alkylheteroaryl (including but not limited to—C(O)NHCH₂-pyridin-2-yl, —C(O)NHCH₂-pyrrolyl, and —C(O)NHCH₂— (3-(4N-Mepiperazinyl)pyridinyl), or —C(O)NR³¹-alkylheterocylyl (not limitingexamples include —C(O)NHCH₂CH₂-morpholinyl, —C(O)NHCH₂CH₂— (4N-Me)piperazinyl, —C(O)NHCH₂— (4N—SO₂Me) piperazinyl-C(O)NHCH₂-morpholinyl,and —C(O)NHCH₂CH₂-azetidinyl. R₁ may also be —S-alkylaryl (including butnot limited to —S—CH₂C₆H₆), —S-alkylheteroaryl (including but notlimited to —SCH₂pyridin-2-yl), or —Salkylheterocylyl (including but notlimited to —SCH₂CH₂-morpholinyl, —SCH₂CH₂— (4N-Me) piperazinyl, and—SCH₂— (4N—SO₂Me) piperazinyl). In a different embodiment, R₁ is—S(O)-alkylaryl (including but not limited to —S(O)CH₂C₆H₆),—S(O)-alkylheteroaryl (including but not limited to—S(O)CH₂-pyridin-2-yl), or —S(O)-alkylheterocylyl (including but notlimited to —S(O)CH₂CH₂-morpholinyl, —S(O)CH₂CH₂— (4N-Me) piperazinyl,and —S(O)CH₂— (4N—SO₂Me) piperazinyl). In a further embodiment, R₁ is—S(O)₂-alkylaryl (including but not limited to —S(O)₂CH₂C₆H₆, and—S(O)₂— (3-(4N-Me) piperazinyl)CH₂)C₆H₆), —S(O)₂-alkylheteroaryl(including but not limited to —S(O)₂CH₂CH₂-morpholinyl, —S(O)₂CH₂CH₂—(4N-Me) piperazinyl, and —S(O)₂CH₂— (4N—SO₂Me) piperazinyl), or—S(O)₂-alkylheterocylyl (including but not limited to—S(O)₂CH₂CH₂-morpholinyl, —S(O)₂CH₂CH₂— (4N-Me) piperazinyl, and—S(O)₂CH₂— (4N—SO₂Me) piperazinyl). Alternatively, R₁ is—S(O)₂NR³¹-alkylaryl (including but not limited to —S(O)₂NHCH₂C₆H₆),—S(O)₂NR³¹-alkylheteroaryl (including but not limited to—S(O)₂NHCH₂-pyridin-2-yl), or —S(O)₂NR³¹-alkylheterocylyl (including butnot limited to —S(O)₂NHCH₂CH₂-morpholinyl, —S(O)₂NHCH₂CH₂— (4N-Me)piperazinyl, and —S(O)₂NHCH₂— (4N—SO₂Me) piperazinyl). In some otherembodiments, R₁ is —N(R³¹)C(O)-alkylaryl (including but not limited to—N(Me)C(O)CH₂C₆H₆, and —NHC(O)— (3-(4N-Me) piperazinyl)CH₂)C₆H₆),—N(R³¹)C(O)-alkylheteroaryl (including but not limited toNHC(O)CH₂-pyridin-2-yl), or —N(R³¹)C(O)-alkylheterocylyl (non-limitingexamples include —N(HC(O)CH₂CH₂-morpholinyl, —N(HC(O)CH₂CH₂— (4N-Me)piperazinyl, and —N(HC(O)CH₂— (4N—SO₂Me) piperazinyl). In addition, theinvention provides for compounds wherein R₁ is —NR³¹-alkylaryl(including but not limited to —NMeCH₂C₆H₆), —NR³¹-alkylheteroaryl(non-limiting examples include —NHCH₂-pyridin-2-yl), or—NR³¹-alkylheterocylyl (including but not limited to—NHCH₂CH₂-morpholinyl, —NMeCH₂CH₂— (4N-Me) piperazinyl, and —NHCH₂—(4N—SO₂Me) piperazinyl).

R₁ can also be -L- (unsubstituted or substituted alkenyl) or -L-(unsubstituted or substituted alkynyl). C₂-C₁₀alkenyl includes but isnot limited to for example, vinyl, allyl, 1-methyl propen-1-yl, butenyl,or pentenyl, and C₂-C₁₀alkynyl includes but is not limited toacetylenyl, propargyl, butynyl, or pentynyl). In some embodiments, L isabsent and R₁ is alkenyl (including but not limited to vinyl, allyl,1-methyl propen-1-yl, butenyl, or pentenyl) or alkynyl (including butnot limited to acetylenyl, 3-cyclopropyl proparg-1-yl, butynyl, orpentynyl). In other embodiments, R₁ is —C(O)-alkenyl (including but notlimited to —C(O)CH₂CH(CH₃)CH═CH₂), or —C(O)alkynyl (including but notlimited to —C(O)CH₂C≡CH and —C(O)CH₂CH(CH₃)C≡CH). R₁ may also be—C(O)O-alkenyl (including but not limited to —C(O)OCH₂CH(CH₃)CH═CH₂), or—C(O)O-alkynyl (including but not limited to —C(O)OCH₂C≡CH and—C(O)OCH₂CH(CH₃)C≡CH). In some other embodiments, R₁ is C(O)NR³¹-alkenyl(including but not limited to —C(O)NHCH₂CH(CH₃)CH═CH₂), or C(O)NR³¹-alkynyl (including but not limited to —C(O)NHCH₂C≡CH and—C(O)NHCH₂CH(CH₃)C≡CH). Additionally, R₁ is —S-alkenyl (including butnot limited to —SCH₂CH(CH₃)CH═CH₂), —S(O)-alkenyl (including but notlimited to —S(O)CH₂CH(CH₃)CH═CH₂), —S(O)₂-alkenyl (including but notlimited to —S(O)₂CH₂CH(CH₃)CH═CH₂), —S— alkynyl (including but notlimited to —SCH₂C≡CH and —SCH₂CH(CH₃)C≡CH), —S(O)-alkynyl (including butnot limited to —S(O)CH₂C≡CH and —S(O)CH₂CH(CH₃)C≡CH), or —S(O)₂-alkynyl(including but not limited to —S(O)₂CH₂C≡CH and —S(O)₂CH₂CH(CH₃)C≡CH).In yet other embodiments, R₁ is —S(O)₂NR³¹-alkenyl (including but notlimited to —S(O)₂NHCH₂CH(CH₃)CH═CH₂), or —S(O)₂NR³¹-alkynyl (includingbut not limited to —S(O)₂NHCH₂C≡CH and —S(O)₂NHCH₂CH(CH₃)C≡CH). R₁ mayalso be —N(R³¹)C(O)-alkenyl (including but not limited to —N(Me)C(O)CH₂CH(CH₃)CH═CH₂), —NR³¹-alkenyl (including but not limited to—NHCH₂CH(CH₃)CH═CH₂), N(R³¹)C(O)-alkynyl (including but not limited to-(including but not limited to —N(Me)C(O)CH₂C≡CH and —NHC(O)CH₂CH(CH₃)C≡CH), or —NR³¹-alkynyl (including but not limited to—NHCH₂C≡CH and —NHCH₂CH(CH₃)C≡CH).

R₁ can also be -L-alkenyl-cycloalkyl or -L-alkynyl-cycloalkyl, whereinalkenyl, alkynyl, and cycloalkyl are as described herein. In someembodiments, L is absent and R₁ is -alkenyl-cycloalkyl (including butnot limited to CH₂CH═CH(cyclopropyl)) or -alkynyl-cycloalkyl(non-limiting examples include —CH₂C≡C(cyclopropyl),—CH₂C≡C(cyclobutyl), and —CH₂C≡C(3-(4N-Me) piperazinylcyclobutyl)). Inother embodiments, R₁ is —C(O)-alkenyl-cycloalkyl (including but notlimited to —C(O)CH₂CH═CH(cyclopropyl)) or C(O)-alkynyl-cycloalkyl(nonlimiting examples include —C(O)CH₂C≡C(cyclopropyl), —C(O)CH₂C≡C—(cyclobutyl), and —C(O) CH₂≡C— (3-(4N-Me) piperazinylcyclobutyl)). Insome other embodiments, R₁ is —C(O)O-alkenyl-cycloalkyl (including butnot limited to —C(O)OCH₂CH═CH— (cyclopropyl)) orC(O)O-alkynyl-cycloalkyl (nonlimiting examples include —C(O)OCH₂C≡C—(cyclopropyl), —C(O)OCH₂C≡C— (cyclobutyl), and —C(OO) CH₂C≡C— (3-(4N-Me)piperazinylcyclobutyl)). In yet other embodiments, R₁ is —C(O)NR³¹-alkenyl-cycloalkyl (including but not limited to —C(O)NHCH₂CH═CH—(cyclopropyl)) or —C(O) NR³¹-alkynyl-cycloalkyl (nonlimiting examplesinclude —C(O) NHCH₂C≡C— (cyclopropyl), —C(O)NMeCH₂C≡C— (cyclobutyl), and—C(O)NHCH₂C≡C-3-(4N-Me) piperazinylcyclobutyl)). In other embodiments,R₁ is —S-alkenyl-cycloalkyl (including but not limited to—SCH₂CH═CH(cyclopropyl)), —S(O)-alkenyl-cycloalkyl (including but notlimited to —S(O)CH₂CH═CH(cyclopropyl)), —S(O)₂-alkenyl-cycloalkyl(including but not limited to —S(O)₂CH₂CH═CH(cyclopropyl)),—S-alkynyl-cycloalkyl (nonlimiting examples include—SCH₂C≡C(cyclopropyl), —SCH₂C≡C(cyclobutyl), and —SCH₂C≡C(3-(4N-Me)piperazinylcyclobutyl)), —S(O)-alkynyl-cycloalkyl (nonlimiting examplesinclude —S(O)CH₂C≡C(cyclopropyl), —S(O)CH₂C≡C(cyclobutyl), and—S(O)CH₂C≡C(3-(4N-Me) piperazinylcyclobutyl)), or—S(O)₂-alkynyl-cycloalkyl (nonlimiting examples include—S(O)₂CH₂C≡C(cyclopropyl), —S(O)₂MeCH₂C≡C(cyclobutyl), and—S(O)₂CH₂C≡C(3-(4N-Me) piperazinylcyclobutyl))). Alternatively, R₁ is—S(O)₂NR³¹-alkenyl-cycloalkyl (including but not limited to—S(O)₂NHCH₂CH═CH— (cyclopropyl)), or —S(O)₂NR³-alkynyl-cycloalkyl(nonlimiting examples include —S(O)₂NHCH₂C≡C(cyclopropyl),—S(O)₂NHCH₂C≡C(cyclobutyl), and —S(O)₂NHCH₂C≡C(3-(4N-Me)piperazinylcyclobutyl)). In other embodiments, R₁ is—N(R³¹)C(O)-alkenyl-cycloalkyl (including but not limited to—NHC(O)CH₂CH═CH— (cyclopropyl)), —NR³¹-alkenyl-cycloalkyl (including butnot limited to —NHCH₂CH═CH— (cyclopropyl)),—N(R³¹)C(O)-alkynyl-cycloalkyl (nonlimiting examples include—NHC(O)CH₂C≡C(cyclopropyl), —NHC(O)CH₂C≡C(cyclobutyl), andNHC(O)CH₂C≡C(3-(4N-Me) piperazinylcyclobutyl)), or—NR³¹-alkynyl-cycloalkyl (nonlimiting examples include —NHCH₂C≡C—(cyclopropyl), —NMeCH₂C≡C— (cyclobutyl), and —NHCH₂C≡C—(3-(4N-Me)piperazinylcyclobutyl)).

Additionally, R₁ can be -L- (unsubstituted or substituted heteroalkyl),wherein heteroalkyl includes but is not limited to (non-limitingexamples include ethoxymethyl, methoxymethyl, and diethylaminomethyl. Insome embodiments, L is absent and R₁ is —C(O)heteroalkyl (including butnot limited to —C(O)CH₂OCH₃), —C(O)Oheteroalkyl (including but notlimited to —C(O)OCH₂CH₂OCH₃), —C(O)NR³¹heteroalkyl (including but notlimited to —C(O)NHCH₂CH₂OCH₃), —S-heteroalkyl (including but not limitedto —SCH₂CH₂OCH₃), —S(O)— heteroalkyl (including but not limited to—S(O)CH₂CH₂OCH₃), —S(O)₂-heteroalkyl (including but not limited to—S(O)₂CH₂CH₂OCH₃), —S(O)₂NR³¹-heteroalkyl (including but not limited to—S(O)₂NHCH₂CH₂OCH₃), —N(R³¹)C(O)-heteroalkyl (including but not limitedto —NHC(O)CH₂CH₂OCH₃) or —NR³¹-heteroalkyl (including but not limited to—N(Me)CH₂CH₂OCH₃).

The invention also provides compounds wherein R₁ is -L-heteroalkyl-aryl,-L-heteroalkylheteroaryl, -L-heteroalkyl-heterocylyl, or-L-heteroalkyl-cycloalkyl, wherein heteroalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl,heterocyclyl, and cycloalkyl are as described herein. In someembodiments, L is absent and R₁ is -heteroalkylaryl (including but notlimited to —CH₂CH₂OCH₂C₆H₆), -heteroalkylheteroaryl (including but notlimited to —CH₂CH₂OCH₂-pyridinyl), -heteroalkyl-heterocylyl (includingbut not limited to —CH₂CH₂OCH₂-piperidin-1yl, —CH₂CH₂OCH₂-morpholinyl,and —CH₂CH₂OCH₂— (4N-Me-piperazinyl), or -heteroalkyl-cycloalkyl(including —CH₂CH₂OCH₂(cyclobutyl)). In other embodiments, R₁ is—C(O)-heteroalkylaryl (including but not limited to—C(O)CH₂CH₂OCH₂C₆H₆), —C(O)-heteroalkylheteroaryl (including but notlimited to —C(O)CH₂CH₂OCH₂-pyridinyl), —C(O)heteroalkyl-heterocylyl(including but not limited to —C(O)CH₂CH₂OCH₂-piperidin-1yl,—C(O)CH₂CH₂OCH₂-morpholinyl, and —C(O)CH₂CH₂OCH₂— (4N-Me-piperazinyl),or —C(O)-heteroalkyl-cycloalkyl (including —C(O)CH₂CH₂OCH₂—(cyclobutyl)). In other embodiments, R₁ is —C(O)O-heteroalkylaryl(including but not limited to —C(O)OCH₂CH₂OCH₂C₆H₆),—C(O)O-heteroalkylheteroaryl (including but not limited to—C(O)OCH₂CH₂OCH₂-pyridinyl), —C(O)O-heteroalkyl-heterocylyl (includingbut not limited to —C(O)OCH₂CH₂OCH₂-piperidin-1yl,—C(O)OCH₂CH₂OCH₂-morpholinyl, and —C(O)OCH₂CH₂OCH₂— (4N-Me-piperazinyl),or —C(O)O-heteroalkyl-cycloalkyl (including—C(O)OCH₂CH₂OCH₂(cyclobutyl)). Alternatively, R₁ is —C(O)NR³¹-heteroalkylaryl (including but not limited to—C(O)NHCH₂CH₂OCH₂C₆H₆), —C(O)NH-heteroalkylheteroaryl (including but notlimited to —C(O)NHCH₂CH₂OCH₂-pyridinyl), —C(O)NH-heteroalkyl-heterocylyl(including but not limited to —C(O)NHCH₂CH₂OCH₂-piperidin-1yl,—C(O)NHCH₂CH₂OCH₂-morpholinyl, and —C(O)NHCH₂CH₂OCH₂—(4N-Me-piperazinyl), or —C(O)NH-heteroalkyl-cycloalkyl (including—C(O)NHCH₂CH₂OCH₂— (cyclobutyl)). In other embodiments, R₁ is—S-heteroalkylaryl (including but not limited to —SCH₂CH₂OCH₂C₆H₆), —S—heteroalkylheteroaryl (including but not limited to—SCH₂CH₂OCH₂pyridinyl), —S-heteroalkyl-heterocylyl (including but notlimited to —SCH₂CH₂OCH₂piperidin-1yl, —SCH₂CH₂OCH₂morpholinyl, and—SCH₂CH₂OCH₂(4N-Me-piperazinyl), or —S-heteroalkyl-cycloalkyl (including—SCH₂CH₂OCH₂— (cyclobutyl)). In some other embodiments, R₁ is—S(O)-heteroalkylaryl (including but not limited to—S(O)CH₂CH₂OCH₂C₆H₆), —S(O)-heteroalkylheteroaryl (including but notlimited to —S(O)CH₂CH₂OCH₂-pyridinyl), —S(O)-heteroalkyl-heterocylyl(including but not limited to —S(O)CH₂CH₂OCH₂-piperidin-1yl,—S(O)CH₂CH₂OCH₂-morpholinyl, and —S(O)CH₂CH₂OCH₂— (4N-Me-piperazinyl),or —S(O)-heteroalkyl-cycloalkyl (including —S(O)CH₂CH₂OCH₂—(cyclobutyl)). In yet other embodiments, R₁ is —S(O)₂-heteroalkylaryl(including but not limited to —S(O)₂CH₂CH₂OCH₂C₆H₆),—S(O)₂-heteroalkylheteroaryl (including but not limited to—S(O)₂CH₂CH₂OCH₂-pyridinyl), —S(O)₂-heteroalkyl-heterocylyl (includingbut not limited to —S(O)₂CH₂CH₂OCH₂-piperidin-1yl,—S(O)₂CH₂CH₂OCH₂-morpholinyl, and —S(O)₂CH₂CH₂OCH₂— (4N-Me-piperazinyl),or —S(O)₂-heteroalkyl-cycloalkyl (including —S(O)₂CH₂CH₂OCH₂—(cyclobutyl)). Additionally, R₁ is —S(O)₂NR³¹-heteroalkylaryl (includingbut not limited to —S(O)₂NHCH₂CH₂OCH₂C₆H₆),—S(O)₂NR³¹-heteroalkylheteroaryl (including but not limited to—S(O)₂NHCH₂CH₂OCH₂pyridinyl), —S(O)₂NR³¹heteroalkyl-heterocylyl(including but not limited to —S(O)₂NH—CH₂CH₂OCH₂piperidin-1yl,—S(O)₂NHCH₂CH₂OCH₂morpholinyl, and—S(O)₂NHCH₂CH₂OCH₂(4N-Me-piperazinyl), or—S(O)₂NR³¹-heteroalkyl-cycloalkyl (including —S(O)₂NH—CH₂CH₂OCH₂—(cyclobutyl)). In other embodiments, R₁ is —N(R³¹)C(O)-heteroalkylaryl(including but not limited to —NHC(O)CH₂CH₂OCH₂C₆H₆),—N(R³¹)C(O)-heteroalkylheteroaryl (including but not limited to—NHC(O)CH₂CH₂OCH₂-pyridinyl), —N(R³¹)C(O)-heteroalkyl-heterocylyl(including but not limited to —NHC(O)CH₂CH₂OCH₂-piperidin-1yl,—NHC(O)CH₂CH₂OCH₂-morpholinyl, and —NHC(O)CH₂CH₂OCH₂—(4N-Me-piperazinyl), or N(R³¹)C(O)-heteroalkyl-cycloalkyl (including—NHC(O)CH₂CH₂OCH₂— (cyclobutyl)). In yet other embodiments, R₁ is—NR³¹-heteroalkylaryl (including but not limited to —NHCH₂CH₂OCH₂C₆H₆),—NR³-heteroalkylheteroaryl (including but not limited to—N(Me)CH₂CH₂OCH₂-pyridinyl), —NR³¹-heteroalkyl-heterocylyl (includingbut not limited to —NHCH₂CH₂OCH₂-piperidin-1yl,—NHCH₂CH₂OCH₂-morpholinyl, and —NHCH₂CH₂OCH₂— (4N-Me-piperazinyl), orNR³¹-heteroalkyl-cycloalkyl (including —NHCH₂CH₂OCH₂— (cyclobutyl)).

The invention also provides compounds wherein R₁ is -L-arylalkyl or-L-heteroarylalkyl, wherein aryl, alkyl and heteroaryl are as describedherein. In some embodiments, L is absent and R₁ is -arylalkyl (includingbut not limited to -(3-methyl) phen-1yl, and -(4-ethyl)phenyl) or-L-heteroarylalkyl (including but not limited to-(4-(2-morpholinyl)ethyl)pyridin-2-yl and-(5-(2-morpholinyl)ethyl)pyridin-2-yl). In other embodiments, R₁ is—C(O)-arylalkyl (including but not limited to —C(O)— (3-methyl)phen-1yl, and —C(O)— (4-ethyl)phenyl) or —C(O)-heteroarylalkyl(including but not limited to —C(O)—(4-(2-morpholinyl)ethyl)pyridin-2-yl andC(O—)(5-(2-morpholinyl)ethyl)pyridin-2-yl). In other embodiments, R₁ is—C(O)O-arylalkyl (including but not limited to C(O)O— (3-methyl)phen-1yl, and —C(O)O— (4-ethyl)phenyl) or —C(O)O-heteroarylalkyl(including but not limited to to—C(O)O(-4-(2-morpholinyl)ethyl)pyridin-2-yl and —C(O)O—(5-(2-morpholinyl)ethyl)pyridin-2-yl). In other embodiments, R₁ is—C(O)O-arylalkyl (including but not limited to —C(O)O— (3-methyl)phen-1yl, and —C(O)O— (4-ethyl)phenyl) or —C(O)O-heteroarylalkyl(including but not limited to —C(O)O—(4-(2-morpholinyl)ethyl)pyridin-2-yl and —C(O)O—(5-(2-morpholinyl)ethyl)pyridin-2-yl). In some other embodiments, R₁ is—C(O) NR³¹-arylalkyl (including but not limited to —C(O)NH— (3-methyl)phen-1yl, and —C(O)NH— (4-ethyl)phenyl) or —C(O)NR³¹-heteroarylalkyl(including but not limited to —C(O)NH—(4-(2-morpholinyl)ethyl)pyridin-2-yl and —C(O)NH—(5-(2-morpholinyl)ethyl)pyridin-2-yl). R₁ may also be —S-arylalkyl(including but not limited to —S-(3-methyl) phen-1yl, and—S-(4-ethyl)phenyl) or —S-heteroarylalkyl (including but not limited to—S-(4-(2-morpholinyl)ethyl)pyridin-2-yl and—S-(5-(2-morpholinyl)ethyl)pyridin-2-yl). In other embodiments, R₁ is—S(O)-arylalkyl (including but not limited to —S(O)-(3-methyl) phen-1yl,and —S(O)-(4-ethyl)phenyl) or —S(O)-heteroarylalkyl (including but notlimited to —S(O)-(4-(2-morpholinyl)ethyl)pyridin-2-yl and—S(O)-(5-(2-morpholinyl)ethyl)pyridin-2-yl). In yet other embodiments,R₁ is —S(O)₂-arylalkyl (including but not limited to —S(O)₂-(3-methyl)phen-1yl, and —S(O)₂-(4-ethyl)phenyl) or —S(O)₂-heteroarylalkyl(including but not limited to—S(O)₂-(4-(2-morpholinyl)ethyl)pyridin-2-yl and—S(O)₂-(5-(2-morpholinyl)ethyl)pyridin-2-yl). Alternatively, R₁ is—S(O)₂NR³¹-arylalkyl (including but not limited to —S(O)₂NH— (3-methyl)phen-1yl, and —S(O)₂NH— (4-ethyl)phenyl) or —S(O)₂NR³¹-heteroarylalkyl(including but not limited to —S(O)₂NH—(4-(2-morpholinyl)ethyl)pyridin-2-yl and —S(O)₂NH—(5-(2-morpholinyl)ethyl)pyridin-2-yl). In other embodiments, R₁ is—N(R³¹)C(O)-arylalkyl (including but not limited to—N(Me)C(O)-(3-methyl) phen-1yl, and —NHC(O)-(4-ethyl)phenyl) or—N(R³¹)C(O)-heteroarylalkyl (including but not limited to —N(Me)C(O)—(4-(2-morpholinyl)ethyl)pyridin-2-yl and —NHC(O)—(5-(2-morpholinyl)ethyl)pyridin-2-yl). Additionally, R₁ is—NR³¹-arylalkyl (including but not limited to —N(Me)-(3-methyl)phen-1yl, and —NH— (4-ethyl)phenyl) or —N(R³¹)-heteroarylalkyl(including but not limited to N(Me)(4-(2-morpholinyl)ethyl)pyridin-2-yland —NH(5-(2-morpholinyl)ethyl)pyridin-2-yl).

In some embodiments, R₁ is -L- (unsubstituted or substitutedheterocyclyl) wherein heterocyclyl includes but is not limited toazetidinyl, pyrrolidinyl, tetrahydrofuranyl, piperidinyl,tetrahydropyranyl, thiazolidinyl, imidazolidinyl, morpholinyl, andpiperazinyl. In some embodiments, L is absent and R₁ is heterocyclyl(including but not limited to morpholinyl, thiomorpholinyl, azetidinyl,pyrrolidinyl, tetrahydropyranyl, piperazinyl, and 4-NMe-piperazinyl). Insome embodiments, R₁ is —C(O)-heterocyclyl (including but not limited to—C(O)-morpholinyl, —C(O)-thiomorpholinyl, —C(O)-azetidinyl,—C(O)-pyrrolidin-1-yl, —C(O)-etrahydropyran-4-yl, —C(O)-piperazin-1-yl,and —C(O)— (4-NMe-piperazin-1-yl)). In some other embodiments, R₁ is—C(O)O-heterocyclyl (including but not limited to —C(O)O-azetidinyl,—C(O)O-pyrrolidin-3-yl, —C(O)O-tetrahydropyran-4-yl,—C(O)O-piperazin-3-yl, and —C(O)O(4-NMe-piperazin-3-yl)). In yet otherembodiments, R₁ is C(O)NR³¹-heterocyclyl (including but not limited to—C(O)NH-azetidinyl, —C(O)NH-pyrrolidin-3-yl,C(O)NH-tetrahydropyran-4-yl, —C(O)NH-piperazin-3-yl, and—C(O)NH(4-NMe-piperazin-3-yl)). R₁ may also be —S-heterocyclyl(including but not limited to —S-azetidinyl, —S-pyrrolidin-3-yl,S-tetrahydropyran-4-yl, —S-piperazin-3-yl, and—S(4-NMe-)piperazin-3-yl). The invention also provides compounds whereinR₁ is —S(O)-heterocyclyl (including but not limited to —S(O)-azetidinyl,—S(O)-pyrrolidin-3-yl, S(O)-tetrahydropyran-4-yl, —S(O)-piperazin-3-yl,and —S(O)— (4-NMe-)piperazin-3-yl). In other embodiments, R₁ is—S(O)₂-heterocyclyl (including but not limited to —S(O)₂-azetidinyl,—S(O)₂-pyrrolidin-3-yl, S(O)₂-tetrahydropyran-4-yl,—S(O)₂-piperazin-3-yl, and —S(O)₂ (4-NMe-)piperazin-3-yl). In some otherembodiments, R₁ is —S(O)₂NR³¹-heterocyclyl (including but not limited to—S(O)₂NH-azetidinyl, —S(O)₂NH-pyrrolidin-3-yl,S(O)₂NH-tetrahydropyran-4-yl, —S(O)₂NH-piperazin-3-yl, and —S(O)₂NH(4-NMe-)piperazin-3-yl). Alternatively, R₁ is —N(R³¹)C(O)-heterocyclyl(including but not limited to —N(Me)C(O)-azetidinyl,—N(Me)C(O)-pyrrolidin-3-yl, —N(Me)C(O)-tetrahydropyran-4-yl,—N(Me)C(O)-piperazin-3-yl, and —N(Me)C(O)-(4-NMe-)piperazin-3-yl). Inyet other embodiments, R₁ is —NR³¹-heterocyclyl (including but notlimited to —N(Me)-azetidinyl, —NH-pyrrolidin-3-yl,—N(Me)-tetrahydropyran-4-yl, —N(Me) piperazin-3-yl, and—NH-(4-NMe-)piperazin-3-yl).

In some embodiments, each alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl,heterocyclyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, forming all or part of R₁may be substituted by one or more R³. R³ is hydrogen or halogen, such aschloro, bromo, fluoro or iodo. In other embodiments, R³ is unsubstitutedor substituted aryl (including but not limited to monocyclic or bicyclicaryl) or unsubstituted or substituted heteroaryl, including but notlimited to monocyclic and bicyclic heteroaryl. Monocyclic heteroaryl R³includes but is not limited to pyrrolyl, thienyl, furyl, pyridinyl,pyranyl, imidazolyl, thiazolyl, pyrazolyl, and oxazolyl. Bicyclicheteroaryl R³ includes but is not limited to benzothiophenyl,benzofuryl, indolyl, quinolinyl, isoquinolinyl, benzimidazolyl,benzoxazolyl, benzothiazolyl, quinazolinyl, azaindolyl,pyrazolopyrimidinyl, and purinyl R³ is also unsubstituted or substitutedC₁₋₁₀alkyl (including but not limited to CH₃, —CH₂CH₃, n-propyl,isopropyl, n-butyl, tert-butyl, sec-butyl, pentyl, hexyl, and heptyl) orunsubstituted or substituted C₃₋₈cycloalkyl (including but not limitedto cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, and cyclopentyl. In other embodiments, R³ is-alkylaryl, -alkyl heteroaryl, or -alkylheterocyclyl. Alkyl, aryl, andheteroaryl are as described herein and the heterocyclyl is unsubstitutedor substituted (non-limiting examples include pyrrolidinyl,tetrahydrofuranyl, piperidinyl, tetrahydropyranyl, thiazolidinyl,imidazolidinyl, morpholinyl, and piperazinyl) For R³-alkylaryl, -alkylheteroaryl, or -alkylheterocyclyl, connection to R₁ is through the alkylportion of the moiety. In yet other embodiments, R³ is unsubstituted orsubstituted alkenyl (including but not limited to unsubstituted orsubstituted C₂-C₁₀alkenyl such as, for example, vinyl, allyl, 1-methylpropen-1-yl, butenyl, or pentenyl) or unsubstituted or substitutedalkynyl (including but not limited to unsubstituted or substitutedC₂-C₁₀alkynyl such as acetylenyl, propargyl, butynyl, or pentynyl).Other compounds are provided by the invention, wherein R³ is-alkenylaryl, -alkenylheteroaryl, -alkenylheteroalkyl, or-alkenylheterocyclcyl, wherein the alkenyl, aryl, heteroaryl,heteroalkyl, and heterocyclyl are as described herein. TheR³-alkenylaryl, -alkenylheteroaryl, -alkenylheteroalkyl, or-alkenylheterocyclcyl moiety is attached to R₁ through the alkenylportion of the moiety. In other embodiments, R³ is -alkynylaryl,-alkynyl heteroaryl, -alkynylheteroalkyl, -alkynylheterocylyl,-alkynylcycloalkyl, or -alkynylcycloalkenyl, wherein alkynyl, aryl,heteroaryl, heteroalkyl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl are as describedherein.

A R³-cycloalkenyl moiety is unsubstituted or substitutedC₃-C₈cycloalkenyl (including but not limited to cyclopentenyl andcyclohexenyl). The R³-alkynylaryl, -alkynyl heteroaryl,-alkynylheteroalkyl, -alkynylheterocylyl, -alkynylcycloalkyl, or-alkynylcycloalkenyl is attached to R₁ through the alkynyl portion ofthe moiety. Some nonlimiting examples include 2-cyclopropylacetylenyland 3-(morpholinyl)proparg-1-yl. In some other embodiments, R³ is-alkoxy alkyl, -alkoxyalkenyl, or -alkoxyalkynyl, wherein alkoxy, alkyl,alkenyl, and alkynyl are as described herien. The R³-alkoxy alkyl,-alkoxyalkenyl, or -alkoxyalkynyl is attached to R₁ through the alkoxyportion of the moiety. In yet other embodiments, R³ is -arylalkenyl,-arylalkynyl, or aryl-heterocyclyl, wherein aryl, alkenyl, alkynyl orheterocyclyl is as described herein. The R³-arylalkenyl, -arylalkynyl,or aryl-heterocyclyl is attached to R₁ through the aryl portion of themoiety. Nonlimiting examples include 4-allylphen-1-yl,2(morpholinyl)phenyl and 4-(piperidinyl)phenyl Alternatively, R³ is-heteroaryl-alkyl, -heteroaryl-alkenyl, -heteroaryl-alkynyl,-heteroaryl-cycloalkyl, -heteroaryl-heteroalkyl, or-heteroaryl-heterocyclyl, wherein heteroaryl, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl,cycloalkyl, heteroalkyl, and heterocyclyl are as described herein. TheR³ heteroaryl-alkyl, heteroaryl-alkenyl, heteroaryl-alkynyl,heteroaryl-cycloalkyl, heteroaryl-heteroalkyl, orheteroaryl-heterocyclyl is attached to R₁ through the heteroaryl portionof the moiety.

In some other embodiments, each aryl or heteroaryl that forms part orall of R³ is unsubstituted or is substituted with one or moreindependent halo, —OH, —R³¹, —CF₃, —OCF₃, —OR³¹, —NR³¹R³², —NR³⁴R³⁵,—C(O)R³¹, CO₂R³¹, —C(═O)NR³¹R³², —C(═O)NNR³⁴R³⁵, —NO₂, —CN, —S(O)₀₋₂R³¹,—SO₂NR³¹R³², —SO₂NR³⁴R³⁵, —NR³¹C(═O)R³², NR³¹C(═O)OR³²,—NR³¹C(═O)NR³²R³³, —NR³¹S(O)₀₋₂R³², —C(═S)OR³¹, —C(═O)SR³¹,—NR³¹C(═NR³²)NR³³R³², —NR³¹C(═NR³²)OR³³, —NR³¹C(═NR³²)SR³³, —OC(═O)OR³³,—OC(═O)NR³¹R³², —OC(═O)SR³¹, —SC(═O)OR³¹, —P(O)OR³¹R³², or—SC(═O)NR³¹R³² substituents.

In yet other embodiments, each alkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, orheteroalkyl forming all or part of R³ is unsubstituted or substitutedwith one or more halo, —OH, —R³¹, —CF₃, —OCF₃, —OR³¹, —O-aryl, —NR³¹R³²,—NR³⁴R³⁵, —C(O)R³¹, —CO₂R³¹, —C(═O)NNR³⁴R³⁵, —C(═O)NR³¹R³², —SO₂NR³¹R³²,or —SO₂NR³⁴R³⁵ substituents.

Alternatively, each alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl,alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, forming all or part of R₁ may besubstituted by one or more R³ wherein R³ is, each R³ is —OH, —R³¹, —CF₃,—OCF₃, —OR³¹, NR³¹R³², —NR³⁴R³⁵, —C(O)R³¹, —CO₂R³¹, —C(═O)NR³¹R³²,—C(═O)NNR³⁴R³⁵, —NO₂, —CN, —S(O)₂R³¹, —SO₂NR³¹R³², —SO₂NR³⁴R³⁵,—NR³¹C(═O)R³², —NR³¹C(═O)OR³², —NR³¹C(═O)NR³²R³³, —NR³¹S(O)₀₋₂R³²,—C(═S)OR³¹, —C(═O)SR³¹, —NR³¹C(═NR³²)NR³³R³², —NR³¹C(═NR³²)OR³³,—NR³¹C(═NR³²)SR³³, —OC(═O)OR³³, —OC(═O)NR³¹R³², —OC(═O)SR³¹,—SC(═O)OR³¹, —P(O)OR³¹OR³², or —SC(═O)NR³¹R³² substituents,

Nonlimiting exemplary R₁ are described in Table 1.

In various embodiments of Formula I, M₁ is:

In some embodiments of the invention, M₁ is benzothiazolyl substitutedwith —(W²)_(k)—R². W² can be —O—, —S(O)₀₋₂— (including but not limitedto —S—, —S(O)—, and —S(O)₂—), —C(O)—, or —C(O)O—. In other embodiments,W¹ is —NR⁶— or —CH(R⁶)N(R⁷)—, wherein R⁶ and R⁷ are each independentlyhydrogen, unsubstituted or substituted C₁-C₁₀alkyl (which includes butis not limited to —CH₃, —CH₂CH₃, n-propyl, isopropyl, n-butyl,tert-butyl, sec-butyl, pentyl, hexyl, and heptyl), unsubstituted orsubstituted C₂-C₁₀ alkenyl (including but not limited to alkenyl suchas, for example, vinyl, allyl, 1-methyl propen-1-yl, butenyl, orpentenyl). Additionally when W² is —NR⁶— or —CH(R⁶)N(R⁷)—, R⁶ and R⁷ areeach independently unsubstituted or substituted aryl (including phenyland naphthtyl). In yet other embodiments, when W² is —NR⁶— or—CH(R⁶)N(R⁷)—, R⁶ and R⁷ are each independently heteroaryl, wherein theheteroaryl is unsubstituted or substituted. R⁶ and R⁷ heteroaryl ismonocyclic heteroaryl, and includes but is not limited to imidazolyl,pyrrolyl, oxazolyl, thiazolyl, and pyridinyl. In some other embodiments,when W² is NR⁶ or —CH(R⁶)N(R⁷)—, R⁶ and R⁷ are each independentlyunsubstituted or substituted heterocyclyl (which includes but is notlimited to pyrrolidinyl, tetrahydrofuranyl, piperidinyl,tetrahydropyranyl, thiazolidinyl, imidazolidinyl, morpholinyl, andpiperazinyl) or unsubstituted or substituted C₃₋₈cycloalkyl (includingbut not limited to cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, and cyclopentyl). Nonlimiting exemplary W² include —NH—, —N(cyclopropyl), and—N(4-N-piperidinyl).

W² may also be —C(O)N(R⁶)—, —N(R⁶)C(O)—, —N(R⁶)S(O)—,—N(R⁶)S(O)₂—CH(R⁶)N(C(O)OR⁷)—, CH(R⁷)N(C(O)R⁷)—, —CH(R⁶)N(SO₂R⁷)—,—CH(R⁶)C(O)N(R⁷)—, —CH(R⁶)N(R⁷)C(O)—, —CH(R⁶)N(R⁷)S(O)—, orCH(R⁶)N(R⁷)S(O)₂—; wherein R⁶ and R⁷ are each independently hydrogen,unsubstituted or substituted C₁-C₁₀alkyl (which includes but is notlimited to —CH₃, —CH₂CH₃, n-propyl, isopropyl, n-butyl, tert-butyl,sec-butyl, pentyl, hexyl, and heptyl) or unsubstituted or substitutedC₂-C₁₀alkenyl (including but not limited to alkenyl such as, forexample, vinyl, allyl, 1-methyl propen-1-yl, butenyl, or pentenyl).Additionally when W² is —C(O)N(R⁶), N(R⁶)C(O)—, —N(R⁶)S(O)—,—N(R⁶)S(O)₂—CH(R⁶)N(C(O)OR⁷)—, —CH(R⁷)N(C(O)R⁷)—, —CH(R⁶)N(SO₂R⁷),CH(R⁶)C(O)N(R⁷)—, —CH(R⁶)N(R⁷)C(O)—, —CH(R⁶)N(R⁷)S(O)—, or—CH(R⁶)N(R⁷)S(O)₂—, R⁶ and R⁷ are each independently unsubstituted orsubstituted aryl (including phenyl and naphthtyl). In yet otherembodiments, when W² is —C(O)N(R⁶)—, —N(R⁶)C(O)—, —N(R⁶)S(O)—,—N(R⁶)S(O)₂—CH(R⁶)N(C(O)OR⁷)—, —CH(R⁷)N(C(O)R⁷), CH(R⁶)N(SO₂R⁷)—,—CH(R⁶)C(O)N(R⁷)—, —CH(R⁶)N(R⁷)C(O)—, —CH(R⁶)N(R⁷)S(O)—, or—CH(R⁶)N(R⁷)S(O)₂—, R⁶ and R⁷ are each independently heteroaryl, whereinthe heteroaryl is unsubstituted or substituted. R⁶ and R⁷ heteroaryl ismonocyclic heteroaryl, and includes but is not limited to imidazolyl,pyrrolyl, oxazolyl, thiazolyl, and pyridinyl. In some other embodiments,when W² is —C(O)N(R⁶)—, —N(R⁶)C(O)—, —N(R⁶)S(O)—,—N(R⁶)S(O)₂—CH(R⁶)N(C(O)OR⁷)—, —CH(R⁷)N(C(O)R⁷)—, —CH(R⁶)N(SO₂R⁷)—,—CH(R⁶)C(O)N(R⁷)—, —CH(R⁶)N(R⁷)C(O)—, —CH(R⁶)N(R⁷)S(O)—, or—CH(R⁶)N(R⁷)S(O)₂—, R⁶ and R⁷ are each independently unsubstituted orsubstituted heterocyclyl (which includes but is not limited topyrrolidinyl, tetrahydrofuranyl, piperidinyl, tetrahydropyranyl,thiazolidinyl, imidazolidinyl, morpholinyl, and piperazinyl) orunsubstituted or substituted C₃₋₈cycloalkyl ((including but not limitedto cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, and cyclopentyl). Non limiting exemplary W²are —C(CO)NH—, —N(Me)C(O)—, —NHC(O)—, N(Me)S(O)—, —NHS(O)₂—,—CH(Me)N(C(O)Ophenyl)-, —CH(Me)N(SO₂Me)-, —CH₂C(O)N(cyclopropyl)-,—CH₂N(allyl)C(O)—, —CH(Me)NHS(O)—, or —CH(Me)NHS(O)₂—.

In other embodiments, W² may also be —N(R⁶)C(O)N(R⁷)— or —CH(R⁷)C(O)—,wherein R⁶ and R⁷ are each independently hydrogen, unsubstituted orsubstituted C₁-C₁₀alkyl (which includes but is not limited to —CH₃,—CH₂CH₃, n-propyl, isopropyl, n-butyl, tert-butyl, sec-butyl, pentyl,hexyl, and heptyl) or unsubstituted or substituted C₂-C₁₀alkenyl(including but not limited to alkenyl such as, for example, vinyl,allyl, 1-methyl propen-1-yl, butenyl, or pentenyl). Additionally when W²is —N(R⁶)C(O)N(R⁷)— or —CH(R⁷)C(O)—, R⁶ and R⁷ are each independentlyunsubstituted or substituted aryl (including phenyl and naphthtyl). Inyet other embodiments, W² is —N(R⁶)C(O)N(R⁷)— or —CH(R⁷)C(O)—, R⁶ and R⁷are each independently heteroaryl, wherein the heteroaryl isunsubstituted or substituted. R⁶ and R⁷ heteroaryl is monocyclicheteroaryl, and includes but is not limited to imidazolyl, pyrrolyl,oxazolyl, thiazolyl, and pyridinyl. In some other embodiments, W² is—N(R⁶)C(O)N(R⁷)— or —CH(R⁷)C(O)—, R⁶ and R⁷ are each independentlyunsubstituted or substituted heterocyclyl (which includes but is notlimited to pyrrolidinyl, tetrahydrofuranyl, piperidinyl,tetrahydropyranyl, thiazolidinyl, imidazolidinyl, morpholinyl, andpiperazinyl) or unsubstituted or substituted C₃₋₈cycloalkyl ((includingbut not limited to cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, and cyclopentyl). Nonlimiting examples of —N(R⁶)C(O)N(R⁷)— or —CH(R⁷)C(O)— include—NHC(O)NH—, NHC(O)N(Me)-, and —CH₂C(O)—.

In other embodiments, W² is —NR³⁴R³⁵, wherein —NR³⁴R³⁵ is as describedabove.

In other embodiments wherein W² comprises R⁶ and/or R⁷ alkyl, alkenyl,aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl or cycloalkyl, each R⁶ and/or R⁷ alkyl,alkenyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl or cycloalkyl is unsubstitutedor substituted by one or more independent R⁸ substituents. In someembodiments, the R⁶ and/or R⁷ alkyl, alkenyl, aryl, heteroaryl,heterocyclyl or cycloalkyl is substituted by one or more halo, —SH, NH₂,—NO₂, or —CN. In other embodiments, R⁶ and/or R⁷ alkyl, alkenyl, aryl,heteroaryl, heterocyclyl or cycloalkyl is substituted by one or more—OR³¹, —NR³¹R³², —CO₂R³¹, or —C(═O)NR³¹R³². Nonlimiting exemplarysubstituted R⁶ and/or R⁷ alkyl, alkenyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclylor cycloalkyl include 1-(3-hydroxyl)propyl, 3-diethylaminophenyl,3-carboxymethyl pyridinyl, and 4-(carboxamido)piperazinyl.

Alternatively, wherein W² comprises R⁶ and/or R⁷alkyl, alkenyl, aryl,heteroaryl, heterocyclyl or cycloalkyl, the R⁶ and/or R⁷alkyl, alkenyl,aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl or cycloalkyl is substituted by one ormore R⁸ substituents wherein R⁸ is —SO₂NR³⁴R³⁵, —NR³⁴R³⁵, —SO₂NR³¹R³²,or —C(═O) NR³⁴R³⁵, wherein the R³⁴ and R³⁵ of NR³¹R³² are taken togetherto form a cyclic moiety as described herein. Non-limiting exemplarysubstituted R⁶ and/or R⁷ alkyl, alkenyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclylor cycloalkyl include -ethylSO₂(piperazinyl),iso(-3-azetidinyl)buten-1-yl, and (4-morpholinyl)-piperazinyl. In yetother embodiments, R⁶ and/or R⁷ alkyl, alkenyl, aryl, heteroaryl,heterocyclyl or cycloalkyl is substituted by one or more —CO₂aryl,—S(O)₀₋₂aryl, —S(O)₀₋₂ alkyl, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, or alkynyl,wherein the aryl, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl or alkenyl are as describedherein. Non-limiting exemplary substituted R⁶ and/or R⁷ alkyl, alkenyl,aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl or cycloalkyl include(2-phenylsulfonyl)ethyl, (4-methylsulfonyl)cyclohexyl, and(3-phenylsulfonyl)propargyl.

In other embodiments, wherein W² comprises R⁶ and/or R⁷ alkyl, alkenyl,aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl or cycloalkyl, the R⁶ and/or R⁷ alkyl,alkenyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl or cycloalkyl is substituted byone or more R⁸ wherein R⁸ is -aryl-alkyl, -aryl-alkenyl, -aryl-alkynyl,-heteroaryl-alkyl, -heteroaryl-alkenyl, or -heteroaryl-alkynyl. When R⁸is -aryl-alkyl, -aryl-alkenyl, or -aryl-alkynyl, each aryl, alkyl,alkenyl, and alkynyl is as described herein and connection to R⁶ and/orR⁷ is made through the aryl portion of each moiety. Each R⁸-aryl-alkyl,-aryl-alkenyl, and -aryl-alkynyl is unsubstituted or substituted withone or more independent halo, cyano, nitro, —O-alkyl, alkyl, alkenyl,alkynyl, haloalkyl, haloalkenyl, haloalkynyl, —COOH, —C(═O)NR³¹R³²,—C(═O) NR³⁴R³⁵, SO₂NR³⁴R³⁵, —SO₂NR³¹R³², —NR³¹R³², or —NR³⁴R³⁵substituents. Alternatively, R⁸ is -heteroaryl-alkyl,-heteroaryl-alkenyl, or -heteroaryl-alkynyl, wherein heteroaryl, alkyl,alkenyl and alkynyl are as described herein and connection to R⁶ and/orR⁷ is made through the heteroaryl portion of each moiety. EachR⁸-heteroaryl-alkyl, -heteroaryl-alkenyl, and -heteroaryl-alkynyl isunsubstituted or substituted with one or more independent halo, cyano,nitro, —O-alkyl, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, haloalkyl, haloalkenyl,haloalkynyl, —COOH, —C(═O)NR³¹R³²C(═O) NR³⁴R³⁵, —SO₂NR³⁴R³⁵,—SO₂NR³¹R³², —NR³¹R³², or —NR³⁴R³⁵ substituents.

In some of the embodiments of the compounds of the invention, R² of(W²)_(k)—R², is hydrogen or halogen, such as chloro, bromo, fluoro oriodo. In other embodiments, R² is substituted monocyclic aryl (includingfor example, 3-bromophenyl, 4-methyoxyphenyl, and 3-cyanophenyl) orbicyclic aryl. R² bicyclic aryl is unsubstituted or substituted(including naphthyl and fluorenyl). In other embodiments, R² isunsubstituted or substituted heteroaryl, including but not limited tomonocyclic and bicyclic heteroaryl. Monocyclic heteroaryl R² includesbut is not limited to pyrrolyl, thienyl, furyl, pyridinyl, pyranyl,imidazolyl, thiazolyl, pyrazolyl, and oxazolyl. Bicyclic heteroaryl R²includes but is not limited to benzothiophenyl, benzofuryl, indolyl,quinolinyl, isoquinolinyl, benzimidazolyl, benzoxazolyl, benzothiazolyl,quinazolinyl, azaindolyl, pyrazolopyrimidinyl, and purinyl R² is alsounsubstituted or substituted C₁₋₁₀alkyl (including but not limited toCH₃, —CH₂CH₃, n-propyl, isopropyl, n-butyl, tert-butyl, sec-butyl,pentyl, hexyl, and heptyl) or unsubstituted or substitutedC₃₋₈cycloalkyl (including but not limited to cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl,and cyclopentyl. In other embodiments, R² is -alkyl-substitutedmonocyclic aryl, -alkyl heteroaryl, or -alkylheterocyclyl. Alkyl,monaryl, and heteroaryl are as described herein and the heterocyclyl isunsubstituted or substituted (non-limiting examples includepyrrolidinyl, tetrahydrofuranyl, piperidinyl, tetrahydropyranyl,thiazolidinyl, imidazolidinyl, morpholinyl, and piperazinyl) ForR²-alkyl-substituted monocyclic aryl, -alkyl heteroaryl, or-alkylheterocyclyl, connection to W² or to the compound of Formula I isthrough the alkyl portion of the moiety. In yet other embodiments, R² isunsubstituted or substituted alkenyl (C₂-C₁₀alkenyl includes but notlimited to vinyl, allyl, 1-methyl propen-1-yl, butenyl, or pentenyl) orunsubstituted or substituted alkynyl (C₂-C₁₀alkynyl includes but is notlimited to acetylenyl, propargyl, butynyl, or pentynyl). Other compoundsare provided by the invention, wherein R² is -alkenylaryl,-alkenylheteroaryl, -alkenylheteroalkyl, or -alkenylheterocyclcyl,wherein the alkenyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heteroalkyl, and heterocyclyl areas described herein. The R²-alkenylaryl, -alkenylheteroaryl,-alkenylheteroalkyl, or -alkenylheterocyclcyl moiety is attached to W²or to the compound of Formula I through the alkenyl portion of themoiety. In other embodiments, R² is -alkynylaryl, -alkynyl heteroaryl,-alkynylheteroalkyl, -alkynylheterocylyl, -alkynylcycloalkyl, or-alkynylcycloalkenyl, wherein alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heteroalkyl,heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl are as described herein.

A R²-cycloalkenyl moiety is unsubstituted or substitutedC₃-C₈cycloalkenyl (including but not limited to cyclopentenyl andcyclohexenyl). The R²-alkynylaryl, -alkynyl heteroaryl,-alkynylheteroalkyl, -alkynylheterocylyl, -alkynylcycloalkyl, or-alkynylcycloalkenyl is attached to W² or to the compound of Formula Ithrough the alkynyl portion of the moiety. Some nonlimiting examplesinclude 2-cyclopropylacetylenyl and 3-(morpholinyl)proparg-1-yl. In someother embodiments, R² is -alkoxy alkyl, -alkoxyalkenyl, or-alkoxyalkynyl, wherein alkoxy, alkyl, alkenyl, and alkynyl are asdescribed herien. The R²-alkoxy alkyl, -alkoxyalkenyl, or -alkoxyalkynylis attached to W² or to the compound of Formula I through the alkoxyportion of the moiety. In yet other embodiments, R² is -arylalkenyl,-arylalkynyl, or -aryl-heterocyclyl, wherein aryl, alkenyl, alkynyl orheterocyclyl is as described herein. The R²-arylalkenyl, -arylalkynyl,or aryl-heterocyclyl is attached to W² or to the compound of Formula Ithrough the aryl portion of the moiety. Nonlimiting examples include4-allylphen-1-yl, 2(morpholinyl)phenyl and 4-(piperidinyl)phenylAlternatively, R² is -heteroaryl-alkyl, heteroaryl-alkenyl,-heteroaryl-alkynyl, -heteroaryl-cycloalkyl, -heteroaryl-heteroalkyl, or-heteroaryl-heterocyclyl, wherein heteroaryl, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl,cycloalkyl, heteroalkyl, and heterocyclyl are as described herein. TheR²-heteroaryl-alkyl, -heteroaryl-alkenyl, -heteroaryl-alkynyl,-heteroaryl-cycloalkyl, -heteroaryl-heteroalkyl, or-heteroaryl-heterocyclyl is attached to W² or to the compound of FormulaI through the heteroaryl portion of the moiety. Other compounds areprovided by the invention, wherein R² is -(unsubstituted or substitutedheterocyclyl) wherein heterocyclyl includes but is not limited toazetidinyl, pyrrolidinyl, tetrahydrofuranyl, piperidinyl,tetrahydropyranyl, thiazolidinyl, imidazolidinyl, morpholinyl, andpiperazinyl. In other embodiments, R² is -heterocyclyl-heterocyclyl, andinclude without being limited to -(1-(N4-Me piperazinyl)piperidin-4-yl.In yet other embodiments, R² is -cycloalkyl-heterocyclyl whereincycloalkyl and heterocyclyl are as described herein and is connected toW² or to the compound of Formula I through the cycloalkyl portion of themoiety. R²-cycloalkyl-heterocyclyl include without limitation-(3-morpholinyl)cyclobut-1-yl, and -4-(morpholinyl)cyclohex-1-yl.

In some embodiments, each aryl or heteroaryl that forms part or all ofR² is unsubstituted or is substituted with one or more independent halo,—OH, —R³¹, —CF₃, —OCF₃, —OR³¹, —NR³¹R³², —NR³⁴R³⁵, —C(O)R³¹, —CO₂R³¹,—C(═O)NR³¹R³², —C(═O)NNR³⁴R³⁵, —NO₂, CN, —S(O)₀₋₂R³¹, SO₂NR³¹R³²,SO₂NR³⁴R³⁵, —NR³¹C(═O)R³², —NR³¹C(═O)OR³²—NR³¹C(═O)NR³²R³³,—NR³¹S(O)₀₋₂R³², —C(═S)OR³¹, C(═O)SR³¹, —NR³¹C(═NR³²)NR³³R³²,—NR³¹C(═NR³²)OR³³, —NR³¹C(═NR³²)SR³³, —OC(═O)OR³³, —OC(═O)NR³¹R³²,—OC(═O)SR³¹, —SC(═O)OR³¹, —P(O)OR³¹OR³², or —SC(═O)NR³¹R³² substituents.

In other embodiments, each alkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, orheteroalkyl forming all or part of R² is unsubstituted or substitutedwith one or more halo, —OH, —R³¹, —CF₃, —OCF₃, —OR³¹, —O-aryl, —NR³¹R³²,—NR³⁴R³⁵, —C(O)R³¹, —CO₂R³¹, —C(═O)NNR³⁴R³⁵, or —C(═O)NR³¹R³²substituents. In some embodiments, each alkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl,or heteroalkyl forming all or part of R² is unsubstituted or substitutedwith one or more —C(═O)NNR³⁴R³⁵, —NO₂, —CN, —S(O)₀₋₂R³¹, —SO₂NR³¹R³²,—SO₂NR³⁴R³⁵, —NR³¹C(═O)R³², —NR³¹C(═O)OR³², —NR³¹C(═O)NR³²R³³,—NR³¹S(O)₀₋₂R³², —C(═S)OR³¹, —C(═O)SR³¹, —NR³¹C(═NR³²)NR³³R³²,—NR³¹C(═NR³²)OR³³, —NR³¹C(═NR³²)SR³³, —OC(═O)OR³³, —OC(═O)NR³¹R³²,—OC(═O)SR³¹, —SC(═O)OR³¹, —P(O)OR³¹OR³², or —SC(═O)NR³¹R³² substituents.

Additional, non-limiting exemplary —(W²)_(k)—R² are described in Table2.

The invention provides compounds of Formula I having a structure of oneof the following formulae:

In some further embodiments of the invention, the compound of FormulaeI-V is a compound of one of the following formualae:

In some of the embodiments of the compounds of Formula II-3, III-3,IV-3, or V-3, when R⁶ or R² is phenyl, then the phenyl is a substitutedphenyl. In other embodiments, when R⁶ and/or R² is alkyl, then R⁶ and/orR² is unsubstituted or substituted with one or more halo, OH, —CF₃,—OCF₃, —OR³¹, —O-aryl, —NR³¹R³², —NR³⁴R³⁵, —C(O)R³¹, —CO₂R³¹,—C(═O)NNR³⁴R³⁵, —NO₂, —CN, —S(O)₀₋₂R³¹, —SO₂NR³¹R³², —SO₂NR³⁴R³⁵,—NR³¹C(═O)R³², —NR³¹C(═O)OR³², —NR³¹C(═O)NR³²R³³, —NR³¹S(O)₀₋₂R³²,—C(═S)OR³¹, —C(═O)SR³¹, —NR³¹C(═NR³²)NR³³R³², —NR³¹C(═NR³²)OR³³,—NR³¹C(═NR³²)SR³³, —OC(═O)OR³³, —OC(═O)NR³¹R³², —OC(═O)SR³¹,—SC(═O)OR³¹, —P(O)OR³¹OR³², or —SC(═O)NR³¹R³² substituents. In otherembodiments, when R⁶ and/or R² is alkyl, then R⁶ and/or R² issubstituted by cycloalkyl or heterocyclyl. In other embodiments, R⁶ ishydrogen and R² is unsubstituted alkyl or hydrogen. In some embodiments,R⁶ and R² are hydrogen.

In other embodiments of the invention, the compound of Formula I is acompound of Formula VI, VII, VIII, or IX:

wherein E¹ and E² are independently -(W¹)_(j)—R⁴ and j, in eachinstance, is 0 or 1.

In some embodiments of a compound of Formulae VI-IX, W¹ is —O—,S(O)₀₋₂ - (including but not limited to —S—, —S(O)—, and —S(O)₂—),—C(O)—, or-, —C(O)O—. In other embodiments, W¹ is —NR⁶— or—CH(R⁶)N(R⁷)—, wherein R⁶ and R⁷ are each independently hydrogen,unsubstituted or substituted C₁-C₁₀alkyl (which includes but is notlimited to —CH₃, —CH₂CH₃, n-propyl, isopropyl, n-butyl, tert-butyl,sec-butyl, pentyl, hexyl, and heptyl), unsubstituted or substitutedC₂-C₁₀ alkenyl (including but not limited to alkenyl such as, forexample, vinyl, allyl, 1-methyl propen-1-yl, butenyl, or pentenyl).Additionally when W¹ is NR⁶ or —CH(R⁶)N(R⁷)—, R⁶ and R⁷ are eachindependently unsubstituted or substituted aryl (including phenyl andnaphthtyl). In yet other embodiments, when W¹ is NR⁶ or —CH(R⁶)N(R⁷)—,R⁶ and R⁷ are each independently heteroaryl, wherein the heteroaryl isunsubstituted or substituted. R⁶ and R⁷ heteroaryl is monocyclicheteroaryl, and includes but is not limited to imidazolyl, pyrrolyl,oxazolyl, thiazolyl, and pyridinyl. In some other embodiments, when W¹is NR⁶ or —CH(R⁶)N(R⁷)—, R⁶ and R⁷ are each independently unsubstitutedor substituted heterocyclyl (which includes but is not limited topyrrolidinyl, tetrahydrofuranyl, piperidinyl, tetrahydropyranyl,thiazolidinyl, imidazolidinyl, morpholinyl, and piperazinyl) orunsubstituted or substituted C₃₋₈cycloalkyl ((including but not limitedto cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, and cyclopentyl). Non limiting exemplary W¹include —NH—, —N(cyclopropyl), and —N(4-N-piperidinyl).

W¹ may also be —C(O)N(R⁶)—, —N(R⁶)C(O)—, —N(R⁶)S(O)—,—N(R⁶)S(O)₂—CH(R⁶)N(C(O)OR⁷)—, —CH(R⁷)N(C(O)R⁷)—, —CH(R⁶)N(SO₂R⁷)—,—CH(R⁶)C(O)N(R⁷)—, —CH(R⁶)N(R⁷)C(O)—, —CH(R⁶)N(R⁷)S(O)—, or—CH(R⁶)N(R⁷)S(O)₂—; wherein R⁶ and R⁷ are each independently hydrogen,unsubstituted or substituted C₁-C₁₀alkyl (which includes but is notlimited to —CH₃, —CH₂CH₃, n-propyl, isopropyl, n-butyl, tert-butyl,sec-butyl, pentyl, hexyl, and heptyl) or unsubstituted or substitutedC₂-C₁₀alkenyl (including but not limited to alkenyl such as, forexample, vinyl, allyl, 1-methyl propen-1-yl, butenyl, or pentenyl).Additionally when W¹ is —C(O)N(R⁶)—, —N(R⁶)C(O)—, —N(R⁶)S(O)—,—N(R⁶)S(O)₂—CH(R⁶)N(C(O)OR⁷)—, —CH(R⁷)N(C(O)R⁷)—, —CH(R⁶)N(SO₂R⁷)—,—CH(R⁶)C(O)N(R⁷)—, —CH(R⁶)N(R⁷)C(O)—, —CH(R⁶)N(R⁷)S(O)—, or—CH(R⁶)N(R⁷)S(O)₂—, R⁶ and R⁷ are each independently unsubstituted orsubstituted aryl (including phenyl and naphthtyl). In yet otherembodiments, when —C(O)N(R⁶)—, —N(R⁶)C(O)—, —N(R⁶)S(O)—,—N(R⁶)S(O)₂—CH(R⁶)N(C(O)OR⁷)—, —CH(R⁷)N(C(O)R⁷)—, —CH(R⁶)N(SO₂R⁷)—,—CH(R⁶)C(O)N(R⁷)—, —CH(R⁶)N(R⁷)C(O)—, —CH(R⁶)N(R⁷)S(O)—, or—CH(R⁶)N(R⁷)S(O)₂—, R⁶ and R⁷ are each independently heteroaryl, whereinthe heteroaryl is unsubstituted or substituted. R⁶ and R⁷ heteroaryl ismonocyclic heteroaryl, and includes but is not limited to imidazolyl,pyrrolyl, oxazolyl, thiazolyl, and pyridinyl. In some other embodiments,when —C(O)N(R⁶)—, —N(R⁶)C(O)—, —N(R⁶)S(O)—,—N(R⁶)S(O)₂—CH(R⁶)N(C(O)OR⁷)—, —CH(R⁷)N(C(O)R⁷)—, —CH(R⁶)N(SO₂R⁷)—,—CH(R⁶)C(O)N(R⁷)—, —CH(R⁶)N(R⁷)C(O)—, —CH(R⁶)N(R⁷)S(O)—, or—CH(R⁶)N(R⁷)S(O)₂—, R⁶ and R⁷ are each independently unsubstituted orsubstituted heterocyclyl (which includes but is not limited topyrrolidinyl, tetrahydrofuranyl, piperidinyl, tetrahydropyranyl,thiazolidinyl, imidazolidinyl, morpholinyl, and piperazinyl) orunsubstituted or substituted C₃₋₈cycloalkyl ((including but not limitedto cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, and cyclopentyl). Non limiting exemplary W¹are —C(CO)NH—, —N(Me)C(O)—, —NHC(O)—, —N(Me)S(O)—, —NHS(O)₂—,—CH(Me)N(C(O)Ophenyl)-, —CH(Me)N(SO₂Me)-, —CH₂C(O)N(cyclopropyl)-,—CH₂N(allyl)C(O)—, —CH(Me)NHS(O)—, or —CH(Me)NHS(O)₂—.

In other embodiments of a compound of Formulae VI-IX, wherein E¹ and/orE² is —W¹—R⁴, and W¹ comprises R⁶ and/or R⁷ alkyl, alkenyl, aryl,heteroaryl, heterocyclyl or cycloalkyl, each R⁶ and/or R⁷ alkyl,alkenyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl or cycloalkyl is unsubstitutedor substituted by one or more independent R⁸ substituents. In someembodiments, the R⁶ and/or R⁷ alkyl, alkenyl, aryl, heteroaryl,heterocyclyl or cycloalkyl is substituted by one or more halo, —SH, NH₂,—NO₂, or —CN. In other embodiments, R⁶ and/or R⁷ alkyl, alkenyl, aryl,heteroaryl, heterocyclyl or cycloalkyl is substituted by one or more—OR³¹, —NR³¹R³², —CO₂R³¹, or C(═O)NR³¹R³². Nonlimiting exemplarysubstituted R⁶ and/or R⁷ alkyl, alkenyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclylor cycloalkyl include 1-(3-hydroxyl)propyl, 3-diethylaminophenyl,3-carboxymethyl pyridinyl, and 4-(carboxamido)piperazinyl.

Alternatively, wherein E¹ and/or E² is —W¹—R⁴, and W¹ comprises R⁶and/or R⁷alkyl, alkenyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl or cycloalkyl,the R⁶ and/or R⁷alkyl, alkenyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl orcycloalkyl is substituted by one or more R⁸ substituents wherein R⁸ is—SO₂NR³⁴R³⁵, —NR³⁴R³⁵, —SO₂NR³¹R³², or —C(═O) NR³⁴R³⁵, wherein the R³⁴and R³⁵ of NR³¹R³² are taken together to form a cyclic moiety asdescribed herein. Non-limiting exemplary substituted R⁶ and/or R⁷ alkyl,alkenyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl or cycloalkyl include-ethylSO₂(piperazinyl), iso(-3-azetidinyl)buten-1-yl, and(4-morpholinyl)-piperazinyl. In yet other embodiments, R⁶ and/or R⁷alkyl, alkenyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl or cycloalkyl issubstituted by one or more —CO₂aryl, —S(O)₀₋₂aryl, —S(O)₀₋₂alkyl, alkyl,cycloalkyl, alkenyl, or alkynyl, wherein the aryl, alkyl, cycloalkyl,alkenyl or alkenyl are as described herein. Non-limiting exemplarysubstituted R⁶ and/or R⁷ alkyl, alkenyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclylor cycloalkyl include (2-phenylsulfonyl)ethyl,(4-methylsulfonyl)cyclohexyl, and (3-phenylsulfonyl)propargyl.

In other embodiments a compound of Formulae VI-IX, wherein E¹ and/or E²is —W¹—R⁴, and W comprises R⁶ and/or R⁷ alkyl, alkenyl, aryl,heteroaryl, heterocyclyl or cycloalkyl, the R⁶ and/or R⁷ alkyl, alkenyl,aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl or cycloalkyl is substituted by one ormore R⁸ wherein R⁸ is -aryl-alkyl, -aryl-alkenyl, -aryl-alkynyl,-heteroaryl-alkyl, -heteroaryl-alkenyl, or -heteroaryl-alkynyl. When R⁸is -aryl-alkyl, -aryl-alkenyl, or -aryl-alkynyl, each aryl, alkyl,alkenyl, and alkynyl is as described herein and connection to R⁶ and/orR⁷ is made through the aryl portion of each moiety. Each R⁸-aryl-alkyl,-aryl-alkenyl, and -aryl-alkynyl is unsubstituted or substituted withone or more independent halo, cyano, nitro, —Oalkyl, alkyl, alkenyl,alkynyl, haloalkyl, haloalkenyl, haloalkynyl, —COOH, —C(═O)NR³¹R³²,—C(═O) NR³⁴R³⁵, —SO₂NR³⁴R³⁵, —SO₂NR³¹R³², —NR³¹R³², or —NR³⁴R³⁵substituents. Alternatively, R⁸ is -heteroaryl-alkyl,-heteroaryl-alkenyl, or -heteroaryl-alkynyl, wherein heteroaryl, alkyl,alkenyl and alkynyl are as described herein and connection to R⁶ and/orR⁷ is made through the heteroaryl portion of each moiety. EachR⁸-heteroaryl-alkyl, -heteroaryl-alkenyl, and -heteroaryl-alkynyl isunsubstituted or substituted with one or more independent halo, cyano,nitro, —Oalkyl, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, haloalkyl, haloalkenyl,haloalkynyl, —COOH, —C(═O)NR³¹R³², —C(═O) NR³⁴R³⁵, —SO₂NR³⁴R³⁵,—SO₂NR³¹R³², —NR³¹R³², or —NR³⁴R³⁵ substituents.

In other embodiments of a compound of Formulae VI-IX, R³¹, R³², and R³³are moieties forming part of R¹, R², R³, R⁴, R⁵, and R⁸. R³¹, R³², andR³³, in each instance, are H or unsubstituted or substituted C₁₋₁₀alkyl(which includes but is not limited to —CH₃, —CH₂CH₃, n-propyl,isopropyl, n-butyl, tert-butyl, sec-butyl, pentyl, hexyl, and heptyl).When R³¹, R³², and/or R³³ alkyl is substituted, the alkyl is substitutedwith one or more aryl ((which includes but is not limited to —CH₃,—CH₂CH₃, n-propyl, isopropyl, n-butyl, tert-butyl, sec-butyl, pentyl,hexyl, and heptyl), heteroalkyl (which includes but is not limited tomethoxyethoxy and 3-diethylamino propyl), heterocyclyl (including butnot limited to azetidinyl, morpholinyl, or piperazinyl), or heteroaryl(including but not limited to imidazolyl, thiazolyl, or oxazolyl)substituents, wherein each of said alkyl, aryl, heteroalkyl,heterocyclyl, or heteroaryl groups is unsubstituted or substituted withone or more halo, —OH, -alkyl, —F₃, —O-aryl, —OCF₃, —Oalkyl, —NH₂,—N(alkyl)₂, —NH(alkyl), —NH(aryl), —NR³⁴R³⁵, —C(O)(alkyl),—C(O)(alkyl-aryl), —C(O)(aryl), CO₂alkyl, —CO₂-alkylaryl, —CO₂-aryl,—C(═O)N(alkyl)₂, —C(═O)NH(alkyl), —C(═O)NR³⁴R³⁵, —C(═O)NH₂, —OCF₃,O(alkyl), —O-aryl, —N(aryl)(alkyl), —NO₂, —CN, —S(O)₀₋₂ alkyl,—S(O)₀₋₂alkylaryl, —S(O)₀₋₂ aryl, —SO₂N(aryl), —SO₂N(alkyl)₂,—SO₂NH(alkyl) or —SO₂NR³⁴R³⁵ substituents.

R³⁴ and R³⁵ may also form part of R¹, R², R³, R⁴, R⁵, and R⁸. R³⁴ andR³⁵ in —NR³⁴R³⁵, —C(═O)NNR³⁴R³⁵ or —SO₂NR³⁴R³⁵, are taken together withthe nitrogen atom to which they are attached to form a 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8,9, or 10 membered saturated or unsaturated ring; wherein said ring ineach instance is unsubstituted or substituted by one or more —NR³¹R³²,hydroxyl, halogen, oxo, aryl, hetaryl, alkyl, O-aryl, —C(O)R³¹, or—SO₂R³¹ substituents, and wherein said 3-10 membered saturated orunsaturated ring in each instance includes 0, 1, or 2 more heteroatomsother than the nitrogen.

The invention provides compounds of Formulae VI-IX, wherein Eand/or E²is R⁴ or is —W¹R⁴. R⁴ is hydrogen or halogen, such as chloro, bromo,fluoro or iodo. In other embodiments, R⁴ is unsubstituted or substitutedaryl (including but not limited to monocyclic or bicyclic aryl) orunsubstituted or substituted heteroaryl, including but not limited tomonocyclic and bicyclic heteroaryl. Monocyclic heteroaryl R⁴ includesbut is not limited to pyrrolyl, thienyl, furyl, pyridinyl, pyranyl,imidazolyl, thiazolyl, pyrazolyl, and oxazolyl. Bicyclic heteroaryl R⁴includes but is not limited to benzothiophenyl, benzofuryl, indolyl,quinolinyl, isoquinolinyl, benzimidazolyl, benzoxazolyl, benzothiazolyl,quinazolinyl, azaindolyl, pyrazolopyrimidinyl, and purinyl R⁴ is alsounsubstituted or substituted C₁₋₁₀alkyl (including but not limited toCH₃, —CH₂CH₃, n-propyl, isopropyl, n-butyl, tert-butyl, sec-butyl,pentyl, hexyl, and heptyl) or unsubstituted or substitutedC₃₋₈cycloalkyl (including but not limited to cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl,and cyclopentyl. In other embodiments, R⁴ is -alkylaryl, -alkylheteroaryl, or -alkylheterocyclyl. Alkyl, aryl, and heteroaryl are asdescribed herein and the heterocyclyl is unsubstituted or substituted(non-limiting examples include pyrrolidinyl, tetrahydrofuranyl,piperidinyl, tetrahydropyranyl, thiazolidinyl, imidazolidinyl,morpholinyl, and piperazinyl) For R⁴-alkylaryl, -alkyl heteroaryl, or-alkylheterocyclyl, connection to W¹ or to the compound of Formula I isthrough the alkyl portion of the moiety. In yet other embodiments, R⁴ isunsubstituted or substituted alkenyl (including but not limited tounsubstituted or substituted C₂-C₁₀alkenyl such as, for example, vinyl,allyl, 1-methyl propen-1-yl, butenyl, or pentenyl) or unsubstituted orsubstituted alkynyl (including but not limited to unsubstituted orsubstituted C₂-C₁₀alkynyl such as acetylenyl, propargyl, butynyl, orpentynyl). Other compounds are provided by the invention, wherein R⁴ is-alkenylaryl, alkenylheteroaryl, -alkenylheteroalkyl, or-alkenylheterocyclcyl, wherein the alkenyl, aryl, heteroaryl,heteroalkyl, and heterocyclyl are as described herein. TheR⁴-alkenylaryl, -alkenylheteroaryl, -alkenylheteroalkyl, or-alkenylheterocyclcyl moiety is attached to W¹ or to the compound ofFormula I through the alkenyl portion of the moiety. In otherembodiments, R⁴ is -alkynylaryl, -alkynyl heteroaryl,-alkynylheteroalkyl, -alkynylheterocylyl, -alkynylcycloalkyl, or-alkynylcycloalkenyl, wherein alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heteroalkyl,heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl are as described herein. A R⁴-cycloalkenylmoiety is unsubstituted or substituted C3₂-C₈cycloalkenyl (including butnot limited to cyclopentenyl and cyclohexenyl). The R⁴-alkynylaryl,-alkynyl heteroaryl, -alkynylheteroalkyl, -alkynylheterocylyl,-alkynylcycloalkyl, or -alkynylcycloalkenyl is attached to W¹ or to thecompound of Formula I through the alkynyl portion of the moiety. Somenonlimiting examples include 2-cyclopropylacetylenyl and3-(morpholinyl)proparg-1-yl. In some other embodiments, R⁴ is -alkoxyalkyl, -alkoxyalkenyl, or -alkoxyalkynyl, wherein alkoxy, alkyl,alkenyl, and alkynyl are as described herein. The R⁴ alkoxy alkyl,-alkoxyalkenyl, or -alkoxyalkynyl is attached to W¹ or to the compoundof Formula I through the alkoxy portion of the moiety. In yet otherembodiments, R⁴ is -arylalkenyl, -arylalkynyl, or aryl-heterocyclyl,wherein aryl, alkenyl, alkynyl or heterocyclyl is as described herein.The R⁴-arylalkenyl, -arylalkynyl, or aryl-heterocyclyl is attached to W¹or to the compound of Formula I through the aryl portion of the moiety.

Nonlimiting examples include 4-allylphen-1-yl, 2(morpholinyl)phenyl and4-(piperidinyl)phenyl Alternatively, R⁴ is heteroaryl-alkyl,heteroaryl-alkenyl, heteroaryl-alkynyl, heteroaryl-cycloalkyl,heteroaryl-heteroalkyl, or heteroaryl-heterocyclyl, wherein heteroaryl,alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, heteroalkyl, and heterocyclyl areas described herein. The R⁴-heteroaryl-alkyl, heteroaryl-alkenyl,heteroaryl-alkynyl, -heteroaryl-cycloalkyl, -heteroaryl-heteroalkyl, or-heteroaryl-heterocyclyl is attached to W¹ or to the compound of FormulaI through the heteroaryl portion of the moiety.

For a compound of Formulae VI-IX, in some embodiments, each aryl orheteroaryl that forms part or all of R⁴ is unsubstituted or issubstituted with one or more independent halo, —OH, —R³¹, —CF₃, —OCF₃,—OR³¹, —NR³¹R³², —NR³⁴R³⁵, —C(O)R³¹, —CO₂R³¹, —C(═O)NR³¹R³²,—C(═O)NNR³⁴R³⁵, —NO₂, —CN, —S(O)₀₋₂R³¹, —SO₂NR³¹R³², SO₂NR³⁴R³⁵,—NR³¹C(═O)R³², —NR³¹C(═O)OR³², —NR³¹C(═O)NR³²R³³, —NR³¹S(O)₀₋₂R³²,C(═S)OR³¹, —C(═O)SR³¹, —NR³¹C(═NR³²)NR³³R³², —NR³¹C(═NR³²)OR³³,—NR³¹C(═NR³²)SR³³, —OC(═O)OR³³, —OC(═O)NR³¹R³², —OC(═O)SR³¹,—SC(═O)OR³¹, —P(O)OR³¹OR³², or —SC(═O)NR³¹R³² substituents.

Each alkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, or heteroalkyl forming all or partof R⁴ is unsubstituted or substituted with one or more halo, —OH, —R³¹,—CF₃, —OCF₃, —OR³¹, —O-aryl, —NR³¹R³², —NR³⁴R³⁵, —C(O)R³¹, —CO₂R³¹,—C(═O)NNR³⁴R³⁵, or —C(═O)NR³¹R³² substituents.

In various embodiments, X₁ is C—(W)_(j)—R⁴. In some embodiments, X₁ isC—R⁴. In some embodiments, X₁ is —OR⁴. In other embodiments, X₁ is—NR⁷R⁴ (including but not limited to —NHR⁴. X₁ is also S(O)₀₋₂R⁴. Inother embodiments, X₁ is —C(O)R⁴. Additionally, X₁ is —C(O)N(R⁷) R⁴. Insome other embodiments, X₁ is —N(R⁷)C(O) R⁴. In yet other embodiments,X₁ is —N(R⁷)S(O)R⁴. In various embodiments, X₁ is N(R⁷)S(O)₂R⁴. In someembodiments, X₁ is —C(O)OR⁴. Alternatively, X₁ is CH(R⁷)N(C(O)OR⁸)R⁴. Insome embodiments, X₁ is CH(R⁷)N(C(O)R⁸)R⁴. In other embodiments, X₁ is—CH(R⁷)N(SO₂R⁸)R⁴. X₁ may also be —CH(R⁷)N(R⁸)R⁴. In other embodiments,X₁ is —CH(R⁷)C(O)N(R⁸)R⁴. In yet other embodiments, X₁ is—CH(R⁷)N(R⁸)C(O)R⁴. Additionally, X₁ is —CH(R⁷)N(R⁸)S(O)R⁴. In someother embodiments, X₁ is —CH(R⁷)N(R⁸)S(O)₂R⁴.

In one embodiment, X₁ is CH.

In various embodiments, X₂ is C—(W¹)_(j)—R⁴. In some embodiments, X₂ isC—R⁴. In some embodiments, X₂ is —OR⁴. In other embodiments, X₂ is—NR⁷R⁴ (including but not limited to —NHR⁴. X₂ is also S(O)₀₋₂R⁴. Inother embodiments, X₂ is —C(O)R⁴. Additionally, X₂ is —C(O)N(R⁷) R⁴. Insome other embodiments, X₂ is N(R⁷)C(O) R⁴. In yet other embodiments, X₂is —N(R⁷)S(O)R⁴. In various embodiments, X₂ is N(R⁷)S(O)₂R⁴. In someembodiments, X₂ is —C(O)OR⁴. Alternatively, X₂ is CH(R⁷)N(C(O)OR⁸)R⁴. Insome embodiments, X₂ is —CH(R⁷)N(C(O)R⁸)R⁴. In other embodiments, X₂ is—CH(R⁷)N(SO₂R⁸)R⁴. X₂ may also be —CH(R⁷)N(R⁸)R⁴. In other embodiments,X₂ is —CH(R⁷)C(O)N(R⁸)R⁴. In yet other embodiments, X₂ is—CH(R⁷)N(R⁸)C(O)R⁴. Additionally, X₂ is —CH(R⁷)N(R⁸)S(O)R⁴. In someother embodiments, X₂ is —CH(R⁷)N(R⁸)S(O)₂R⁴.

In one embodiment, X₂ is CH. In one embodiment, X₂ is CR⁴, wherein R⁴ isalkyl, cycloalkyl or heterocyclyl.

In another embodiment, X₁ is C—NH₂.

In various embodiments, X₁ is C—NH—R⁴, where —NH—R⁴ is:

Additional embodiments of E and E² are found in Table 3.

In another aspect of the invention, a compound of Formula X or apharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof is provided in this invention,wherein

X₁, X₂, R₁E¹, E², j, W¹, W², k, R⁶, R⁷, R⁸, R³¹, R³², R³³, R³⁴ and R³⁵are defined as for Formula I; and

R², R³ and R⁴ are independently hydrogen, halogen, aryl, heteroaryl,C₁₋₄alkyl, C₁₋₁₀alkyl, C₃₋₈cycloalkyl, —C₁₋₁₀alkyl-C₃₋₈cycloalkyl,—C₃₋₈cycloalkyl-C₁₋₁₀alkyl, —C₃₋₈cycloalkyl-C₂₋₁₀alkenyl,—C₃₋₈cycloalkyl-C₂₋₁₀alkynyl, —C₁₋₁₀ alkyl-C₂₋₁₀alkenyl,—C₁₋₁₀alkyl-C₂₋₁₀alkynyl, —C₁₋₁₀alkylaryl, —C₁₋₁₀alkyl heteroaryl,—C₁₋₁₀alkylheterocyclyl, —C₂₋₁₀alkenyl, —C₂₋₁₀alkynyl,—C₂₋₁₀alkenyl-C₁₋₁₀alkyl, —C₂₋₁₀alkynyl-C₁₋₁₀alkyl, —C₂₋₁₀alkenylaryl,—C₂₋₁₀alkenylheteroaryl, —C₂₋₁₀alkenylheteroalkyl,—C₂₋₁₀alkenylheterocyclcyl, —C₂₋₁₀alkenyl-C₃₋₈cycloalkyl,—C₂₋₁₀alkynylaryl, —C₂₋₁₀alkynylheteroaryl, —C₂₋₁₀ alkynylheteroalkyl,—C₂₋₁₀ alkynylheterocylyl, —C₂₋₁₀alkynyl-C₃₋₈cycloalkenyl, —C₁₋₁₀alkoxyC₁₋₁₀alkyl, —C₁₋₁₀alkoxy-C₂₋₁₀alkenyl, —C₁₋₁₀alkoxy-C₂₋₁₀alkynyl,-heterocyclyl-C₁₋₁₀alkyl, -heterocyclyl-C₂₋₁₀alkenyl,-heterocyclyl-C₂₋₁₀alkynyl, -aryl-C₁₋₁₀alkyl, -aryl-C₂₋₁₀alkenyl,-aryl-C₂₋₁₀ alkynyl, -aryl-heterocyclyl, -hetarylC₁₋₁₀alkyl,-heteroaryl-C₂₋₁₀alkenyl, -heteroaryl-C₂₋₁₀alkynyl,-hetarylC₃₋₈cycloalkyl, -heteroaryl heteroalkyl, or-heteroaryl-heterocyclyl, wherein each of said aryl or heteroarylmoieties is unsubstituted or is substituted with one or more independenthalo, —OH, —R³¹, —CF₃, —OCF₃, —OR³¹, —NR³¹R³², —NR³⁴R³⁵, —C(O)R³¹,—CO₂R³¹, —C(═O)NR³¹R³², —C(═O)NNR³⁴R³⁵, —NO₂, —CN, —S(O)₀₋₂R³¹,—SO₂NR³¹R³², —SO₂NR³⁴R³⁵, —NR³¹C(═O)R³², —NR³¹C(═)OR³²,—NR³¹C(═O)NR³²R³³, —NR³¹S(O)₀₋₂R³², —C(═S)OR³¹, —C(═O)SR³¹,—NR³¹C(═NR³²)NR³³R³², —NR³¹C(═NR³²)OR³³, —NR³¹C(═NR³²)SR³³, —OC(═O)OR³³,—OC(═O)NR³¹R³², —OC(═O)SR³¹, —SC(═O)OR³¹, —P(O)OR³¹OR³², or—SC(═O)NR³¹R³² substituents, and wherein each of said alkyl, cycloalkyl,heterocyclyl, or heteroalkyl moieties is unsubstituted or substitutedwith one or more halo, —OH, —R³¹, —CF₃, —OCF₃, —OR³¹, —O-aryl, —NR³¹R³²,—NR³⁴R³⁵, —C(O)R³¹, —CO₂R³¹, —C(═O)NNR³⁴R³⁵, or —C(═O)NR³¹R³²substituents.

In some embodiemnts, for a compound of Formula X, R² is hydrogen orhalogen, such as chloro, bromo, fluoro or iodo. In other embodiments, R²is unsubstituted or substituted aryl (including but not limited tomonocyclic or bicyclic aryl) or unsubstituted or substituted heteroaryl,including but not limited to monocyclic and bicyclic heteroaryl.Monocyclic heteroaryl R² includes but is not limited to pyrrolyl,thienyl, furyl, pyridinyl, pyranyl, imidazolyl, thiazolyl, pyrazolyl,and oxazolyl. Bicyclic heteroaryl R² includes but is not limited tobenzothiophenyl, benzofuryl, indolyl, quinolinyl, isoquinolinyl,benzimidazolyl, benzoxazolyl, benzothiazolyl, quinazolinyl, azaindolyl,pyrazolopyrimidinyl, and purinyl R² is also unsubstituted or substitutedC₁₋₁₀alkyl (including but not limited to CH₃, —CH₂CH₃, n-propyl,isopropyl, n-butyl, tert-butyl, sec-butyl, pentyl, hexyl, and heptyl) orunsubstituted or substituted C₃₋₈cycloalkyl (including but not limitedto cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, and cyclopentyl. In other embodiments, R² is-alkylcycloalkyl, -alkylaryl, -alkyl heteroaryl, or -alkylheterocyclyl.Alkyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, and heteroaryl are as described herein and theheterocyclyl is unsubstituted or substituted (non-limiting examplesinclude pyrrolidinyl, tetrahydrofuranyl, piperidinyl, tetrahydropyranyl,thiazolidinyl, imidazolidinyl, morpholinyl, and piperazinyl) ForR²-alkylcycloalkyl, -alkylaryl, -alkyl heteroaryl, or-alkylheterocyclyl, connection to W² or to the compound of Formula I isthrough the alkyl portion of the moiety. In yet other embodiments, R² isunsubstituted or substituted alkenyl (including but not limited tounsubstituted or substituted C₂-C₁₀ alkenyl such as, for example, vinyl,allyl, 1-methyl propen-1-yl, butenyl, or pentenyl) or unsubstituted orsubstituted alkynyl (including but not limited to unsubstituted orsubstituted C₂-C₁₀alkynyl such as acetylenyl, propargyl, butynyl, orpentynyl). Other compounds are provided by the invention, wherein R² is-alkenylaryl, alkenylheteroaryl, -alkenylheteroalkyl,-alkenylheterocyclcyl or -alkenylcycloalkyl, wherein alkenyl, aryl,heteroaryl, heteroalkyl, heterocyclyl, and cycloalkyl are as describedherein. The R²-alkenylaryl, -alkenylheteroaryl, -alkenylheteroalkyl,-alkenylheterocyclcyl, or -alkenylcycloalkyl moiety is attached to W² orto the compound of Formula I through the alkenyl portion of the moiety.In other embodiments, R² is -alkynylaryl, -alkynyl heteroaryl,-alkynylheteroalkyl, -alkynylheterocylyl, -alkynylcycloalkyl, or-alkynylcycloalkenyl, wherein alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heteroalkyl,heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl are as described herein. A R²-cycloalkenylmoiety is unsubstituted or substituted C₃-C₈cycloalkenyl (including butnot limited to cyclopentenyl and cyclohexenyl). The R²-alkynylaryl,-alkynyl heteroaryl, -alkynylheteroalkyl, -alkynylheterocylyl,-alkynylcycloalkyl, or -alkynylcycloalkenyl is attached to W² or to thecompound of Formula I through the alkynyl portion of the moiety. Somenonlimiting examples include 2-cyclopropylacetylenyl and3-(morpholinyl)proparg-1-yl. Alternatively, R² is-cycloalkyl-heterocyclyl, -cycloalkyl-alkyl, -cycloalkylalkynyl, or-cycloalkylalkenyl, wherein heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, alkyl, alkenyl,and alkynyl are as described herein. The R²-cycloalkyl-heterocyclyl,-cycloalkyl-alkyl, -cycloalkylalkynyl, or -cycloalkylalkenyl is attachedto W² or to the compound of Formula I through the cycloalkyl portion ofthe moiety. In some other embodiments, R² is -alkoxyalkyl,-alkoxyalkenyl, or -alkoxyalkynyl, wherein alkoxy, alkyl, alkenyl, andalkynyl are as described herien. The R² alkoxy alkyl, -alkoxyalkenyl, or-alkoxyalkynyl is attached to W² or to the compound of Formula I throughthe alkoxy portion of the moiety. Alternatively, R² is (unsubstituted orsubstituted heterocyclyl) wherein heterocyclyl includes but is notlimited to azetidinyl, pyrrolidinyl, tetrahydrofuranyl, piperidinyl,tetrahydropyranyl, thiazolidinyl, imidazolidinyl, morpholinyl, andpiperazinyl. Heterocyclyl includes but is not limited to morpholinyl,thiomorpholinyl, azetidinyl, pyrrolidinyl, tetrahydropyranyl,piperazinyl, and 4-NMe-piperazinyl. In some other embodiments, R² is-heterocyclylalkyl, -heterocyclylalkenyl, -heterocyclyl-alkynyl,-heterocyclylcycloalkyl or -heterocyclylheterocylyl whereinheterocyclyl, alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, and alkynyl are as describedherein. The R²-heterocyclylalkyl, -heterocyclylalkenyl,-heterocyclyl-alkynyl, -heterocyclylcycloalkyl or-heterocyclylheterocylyl is connected to W² or to the compound ofFormula I through the heterocylyl portion of the moiety. In yet otherembodiments, R² is -arylalkenyl, -arylalkynyl, or aryl-heterocyclyl,wherein aryl, alkenyl, alkynyl or heterocyclyl is as described herein.The R²-arylalkenyl, -arylalkynyl, or -aryl-heterocyclyl is attached toto W² or to the compound of Formula I through the aryl portion of themoiety. Nonlimiting examples include 4-allylphen-1-yl,2(morpholinyl)phenyl and 4-(piperidinyl)phenyl Alternatively, R² is-heteroaryl-alkyl, -heteroaryl-alkenyl, -heteroaryl-alkynyl,-heteroaryl-cycloalkyl, -heteroaryl-heteroalkyl, or-heteroaryl-heterocyclyl, wherein heteroaryl, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl,cycloalkyl, heteroalkyl, and heterocyclyl are as described herein. TheR²-heteroaryl-alkyl, -heteroaryl-alkenyl, -heteroaryl-alkynyl,-heteroaryl-cycloalkyl, -heteroaryl-heteroalkyl, or-heteroaryl-heterocyclyl is attached to W² or to the compound of FormulaI through the heteroaryl portion of the moiety.

For a compound of Formula X, each aryl or heteroaryl that forms part orall of R² is unsubstituted or is substituted with one or moreindependent halo, —OH, —R³¹, —CF₃, —OCF₃, —OR³¹, —NR³¹R³², —NR³⁴R³⁵,—C(O)R³¹, —CO₂R³¹, —C(═O)NR³¹R³², —C(═O)NNR³⁴R³⁵, —NO₂, —CN,—S(O)₀₋₂R³¹, —SO₂NR³¹R³², —SO₂NR³⁴R³⁵, —NR³¹C(═O)R³², —NR³¹C(═O)OR³²,—NR³¹C(═O)NR³²R³³, —NR³¹S(O)₀₋₂R³², —C(═S)OR³¹, —C(═O)SR³¹,—NR³¹C(═NR³²)NR³³R³², —NR³¹C(═NR³²)OR³³, —NR³¹C(═NR³²)SR³³, —OC(═O)OR³³,—OC(═O)NR³¹R³¹R³², —OC(═O)SR³¹, —SC(═O)OR³¹, —P(O)OR³¹OR³², or—SC(═O)NR³¹R³² substituents.

In some embodiments, each alkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, orheteroalkyl forming all or part of R² is unsubstituted or substitutedwith one or more halo, —OH, —R³¹, —CF₃, —OCF₃, —OR³¹, —O-aryl, —NR³¹R³²,—NR³⁴R³⁵, —C(O)R³¹, —CO₂R³¹, —C(═O)NNR³⁴R³⁵, —C(═O)NR³¹R³², SO₂NR³¹R³²,or —SO₂NR³⁴R³⁵ substituents.

In some embodiments for a compound of Formula X, R³ is hydrogen orhalogen, such as chloro, bromo, fluoro or iodo. In other embodiments, R³is unsubstituted or substituted aryl (including but not limited tomonocyclic or bicyclic aryl) or unsubstituted or substituted heteroaryl,including but not limited to monocyclic and bicyclic heteroaryl.Monocyclic heteroaryl R³ includes but is not limited to pyrrolyl,thienyl, furyl, pyridinyl, pyranyl, imidazolyl, thiazolyl, pyrazolyl,and oxazolyl. Bicyclic heteroaryl R³ includes but is not limited tobenzothiophenyl, benzofuryl, indolyl, quinolinyl, isoquinolinyl,benzimidazolyl, benzoxazolyl, benzothiazolyl, quinazolinyl, azaindolyl,pyrazolopyrimidinyl, and purinyl R² is also unsubstituted or substitutedC₁₋₁₀alkyl (including but not limited to CH₃, —CH₂CH₃, n-propyl,isopropyl, n-butyl, tert-butyl, sec-butyl, pentyl, hexyl, and heptyl) orunsubstituted or substituted C₃₋₈cycloalkyl (including but not limitedto cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, and cyclopentyl. In other embodiments, R³ is-alkylcycloalkyl, -alkylaryl, -alkyl heteroaryl, or -alkylheterocyclyl.Alkyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, and heteroaryl are as described herein and theheterocyclyl is unsubstituted or substituted (non-limiting examplesinclude pyrrolidinyl, tetrahydrofuranyl, piperidinyl, tetrahydropyranyl,thiazolidinyl, imidazolidinyl, morpholinyl, and piperazinyl) ForR³-alkylcycloalkyl, -alkylaryl, -alkyl heteroaryl, or-alkylheterocyclyl, connection to R₁ is through the alkyl portion of themoiety. In yet other embodiments, R³ is unsubstituted or substitutedalkenyl (including but not limited to unsubstituted or substitutedC₂-C₁₀ alkenyl such as, for example, vinyl, allyl, 1-methyl propen-1-yl,butenyl, or pentenyl) or unsubstituted or substituted alkynyl (includingbut not limited to unsubstituted or substituted C₂-C₁₀ alkynyl such asacetylenyl, propargyl, butynyl, or pentynyl).

Other compounds of Formula X are provided by the invention, wherein R³is -alkenylaryl, -alkenylheteroaryl, -alkenylheteroalkyl,-alkenylheterocyclcyl or -alkenylcycloalkyl, wherein alkenyl, aryl,heteroaryl, heteroalkyl, heterocyclyl, and cycloalkyl are as describedherein. The R³-alkenylaryl, -alkenylheteroaryl, -alkenylheteroalkyl,-alkenylheterocyclcyl, or -alkenylcycloalkyl moiety is attached to R₁through the alkenyl portion of the moiety.

In other embodiments, R³ is -alkynylaryl, -alkynyl heteroaryl,-alkynylheteroalkyl, -alkynylheterocylyl, alkynylcycloalkyl, or-alkynylcycloalkenyl, wherein alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heteroalkyl,heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl are as described herein. A R³-cycloalkenylmoiety is unsubstituted or substituted C₃-C₈cycloalkenyl (including butnot limited to cyclopentenyl and cyclohexenyl). The R³-alkynylaryl,-alkynyl heteroaryl, -alkynylheteroalkyl, -alkynylheterocylyl,-alkynylcycloalkyl, or -alkynylcycloalkenyl is attached R₁ through thealkynyl portion of the moiety. Some nonlimiting examples include2-cyclopropylacetylenyl and 3-(morpholinyl)proparg-1-yl. Alternatively,R³ is -cycloalkyl-alkyl, -cycloalkylalkynyl, or -cycloalkylalkenyl,wherein cycloalkyl, alkyl, alkenyl, and alkynyl are as described herein.The R³-cycloalkyl-alkyl, -cycloalkylalkynyl, or -cycloalkylalkenyl isattached to R₁ through the cycloalkyl portion of the moiety. In someother embodiments, R³ is -alkoxy alkyl, -alkoxyalkenyl, or-alkoxyalkynyl, wherein alkoxy, alkyl, alkenyl, and alkynyl are asdescribed herien. The R³-alkoxy alkyl, -alkoxyalkenyl, or -alkoxyalkynylis attached to R₁ through the alkoxy portion of the moiety.Alternatively, R³ is (unsubstituted or substituted heterocyclyl) whereinheterocyclyl includes but is not limited to azetidinyl, pyrrolidinyl,tetrahydrofuranyl, piperidinyl, tetrahydropyranyl, thiazolidinyl,imidazolidinyl, morpholinyl, and piperazinyl. Heterocyclyl includes butis not limited to morpholinyl, thiomorpholinyl, azetidinyl,pyrrolidinyl, tetrahydropyranyl, piperazinyl, and 4-NMe-piperazinyl. Insome other embodiments, R³ is -heterocyclylalkyl, -heterocyclylalkenyl,-heterocyclyl-alkynyl, -heterocyclylcycloalkyl or-heterocyclylheterocylyl wherein heterocyclyl, alkyl, alkenyl,cycloalkyl, and alkynyl are as described herein. TheR³-heterocyclylalkyl, -heterocyclylalkenyl, -heterocyclyl-alkynyl,-heterocyclylcycloalkyl or -heterocyclylheterocylyl is connected to R₁through the heterocylyl portion of the moiety. In yet other embodiments,R³ is -arylalkenyl, -arylalkynyl, or -aryl-heterocyclyl, wherein aryl,alkenyl, alkynyl or heterocyclyl is as described herein. TheR³-arylalkenyl, -arylalkynyl, or -aryl-heterocyclyl is attached to R₁through the aryl portion of the moiety. Nonlimiting examples include4-allylphen-1-yl, 2(morpholinyl)phenyl and 4-(piperidinyl)phenylAlternatively, R³ is -heteroaryl-alkyl, -heteroaryl-alkenyl,-heteroaryl-alkynyl, -heteroaryl-cycloalkyl, -heteroaryl-heteroalkyl, or-heteroaryl-heterocyclyl, wherein heteroaryl, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl,cycloalkyl, heteroalkyl, and heterocyclyl are as described herein. TheR³-heteroaryl-alkyl, -heteroaryl-alkenyl, -heteroaryl-alkynyl,-heteroaryl-cycloalkyl, -heteroaryl-heteroalkyl, or-heteroaryl-heterocyclyl is attached to R₁ through the heteroarylportion of the moiety.

In some embodiments for a compound of Formula X, each aryl or heteroarylthat forms part or all of R³ is unsubstituted or is substituted with oneor more independent halo, —OH, —R³¹, —CF₃, —OCF₃, —OR³¹, —NR³¹R³²,—NR³⁴R³⁵, —C(O)R³¹, —CO₂R³¹, —C(═O)NR³¹R³², —C(═O)NNR³⁴R³⁵, —NO₂, —CN,—S(O)₀₋₂R³¹, —SO₂NR³¹R³², —SO₂NR³⁴R³⁵, —NR³¹C(═O)R³², —NR³¹C(═O)OR³²,—NR³¹C(═O)NR³²R³³, —NR³¹S(O)₀₋₂R³², —C(═S)OR³¹, —C(═O)SR³¹,—NR³¹C(═NR³²)NR³³R³², —NR³¹C(═NR³²)OR³³, —NR³¹C(═NR³²)SR³³, —OC(═O)OR³³,—OC(═O)NR³¹R³², —OC(═O)SR³¹, —SC(═O)OR³¹, —P(O)OR³¹OR³², or—SC(═O)NR³¹R³² substituents.

In other embodiments for a compound of Formula X, each alkyl,cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, or heteroalkyl forming all or part of R³ isunsubstituted or substituted with one or more halo, —OH, —R³¹, —CF₃,—OCF₃, —OR³¹, —O-aryl, —NR³¹R³², —NR³⁴R³⁵, —C(O)R³¹, —CO₂R³¹,—C(═O)NNR³⁴R³⁵, —C(═O)NR³¹R³², SO₂NR³¹R³², or —SO₂NR³⁴R³⁵ substituents.

In some embodiments of a compound of Formula X, R⁴ is hydrogen orhalogen, such as chloro, bromo, fluoro or iodo. In other embodiments, R⁴is unsubstituted or substituted aryl (including but not limited tomonocyclic or bicyclic aryl) or unsubstituted or substituted heteroaryl,including but not limited to monocyclic and bicyclic heteroaryl.Monocyclic heteroaryl R⁴ includes but is not limited to pyrrolyl,thienyl, furyl, pyridinyl, pyranyl, imidazolyl, thiazolyl, pyrazolyl,and oxazolyl. Bicyclic heteroaryl R⁴ includes but is not limited tobenzothiophenyl, benzofuryl, indolyl, quinolinyl, isoquinolinyl,benzimidazolyl, benzoxazolyl, benzothiazolyl, quinazolinyl, azaindolyl,pyrazolopyrimidinyl, and purinyl R⁴ is also unsubstituted or substitutedC₁₋₁₀alkyl (including but not limited to CH₃, —CH₂CH₃, n-propyl,isopropyl, n-butyl, tert-butyl, sec-butyl, pentyl, hexyl, and heptyl) orunsubstituted or substituted C₃₋₈cycloalkyl (including but not limitedto cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, and cyclopentyl. In other embodiments, R⁴ is-alkylcycloalkyl, -alkylaryl, -alkyl heteroaryl, or -alkylheterocyclyl.Alkyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, and heteroaryl are as described herein and theheterocyclyl is unsubstituted or substituted (non-limiting examplesinclude pyrrolidinyl, tetrahydrofuranyl, piperidinyl, tetrahydropyranyl,thiazolidinyl, imidazolidinyl, morpholinyl, and piperazinyl) ForR⁴-alkylcycloalkyl, -alkylaryl, -alkyl heteroaryl, or-alkylheterocyclyl, connection to W¹ or to the compound of Formula I isthrough the alkyl portion of the moiety. In yet other embodiments, R⁴ isunsubstituted or substituted alkenyl (including but not limited tounsubstituted or substituted C₂-C₁₀ alkenyl such as, for example, vinyl,allyl, 1-methyl propen-1-yl, butenyl, or pentenyl) or unsubstituted orsubstituted alkynyl (including but not limited to unsubstituted orsubstituted C₂-C₁₀alkynyl such as acetylenyl, propargyl, butynyl, orpentynyl).

For other Formula X compounds that are provided by the invention,wherein R⁴ is -alkenylaryl, -alkenylheteroaryl, -alkenylheteroalkyl,-alkenylheterocyclcyl or -alkenylcycloalkyl, wherein alkenyl, aryl,heteroaryl, heteroalkyl, heterocyclyl, and cycloalkyl are as describedherein. The R⁴-alkenylaryl, -alkenylheteroaryl, -alkenylheteroalkyl,-alkenylheterocyclcyl, or -alkenylcycloalkyl moiety is attached to W¹ orto the compound of Formula I through the alkenyl portion of the moiety.In other embodiments, R⁴ is -alkynylaryl, -alkynyl heteroaryl,-alkynylheteroalkyl, -alkynylheterocylyl, -alkynylcycloalkyl, or-alkynylcycloalkenyl, wherein alkynyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heteroalkyl,heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl are as described herein. A R⁴-cycloalkenylmoiety is unsubstituted or substituted C₃-C₈cycloalkenyl (including butnot limited to cyclopentenyl and cyclohexenyl). The R⁴ alkynylaryl,-alkynyl heteroaryl, -alkynylheteroalkyl, -alkynylheterocylyl,-alkynylcycloalkyl, or -alkynylcycloalkenyl is attached to W¹ or to thecompound of Formula I through the alkynyl portion of the moiety.

Some nonlimiting examples include 2-cyclopropylacetylenyl and3-(morpholinyl)proparg-1-yl. Alternatively, R⁴ is -cycloalkyl-alkyl,-cycloalkylalkynyl, or -cycloalkylalkenyl, wherein cycloalkyl, alkyl,alkenyl, and alkynyl are as described herein. The R⁴-cycloalkyl-alkyl,-cycloalkylalkynyl, or -cycloalkylalkenyl is attached to W¹ or to thecompound of Formula I through the cycloalkyl portion of the moiety. Insome other embodiments, R⁴ is -alkoxy alkyl, -alkoxyalkenyl, or-alkoxyalkynyl, wherein alkoxy, alkyl, alkenyl, and alkynyl are asdescribed herein. The R⁴-alkoxy alkyl, -alkoxyalkenyl, or -alkoxyalkynylis attached to W¹ or to the compound of Formula I through the alkoxyportion of the moiety. Alternatively, R⁴ is (unsubstituted orsubstituted heterocyclyl) wherein heterocyclyl includes but is notlimited to azetidinyl, pyrrolidinyl, tetrahydrofuranyl, piperidinyl,tetrahydropyranyl, thiazolidinyl, imidazolidinyl, morpholinyl, andpiperazinyl. Heterocyclyl includes but is not limited to morpholinyl,thiomorpholinyl, azetidinyl, pyrrolidinyl, tetrahydropyranyl,piperazinyl, and 4-NMe-piperazinyl. In some other embodiments, R⁴ is-heterocyclylalkyl, -heterocyclylalkenyl, -heterocyclyl-alkynyl,-heterocyclylcycloalkyl or -heterocyclylheterocylyl whereinheterocyclyl, alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, and alkynyl are as describedherein. The R⁴-heterocyclylalkyl, -heterocyclylalkenyl,-heterocyclyl-alkynyl, -heterocyclylcycloalkyl or-heterocyclylheterocylyl is connected to W¹ or to the compound ofFormula I through the heterocylyl portion of the moiety. In yet otherembodiments, R⁴ is -arylalkenyl, -arylalkynyl, or -aryl-heterocyclyl,wherein aryl, alkenyl, alkynyl or heterocyclyl is as described herein.The R⁴-arylalkenyl, -arylalkynyl, or -aryl-heterocyclyl is attached toW¹ or to the compound of Formula I through the aryl portion of themoiety. Nonlimiting examples include 4-allylphen-1-yl,2(morpholinyl)phenyl and 4-(piperidinyl)phenyl Alternatively, R⁴ is-heteroaryl-alkyl, -heteroaryl-alkenyl, -heteroaryl-alkynyl,-heteroaryl-cycloalkyl, -heteroaryl-heteroalkyl, or-heteroaryl-heterocyclyl, wherein heteroaryl, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl,cycloalkyl, heteroalkyl, and heterocyclyl are as described herein. TheR⁴-heteroaryl-alkyl, -heteroaryl-alkenyl, -heteroaryl-alkynyl,-heteroaryl-cycloalkyl, -heteroaryl-heteroalkyl, or-heteroaryl-heterocyclyl is attached to W¹ or to the compound of FormulaI through the heteroaryl portion of the moiety.

In some embodiments, each aryl or heteroaryl that forms part or all ofR⁴ is unsubstituted or is substituted with one or more independent halo,—OH, —R³¹, —CF₃, —OCF₃, —OR³¹, —NR³¹R³², —NR³⁴R³⁵, —C(O)R³¹, —CO₂R³¹,—C(═O)NR³¹R³², —C(═O)NNR³⁴R³⁵, —NO₂, —CN, —S(O)₀₋₂R³¹, —SO₂NR³¹R³²,—SO₂NR³⁴R³⁵, —NR³¹C(═O)R³², —NR³¹C(═O)OR³², —NR³¹C(═O)NR³²R³³,—NR³¹S(O)₀₋₂R³², —C(═S)OR³¹, —C(═O)SR³¹, —NR³¹C(═NR³²)NR³³R³²,—NR³¹C(═NR³²)OR³³, —NR³¹C(═NR³²)SR³³, —OC(═O)OR³³, —OC(═O)NR³¹R³²,—OC(═O)SR³¹, —SC(═O)OR³¹, —P(O)OR³¹OR³², or —SC(═O)NR³¹R³² substituents.

In some embodiments, each alkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, orheteroalkyl forming all or part of R⁴ is unsubstituted or substitutedwith one or more halo, —OH, —R³¹, —CF₃, —OCF₃, —OR³¹, —O-aryl, —NR³¹R³²,—NR³⁴R³⁵, —C(O)R³¹, —CO₂R³¹, —C(═O)NNR³⁴R³⁵, —C(═O)NR³¹R³², SO₂NR³¹R³²,or —SO₂NR³⁴R³⁵ substituents.

In some embodiments of the invention, the compound of Formula X is acompound of Formula XI or XII:

In some embodiments of the invention, the compound of Formula XI orFormula XII is a compound of Formula XI or XII:

In some of the embodiments of the compounds of Formula XI-3 or XII-3,when R⁶ or R² is phenyl, then the phenyl is a substituted phenyl. Inother embodiments, when R⁶ and/or R² is alkyl, then R⁶ and/or R² isunsubstituted or substituted with one or more halo, —OH, —CF₃, —OCF₃,—OR³¹, —O-aryl, —NR³¹R³², —NR³⁴R³⁵, —C(O)R³¹, —CO₂R³¹, —C(═O)NNR³⁴R³⁵,—NO₂, —CN, —S(O)₀₋₂R³¹, —SO₂NR³¹R³², —SO₂NR³⁴R³⁵, —NR³¹C(═O)R³²,—NR³¹C(═O)OR³², —NR³¹C(═O)NR³²R³³, —NR³¹S(O)₀₋₂R³², —(═S)OR³¹,—C(═O)SR³¹, —NR³¹C(═NR³²)NR³³R³², —NR³¹C(═NR³²)OR³³, —NR³¹C(═NR³²)SR³³,—OC(═O)OR³³, —OC(═O)NR³¹R³², —OC(═O)SR³¹, —SC(═O)OR³¹, —P(O)OR³¹OR³², or—SC(═O)NR³¹R³² substituents. In other embodiments, when R⁶ and/or R² isalkyl, then R⁶ and/or R² is substituted by cycloalkyl or heterocyclyl.In other embodiments, R⁶ is hydrogen and R² is unsubstituted alkyl orhydrogen. In some embodiments, R⁶ and R² are hydrogen.

In one aspect, a compound of Formula I or a pharmaceutically acceptablesalt thereof, is provided wherein

M₁ is benzothiazolyl substituted with —(W²)_(k)—R²; k is 0 or 1; R₁ is—H, -L-alkyl, -L-cycloalkyl, -L-alkyl-cycloalkyl, -L-aryl,-L-heteroaryl, -L-alkylaryl, -L-alkylheteroaryl, -L-alkylheterocylyl,-L-alkenyl, -L-alkynyl, -L-alkenyl-cycloalkyl, -L-alkynyl-cycloalkyl, or-L-heterocyclyl, each of which is unsubstituted or substituted by one ormore independent R³ substituents; L is absent, C═O, —C(═O)O—, —C(═O)NR³¹—, —S—, —S(O)—, —S(O)₂—, —S(O)₂NR³¹—, or —NR³¹—; X₁ is N or C-E¹ andX₂ is N; or X₁ is NH or CH-E¹ and X₂ is C; E¹ and E² are independently—(W¹)_(j)—R⁴; j, in each instance, is 0 or 1; W¹ is —O—, —NR⁶—,—S(O)₀₋₂—, —C(O)—, —C(O)N(R⁶)—, —N(R⁶)C(O)—, —N(R⁶)S(O)—, —N(R⁶)S(O)₂—,—C(O)O—, —CH(R⁶)N(C(O)OR⁷)—, —CH(R⁷)N(C(O)R⁷)—, —CH(R⁶)N(SO₂R⁷)—,—CH(R⁶)N(R⁷)—, —CH(R⁶)C(O)N(R⁷)—, —CH(R⁶)N(R⁷)C(O)—, —CH(R⁶)N(R⁷)S(O)—,or —CH(R⁶)N(R⁷)S(O)₂—; W² is —O—, —NR⁶—, —S(O)₀₋₂—, —C(O)—, —C(O)N(R⁶)—,—N(R⁶)C(O)—, —N(R⁶)S(O)—, —N(R⁶)S(O)₂—, —C(O)O—, —CH(R⁶)N(C(O)OR⁷)—,—CH(R⁷)N(C(O)R⁷)—, —CH(R⁶)N(SO₂R⁷)—, —CH(R⁶)N(R⁷)—, —CH(R⁶)C(O)N(R⁷)—,—CH(R⁶)N(R⁷)C(O)—, —CH(R⁶)N(R⁷)S(O)—, or —CH(R⁶)N(R⁷)S(O)₂—; R³ and R⁴are independently hydrogen, halogen, aryl, heteroaryl, alkyl,cycloalkyl, -alkyl-cycloalkyl, -alkylheterocyclyl, C₂₋₁₀alkenyl, orC₂₋₁₀alkynyl; R² is hydrogen, bicyclic aryl, substituted monocyclicaryl, hetaryl, alkyl, cycloalkyl, -alkyl-cycloalkyl, -alkyl-monocyclicaryl, -alkylbicycloaryl, -alkylhetaryl, -alkylheterocyclyl, alkenyl, oralkynyl; R⁶ and R⁷ are each independently hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl,aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl or cycloalkyl, wherein each alkyl,alkenyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl or cycloalkyl is unsubstitutedor substituted by one or more independent R⁸ substituents; and R⁸ ishalo, —OR³¹, —SH, NH₂, —NR³⁴R³⁵, —NR³¹R³², —CO₂R³¹,—CO₂aryl-C(═O)NR³¹R³², —C(═O) NR³⁴R³⁵, —NO₂, —CN, —S(O)₀₋₂alkyl,—S(O)₀₋₂aryl, —SO₂NR³⁴R³⁵, —SO₂NR³¹R³², alkyl, alkenyl, or alkynyl; R³¹,R³², and R³³, in each instance, are independently H or alkyl; and R³⁴and R³⁵ are taken together with the nitrogen atom to which they areattached to form a 3-10 membered ring.

In some embodiments, the compound is a compound wherein E² is —H. Insome embodiments, wherein E² is —H, L is optionally —N(R³¹)C(O)—. Inother embodiments, wherein E² is —H, R³ and R⁴ are optionally alkoxy,heterocyclyl, —OH, —R³¹, —CF₃, —OCF₃, —OR³¹, —NR³¹R³², —NR³⁴R³⁵,—C(O)R³¹, —CO₂R³¹, —C(═O)NR³¹R³², —C(═O)NNR³⁴R³⁵, —NO₂, —CN,—S(O)₀₋₂R³¹, —SO₂NR³¹R³², —SO₂NR³⁴R³⁵, —NR³¹C(═O)R³², —NR³¹C(═O)OR³²,—NR³¹C(═O)NR³²R³³, —NR³¹S(O)₀₋₂R³², —C(═S)OR³¹, —C(═O)SR³¹,—NR³¹C(═NR³²)NR³³R³², —NR³¹C(═NR³²)OR³³, —NR³¹C(═NR³²)SR³³, —OC(═O)OR³³,—OC(═O)NR³¹R³², —OC(═O)SR³¹, —SC(═O)OR³¹, —P(O)OR³¹OR³², or—SC(═O)NR³¹R³².

In yet other embodiments, wherein E² is —H, R² isoptionally-alkyl-substituted monocyclic aryl, heterocyclyl,-cycloalkyl-heterocyclyl, or -heterocyclyl-heterocyclyl. In furtherembodiments, wherein E² is —H, W² is optionally —N(R⁶)C(O)N(R⁷)—,—CH(R⁷)C(O)—, or —NR³⁴R³⁵.

In a second aspect of the invention, a compound having a structure ofFormula I, Formula II, Formula III, Formula IV, or Formula V, or apharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, shown below:

k is 0 or 1; R₁ is —H, -L-alkyl, -L-cycloalkyl, -L-alkyl-cycloalkyl,-L-aryl, -L-heteroaryl, -L-alkylaryl, -L-alkylheteroaryl,-L-alkylheterocylyl, -L-alkenyl, -L-alkynyl, -L-alkenyl-cycloalkyl,-L-alkynyl-cycloalkyl, or -L-heterocyclyl, each of which isunsubstituted or substituted by one or more independent R³ substituents;L is absent, C═O, —C(═O)O—, —C(═O) NR³¹—, —S—, —S(O)—, —S(O)₂—,—S(O)₂NR³¹—, or —NR³¹; W² is —O—, —NR⁶—, —S(O)₀₋₂—, —C(O)—, —C(O)N(R⁶)—,—N(R⁶)C(O)—, —N(R⁶)S(O)—, —N(R⁶)S(O)₂—, —C(O)O—, —CH(R⁶)N(C(O)OR⁷)—,—CH(R⁷)N(C(O)R⁷)—, —CH(R⁶)N(SO₂R⁷)—, —CH(R⁶)N(R⁷)—, —CH(R⁶)C(O)N(R⁷)—,—CH(R⁶)N(R⁷)C(O)—, —CH(R⁶)N(R⁷)S(O)—, or CH(R⁶)N(R⁷)S(O)₂—; R³ and R⁴are independently hydrogen, halogen, aryl, heteroaryl, alkyl,cycloalkyl, -alkyl-cycloalkyl, -alkylheterocyclyl, C₂₋₁₀alkenyl, orC₂₋₁₀alkynyl; R² is hydrogen, bicyclic aryl, substituted monocyclicaryl, hetaryl, alkyl, cycloalkyl, -alkyl-cycloalkyl, -alkyl-monocyclicaryl, -alkylbicycloaryl, -alkylhetaryl, -alkylheterocyclyl, alkenyl, oralkynyl; R⁶ and R⁷ are each independently hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl,aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl or cycloalkyl, wherein each alkyl,alkenyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl or cycloalkyl is unsubstitutedor substituted by one or more independent R⁸ substituents; and R⁸ ishalo, —OR³¹, —SH, —NH₂, —NR³⁴R³⁵, —NR³¹R³², —CO₂R³¹,—CO₂aryl-C(═O)NR³¹R³², C(═O) NR³⁴R³⁵, —NO₂, —CN, —S(O)₀₋₂ alkyl,—S(O)₂aryl, —SO₂NR³⁴R³⁵, —SO₂NR³¹R³², alkyl, alkenyl, or alkynyl; R³¹,R³², and R³³, in each instance, are independently H or alkyl; and R³⁴and R³⁵ are taken together with the nitrogen atom to which they areattached to form a 3-10 membered ring.

In some embodiments, the compound of Formula II, Formula III, FormulaIV, or Formula V, is a compound L is optionally —N(R³¹)C(O)—. In otherembodiments, R³ and R⁴ are optionally alkoxy, heterocyclyl, —OH, —R³¹,—CF₃, —OCF₃, —OR³¹, —NR³¹R³², —NR³⁴R³⁵, —C(O)R³¹, —CO₂R³¹,—C(═O)NR³¹R³², —C(═O)NNR³⁴R³⁵, —NO₂, —CN, —S(O)₀₋₂R³¹, —SO₂NR³¹R³²,—SO₂NR³⁴R³⁵, —NR³¹C(═O)R³², —NR³¹C(═O)OR³², —NR³¹C(═O)NR³²R³³,—NR³¹S(O)₀₋₂R³², —C(═S)OR³¹, —C(═O)SR³¹, —NR³¹C(═NR³²)NR³³R³²,—NR³¹C(═NR³²)OR³³, —NR³¹C(═NR³²)SR³³, —OC(═O)OR³³, —OC(═O)NR³¹R³²,—OC(═O)SR³¹, —SC(═O)OR³¹, —P(O)OR³¹OR³², or —SC(═O)NR³¹R³¹R³².

In yet other embodiments, R² is optionally-alkyl-substituted monocyclicaryl, heterocyclyl, -cycloalkyl-heterocyclyl, or-heterocyclyl-heterocyclyl. In further embodiments, W² is optionally—N(R⁶)C(O)N(R⁷)—, CH(R⁷)C(O)—, or —NR³⁴R³⁵.

In a third aspect of the invention, a compound of Formula II, FormulaIII, Formula IV, or Formula V, or a pharmaceutically acceptable saltthereof, is provided wherein W² is —NR⁶—, —N(R⁶)C(O)—, —N(R⁶)S(O)—, or—N(R⁶)S(O)₂.

In a fourth aspect of the invention, a compound of Formula X, or apharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, is provided wherein:

k, in each instance, is 0 or 1; R₁ is —H, -L-alkyl, -L-cycloalkyl,-L-alkyl-cycloalkyl, -L-aryl, -L-heteroaryl, -L-alkylaryl,-L-alkylheteroaryl, -L-alkylheterocylyl, -L-alkenyl, -L-alkynyl,-L-alkenyl-cycloalkyl, -L-alkynyl-cycloalkyl, or -L-heterocyclyl, eachof which is unsubstituted or substituted by one or more independent R³substituents; L is absent, C═O, —C(═O)O—, —C(═O) NR³¹—, —S—, —S(O)—,—S(O)₂—, —S(O)₂NR³¹—, or —NR³¹—; X₁ is N or C-E¹ and X₂ is N; or X₁ isNH or CH-E¹ and X₂ is C; E¹ and E² are independently —(W¹)_(j)—R⁴; j, ineach instance, is 0 or 1; W¹ is —O—, —NR⁶—, —S(O)₀₋₂—, —C(O)—,—C(O)N(R⁶)—, —N(R⁶)C(O)—, —N(R⁶)S(O)—, —N(R⁶)S(O)₂—, —C(O)O—,—CH(R⁶)N(C(O)OR⁷)—, —CH(R⁷)N(C(O)R⁷)—, —CH(R⁶)N(SO₂R⁷)—, —CH(R⁶)N(R⁷)—,—CH(R⁶)C(O)N(R⁷)—, —CH(R⁶)N(R⁷)C(O)—, —CH(R⁶)N(R⁷)S(O)—, or—CH(R⁶)N(R⁶)S(O)₂—; W² is —O—, —NR⁶—, —S(O)₀₋₂—, —C(O)—, —C(O)N(R⁶)—,—N(R⁶)C(O)—, —N(R⁶)S(O)—, —N(R⁶)S(O)₂—, —C(O)O—, —CH(R⁶)N(C(O)OR⁷)—,—CH(R⁷)N(C(O)R⁷)—, —CH(R⁶)N(SO₂R⁷)—, —CH(R⁶)N(R⁷)—, —CH(R⁶)C(O)N(R⁷)—,—CH(R⁶)N(R⁷)C(O)—, —CH(R⁶)N(R⁷)S(O)—, or —CH(R⁶)N(R⁷)S(O)₂—; R², R³, andR⁴ are independently hydrogen, halogen, aryl, heteroaryl, alkyl,cycloalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, heterocyclyl, alkyl-aryl,-alkyl-cycloalkyl, -alkylheterocyclyl, or -alkynyl-cycloalkyl; R⁶ and R⁷are each independently hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, aryl, heteroaryl,heterocyclyl or cycloalkyl, wherein each alkyl, alkenyl, aryl,heteroaryl, heterocyclyl or cycloalkyl is unsubstituted or substitutedby one or more independent R⁸ substituents; R⁸ is halo, —OR³¹, —SH, NH₂,—NR³⁴R³⁵, —NR³¹R³², —CO₂R³¹, CO₂aryl-C(═O)NR³¹R³², C(═O) NR³⁴R³⁵, —NO₂,—CN, —S(O)₀₋₂ alkyl, —S(O)₀₋₂aryl, —SO₂NR³⁴R³⁵, —SO₂NR³¹R³², alkyl,alkenyl, or alkynyl; R³¹, R³², and R³³, in each instance, areindependently H or alkyl; and R³⁴ and R³⁵ are taken together with thenitrogen atom to which they are attached to form a 3-10 membered ring.

In some embodiments of the compound of Formula X, E² is —H. In someembodiments wherein E² is —H, L is optionally —N(R³¹)C(O)—. In otherembodiments wherein E² is —H, R³ and R⁴ are optionally alkoxy, —OH,—R³¹, CF₃, —OCF₃, —OR³¹, —NR³¹R³², —NR³⁴R³⁵, —C(O)R³¹, —CO₂R³¹,—C(═O)NR³¹R³², —C(═O)NNR³⁴R³⁵, —NO₂, —CN, —S(O)₀₋₂R³¹, —SO₂NR³¹R³²,—SO₂NR³⁴R³, —NR³¹C(═O)R³², —NR³¹C(═O)OR³², —NR³¹C(═O)NR³²R³³,—NR³¹S(O)₀₋₂R³², —C(═S)OR³¹, —C(═O)SR³¹, —NR³¹C(═NR³²)NR³³R³²,—NR³¹C(═NR³²)OR³³, —NR³¹C(═NR³²)SR³³, —OC(═O)OR³³, —OC(═O)NR³¹R³²,—OC(═O)SR³¹, —SC(═O)OR³¹, —P(O)OR³¹OR³², or —SC(═O)NR³¹R³². In someother embodiments wherein E² is —H, R² is optionally-cycloalkyl-heterocyclyl, or -heterocyclyl-heterocyclyl. Alternatively,wherein E² is —H, W² is optionally —N(R⁶)C(O)N(R⁷)—, —CH(R⁷)C(O)—, or—NR³⁴R³⁵.

In a fifth aspect of the invention, a compound of Formula XI or FormulaXII, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, is provided wherein:

k, in each instance, is 0 or 1; R₁ is H, L-alkyl, -L-cycloalkyl,-L-alkyl-cycloalkyl, -L-aryl, -L-heteroaryl, -L-alkylaryl,-L-alkylheteroaryl, -L-alkylheterocylyl, -L-alkenyl, -L-alkynyl,-L-alkenyl-cycloalkyl, -L-alkynyl-cycloalkyl, or -L-heterocyclyl, eachof which is unsubstituted or substituted by one or more independent R³substituents; L is absent, C═O, —C(═O)O—, —C(═O) NR³¹—, —S—, —S(O)—,—S(O)₂—, —S(O)₂NR³¹—, or —NR³¹—; W² is —O—, —NR⁶—, —S(O)₀₋₂—, —C(O)—,—C(O)N(R⁶)—, —N(R⁶)C(O)—, —N(R⁶)S(O)—, —N(R⁶)S(O)₂—, —C(O)O—,—CH(R⁶)N(C(O)OR⁷)—, —CH(R⁷)N(C(O)R⁷)—, —CH(R⁶)N(SO₂R⁷)—, —CH(R⁶)N(R⁷)—,—CH(R⁶)C(O)N(R⁷)—, —CH(R⁶)N(R⁷)C(O)—, —CH(R⁶)N(R⁷)S(O)—, or—CH(R⁶)N(R⁷)S(O)₂—; R², R³, and R⁴ are independently hydrogen, halogen,aryl, heteroaryl, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl,heterocyclyl, alkyl-aryl, -alkyl-cycloalkyl, -alkylheterocyclyl, oralkynyl-cycloalkyl; R⁶ and R⁷ are each independently hydrogen, alkyl,alkenyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl or cycloalkyl, wherein eachalkyl, alkenyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl or cycloalkyl isunsubstituted or substituted by one or more independent R⁸ substituents;R⁸ is halo, —OR³¹, —SH, —NH₂, —NR³⁴R³⁵, —NR³¹R³², —CO₂R³¹,—CO₂aryl-C(═O)NR³¹R³², C(═O) NR³⁴R³⁵, —NO₂, —CN, —S(O)₀₋₂ alkyl,S(O)₀₋₂aryl, SO₂NR³⁴R³⁵, —SO₂NR³¹R³², alkyl, alkenyl, or alkynyl; R³¹,R³², and R³³, in each instance, are independently H or alkyl; and R³⁴and R³⁵ are taken together with the nitrogen atom to which they areattached to form a 3-10 membered ring.

In some embodiments of the compound of Formula XI or XII, L isoptionally N(R³¹)C(O). In other embodiments, R³ and R⁴ are optionallyalkoxy, —OH, R³¹, —CF₃, —OCF₃, —OR³¹, NR³¹R³², NR³⁴R³⁵, —C(O)R³¹,—CO₂R³¹, —C(═O)NR³¹R³², —C(═O)NNR³⁴R³⁵, —NO₂, —CN, —S(O)₀₋₂R³¹,—SO₂NR³¹R³², —SO₂NR³⁴R³⁵, —NR³¹C(═O)R³², —NR³¹C(═O)OR³²,—NR³¹C(═O)NR³²R³³, —NR³¹S(O)₀₋₂R³², C(═S)OR³¹, C(═O)SR³¹,—NR³¹C(═NR³²)NR³³R³², —NR³¹C(═NR³²)OR³³, —NR³¹C(═NR³²)SR³³, —OC(═O)OR³³,—OC(═O)NR³¹R³¹R³², —OC(═O)SR³¹, —SC(═O)OR³¹, —P(O)OR³¹OR³², or—SC(═O)NR³¹R³². In some other embodiments, R² is optionally-cycloalkyl-heterocyclyl, or heterocyclyl-heterocyclyl. Alternatively,W² is optionally N(R⁶)C(O)N(R⁷)—, CH(R⁷)C(O)—, or NR³⁴R³⁵.

Some illustrative compounds of the invention are described in thefollowing tables. The compounds of the invention are not limited in anyway to the compounds illustrated herein.

Some exemplary non-limiting compounds of the present invention having astructure of Formula A, Formula B, Formula C, or Formula D include thosein which R₁ is selected from any R₁ moiety described in Table 1, and incombination with any (W²)_(k)—R² as described in Table 2. A compound ofFormula A, Formula B, Formula C, or Formula D includes any combinationof R₁ and (W²)_(k)—R². Additional exemplary compounds of Formula A,Formula B, Formula C, or Formula D are illustrated in Table 5.

TABLE 1 Illustrative R₁ moieties of the compounds of Formula I. Subclass# R₁ R1-1  H iso-propyl R1-2  Me n-propyl R1-3  Et iso-butyl R1-4 

R1-5 

R1-6 

R1-7 

R1-8 

R1-9 

R1-10

R1-11

R1-12

R1-13

R1-14

R1-15

R1-16

R1-17

R1-18

R1-19

R1-20

R1-21

R1-22

R1-23

R1-24

R1-25

R1-26

R1-27

R1-28

R1-29

R1-30

R1-31

R1-32

R1-33

R1-34

R1-35

R1-36

R1-37

R1-38

R1-39

R1-40

R1-41

R1-42

R1-43

R1-44

R1-45

R1-46

TABLE 2 Illustrative (W²)_(k)—R² moieties of the compounds of Formula I.Subclass # (W²)_(k)—R² W-1  —H W-2  —NH₂ W-3  —NHMe W-4  —N(Me)₂ W-5 —N(iso-propyl)₂ W-6  —N(Et)₂ W-7  —N(n-propyl)₂ W-8  —N(n-butyl)₂ W-9 —N(isobutyl)₂ W-10 —NH(cyclopropyl) W-11 —NH(cyclobutyl) W-12—NH(cyclopentyl) W-13 —NH(CH₂cyclopentyl) W-14 —NH(CH₂cyclo-propyl) W-15—NH(CH₂cyclobutyl W-16 —NH(CH₂cyclohexyl) W-17 —NHCH₂CH₂OH W-18

W-19

W-20

W-21

W-22

W-23 —NHC(O)Me W-24 —NHC(O)Et W-25 —NHC(O)isopropyl W-26 —NHC(O)isobutylW-27

W-28 —NHC(O)CH₂-cyclopropyl W-29 —NHC(O)CH₂-cyclobutyl W-30—NHC(O)CH₂-cyclopentyl W-31 —NHC(O)CH₂-morpholinyl W-32—NHC(O)CH₂-(4-NMe)-piperazinyl W-33 —NHC(O)CH₂-(4-NSO₂Me)-piperazinylW-34 —NHSO₂Me W-35 —NHSO₂Ph W-36

W-37

W-38

W-39

W-40

W-41

W-42

W-43

W-44

W-45

W-46

W-47

W-48

W-49

W-50

W-51

Additional exemplary non-limiting compounds of the present inventionhaving a structure of Formula E, Formula F, Formula G, or Formula Hinclude those in which R₁ is selected from any R₁ moiety described inTable 1, in combination with any (W²)_(k)—R² as described in Table 2,and in combination with E¹ and/or E², wherein E¹ and E² are selectedindependently from any E moiety as described in Table 3. A compound ofFormula E, Formula F, Formula G, or Formula H includes any combinationof R₁, E¹ and/or E², and (W²)_(k)—R².

TABLE 3 Illustrative E moieties of the compounds of Formula I. Subclass# E E-1 H E-2 Me E--3 Et E--4

E--5

E--6

E--7

E--8

E--9

E--10 iso-propyl E--11 n-propyl E--12 iso-butyl E-13 —F E--14 —CN E--15—CF₃ E--16 —OMe E--17 —NHMe E--18 —NHEt E--19

E-20

E--21

E-22

E-23

E-24

E-25

E-26

E-27

E-28

E-29

E-30

E-31

E-32

E-33

E-34

E-35

E-36

E-37

E-38

E-39

E-40

E-41

E-42

E-43

E-44

E-45

E-46

E-47

E-48

E-49

E-50

E-51

E-52

E-53

E-54

E-55

E-56

E-57

E-58

E-59

E-60

E-61

E-62

E-63

E-64

E-65

E-66

E-67

E-68

E-69

E-70

E-71

E-72

E-73

E-74

E-75

E-76

E-77

E-78

E-79

E-80

E-81

E-82

E-83

E-84

E-85

E-86

In some embodiments, one or more subject compounds bind specifically toa PI3 kinase or a protein kinase selected from the group consisting ofmTor, DNA-dependent protein kinase DNA-dependent protein kinase (Pubmedprotein accession number (PPAN) AAA79184), Abl tyrosine kinase(CAA52387), Bcr-Abl, hemopoietic cell kinase (PPAN CAI19695), Src (PPANCAA24495), vascular endothelial growth factor receptor 2 (PPANABB82619), vascular endothelial growth factor receptor-2 (PPANABB82619), epidermal growth factor receptor (PPAN AG43241), EPH receptorB4 (PPAN EAL23820), stem cell factor receptor (PPAN AAF22141),Tyrosine-protein kinase receptor TIE-2 (PPAN Q02858), fms-relatedtyrosine kinase 3 (PPAN NP_004110), platelet-derived growth factorreceptor alpha (PPAN NP_990080), RET (PPAN CAA73131), and any otherprotein kinases listed in the appended tables and figures, as well asany functional mutants thereof. In some embodiments, the IC50 of asubject compound for p110α, p110β, p110γ, or p110δ is less than about 1uM, less than about 100 nM, less than about 50 nM, less than about 10nM, less than 1 nM or even less than about 0.5 nM. In some embodiments,the IC50 of a subject compound for mTor is less than about 1 uM, lessthan about 100 nM, less than about 50 nM, less than about 10 nM, lessthan 1 nM, less than about 0.5 nM, or even less than about 0.1 nM. Insome other embodiments, one or more subject compounds exhibit dualbinding specificity and are capable of inhibiting a PI3 kinase (e.g., aclass I PI3 kinease) as well as a protein kinase (e.g., mTor) with anIC50 value less than about 1 uM, less than about 100 nM, less than about50 nM, less than about 10 nM, less than 1 nM or even less than about 0.5nM.

In a further embodiment, one or more subject compounds exhibitsselective inhibition of mTor relative to one or more type I PI3Ksselected from the group consisting of p110α, p110β, p110γ, or p110δ. Forinstance, one or more mTor selective inhibitors of the present inventionexhibits an IC50 value against mTor that is about 1, 2, 3, 5, 10, 100,or 1000 fold smaller than the IC50 value against one or more type IPI3Ks. In some embodiments, the subject inhibitors are selective formTor, p110α, p110γ, and/or p110δ but not with respect to p110β. In otherembodiments, the subject inhibitors are selective for mTor, p110β,p110γ, and/or p110δ but not with respect to p110α. In other embodiments,the subject inhibitors are selective for mTor, p110α, p110β, and/orp110δ but not with respect to p110γ. In yet other embodiments, thesubject inhibitors are selective for mTor, p110α, p110β, and/or p110γbut not with respect to p110δ. In still other embodiments, the subjectinhibitors are selective for mTor and p110γ and/or p110δ but not withrespect to p110α and p110β. In some embodiments, the subject inhibitorsare selective for mTor and p110γ, but not with respect to p110α, p110γand p110β. In further embodiments, the subject inhibitors are selectivefor mTor and p110α, but not with respect to p110γ, p110δ and p110β.

In more embodiments, the subject inhibitors are selective for mTor andp110β, but not with respect to p110γ, p110δ and p110α. In moreembodiments, the subject inhibitors are selective for mTor and p110δ,but not with respect to p110β, p110γ and p110α. In more embodiments, thesubject inhibitors are selective for mTor and p110γ, but not withrespect to p110δ, p110β and p110α. In yet another more embodiment, thesubject inhibitors are selective for mTor and p110α, but not withrespect to p110δ, p110β and p110γ.

One or more subject compounds are capable of inhibiting tyrosine kinasesincluding, for example, DNA-dependent protein kinase DNA-dependentprotein kinase (Pubmed protein accession number (PPAN) AAA79184), Abltyrosine kinase (CAA52387), Bcr-Abl, hemopoietic cell kinase (PPANCAI19695), Src (PPAN CAA24495), vascular endothelial growth factorreceptor 2 (PPAN ABB82619), vascular endothelial growth factorreceptor-2 (PPAN ABB82619), epidermal growth factor receptor (PPANAG43241), EPH receptor B4 (PPAN EAL23820), stem cell factor receptor(PPAN AAF22141), Tyrosine-protein kinase receptor TIE-2 (PPAN Q02858),fms-related tyrosine kinase 3 (PPAN NP_004110), platelet-derived growthfactor receptor alpha (PPAN NP_990080), RET (PPAN CAA73131), andfunctional mutants thereof. In some embodiments, the tyrosine kinase isAbl, Bcr-Abl, EGFR, or Flt-3, and any other kinases listed in the Tablesherein.

The compounds of the invention can generally be synthesized by anappropriate combination of generally well known synthetic methods andthe methods disclosed herein. Techniques useful in synthesizing thesechemical entities are both readily apparent and accessible to those ofskill in the relevant art, based on the instant disclosure.

Many of the optionally substituted starting compounds and otherreactants are commercially available, e.g., from Aldrich ChemicalCompany (Milwaukee, Wis.) or can be readily prepared by those skilled inthe art using commonly employed synthetic methodology.

Unless specified to the contrary, the reactions described herein takeplace at atmospheric pressure, generally within a temperature range from−10° C. to 200° C. Further, except as otherwise specified, reactiontimes and conditions are intended to be approximate, e.g., taking placeat about atmospheric pressure within a temperature range of about −10°C. to about 110° C. over a period of about 1 to about 24 hours;reactions left to run overnight average a period of about 16 hours.

The discussion below is offered to illustrate certain of the diversemethods available for use in making the compounds of the invention andis not intended to limit the scope of reactions or reaction sequencesthat can be used in preparing the compounds of the present invention.

In one embodiment, compounds of Formula I are synthesized by condensingaminopyrazolocarbonitrile 101 with formamide, in refluxing excessformamide, to provide a pyrazolopyridine 102. The compound of Formula103 is treated with N-iodosuccinimide, to produce a compound of Formula103. The compound of Formula 103 is reacted with a suitable halogenatedcompound R₁Br in the presence of potassium carbonate indimethylformamide to produce a compound of Formula 104. The compound ofFormula 104 is coupled using suitable heteroaryl boronic acid or borolanreagents, in the presence of a suitable palladium catalyst, such aspalladium acetate, and appropriate base, such as sodium carbonate, toprovide compounds of the general formula 105.

Compounds of the invention having a structure of a pyrrolopyrimidine maybe synthesized by this route. The compound of Formula 201 is treatedwith, for example, N-iodosuccinimide, to produce a compound of Formula202. The compound of Formula 202 is reacted with a suitableorganobromide compound in the presence of a base, such as potassiumcarbonate in dimethylformamide to produce a compound of Formula 204. Thecompound of Formula 204 is treated with ammonia in a sealed tube at hightemperature to produce a compound of Formula 205. The compound ofFormula 205 is coupled with a suitable heteroaromatic boronic acid orborolan of Formula 206, with palladium tetrakistriphenylphosphine, abase, such as sodium carbonate to produce the compound of Formula 207.

Reaction Schemes H, I, and J illustrate methods of synthesis of boranereagents useful in preparing intermediates of use in synthesis of thecompounds of the invention as described in Reaction Schemes 1 and 2above, to introduce benzothiazolyl substituents.

A compound of Formula H-1 is treated with, for example, nitric acid toproduce a compound of Formula H-2. The compound of Formula H-2 istreated with a reducing agent such as stannous chloride to produce acompound of Formula H-3. The compound of H-3 is treated with sodiumnitrate in acid and cupric bromide to produce a compound of Formula H-4.The compound of H-4 is treated a base such as butyl lithium and borontris-isopropoxide to produce a compound of Formula H-5.

A compound of Formula I-1 is treated with, for example, potassiumthiocyanate and bromine in acetic acid to produce a compound of FormulaI-2. The compound of Formula I-2 is treated with an acteylating reagentsuch as acetyl chloride to produce a compound of Formula I-3. Thecompound of I-3 is reacted with, for example, bis(pinacolato)diboron(compound I-4) in the presence of a catalyst such as palladium chlorideto produce a compound of Formula I-5.

The compound of Formula I-2 is reacted with, for example, methylcarbamic acid chloride to produce a compound of Formula J-1. Thecompound of Formula J-1 is reacted with bis(pinacolato)diboron (compoundI-4) in the presence of a catalyst such as Pd₂(dba)₃,2-chlorohexylphosphino-2,4,6-triisopropylbiphenyl, a base such aspotassium acetate, to produce the compound of Formula J-2.

The invention provides pharmaceutical compositions comprising one ormore compounds of the present invention.

In some embodiments, the invention provides pharmaceutical compositionsfor the treatment of disorders such as hyperproliferative disorderincluding but not limited to cancer such as acute myeloid leukemia,thymus, brain, lung, squamous cell, skin, eye, retinoblastoma,intraocular melanoma, oral cavity and oropharyngeal, bladder, gastric,stomach, pancreatic, bladder, breast, cervical, head, neck, renal,kidney, liver, ovarian, prostate, colorectal, esophageal, testicular,gynecological, thyroid, CNS, PNS, AIDS related AIDS-Related (e.g.Lymphoma and Kaposi's Sarcoma) or Viral-Induced cancer. In someembodiments, said pharmaceutical composition is for the treatment of anon-cancerous hyperproliferative disorder such as benign hyperplasia ofthe skin (e.g., psoriasis), restenosis, or prostate (e.g., benignprostatic hypertrophy (BPH)).

In some embodiments, the invention provides pharmaceutical compositionsfor treating diseases or conditions related to an undesirable,over-active, harmful or deleterious immune response in a mammal. Suchundesirable immune response can be associated with or result in, e.g.,asthma, emphysema, bronchitis, psoriasis, allergy, anaphylaxsis,auto-immune diseases, rhuematoid arthritis, graft versus host disease,and lupus erythematosus. The pharmaceutical compositions of the presentinvention can be used to treat other respiratory diseases including butnot limited to diseases affecting the lobes of lung, pleural cavity,bronchial tubes, trachea, upper respiratory tract, or the nerves andmuscle for breathing.

The invention also provides compositions for the treatment of liverdiseases (including diabetes), pancreatitis or kidney disease (includingproliferative glomerulonephritis and diabetes-induced renal disease) orpain in a mammal.

The invention further provides a composition for the prevention ofblastocyte implantation in a mammal.

The invention also relates to a composition for treating a diseaserelated to vasculogenesis or angiogenesis in a mammal which can manifestas tumor angiogenesis, chronic inflammatory disease such as rheumatoidarthritis, inflammatory bowel disease, atherosclerosis, skin diseasessuch as psoriasis, eczema, and scleroderma, diabetes, diabeticretinopathy, retinopathy of prematurity, age-related maculardegeneration, hemangioma, glioma, melanoma, Kaposi's sarcoma andovarian, breast, lung, pancreatic, prostate, colon and epidermoidcancer.

The subject pharmaceutical compositions are typically formulated toprovide a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of the presentinvention as the active ingredient, or a pharmaceutically acceptablesalt, ester, prodrug, solvate, hydrate or derivative thereof. Wheredesired, the pharmaceutical compositions contain pharmaceuticallyacceptable salt and/or coordination complex thereof, and one or morepharmaceutically acceptable excipients, carriers, including inert soliddiluents and fillers, diluents, including sterile aqueous solution andvarious organic solvents, permeation enhancers, solubilizers andadjuvants.

The subject pharmaceutical compositions can be administered alone or incombination with one or more other agents, which are also typicallyadministered in the form of pharmaceutical compositions. Where desired,the subject compounds and other agent(s) may be mixed into a preparationor both components may be formulated into separate preparations to usethem in combination separately or at the same time.

In some embodiments, the concentration of one or more of the compoundsprovided in the pharmaceutical compositions of the present invention isless than 100%, 90%, 80%, 70%, 60%, 50%, 40%, 30%, 20%, 19%, 18%, 17%,16%, 15%, 14%, 13%, 12%, 11%, 10%, 9%, 8%, 7%, 6%, 5%, 4%, 3%, 2%, 1%,0.5%, 0.4%, 0.3%, 0.2%, 0.1%, 0.09%, 0.08%, 0.07%, 0.06%, 0.05%, 0.04%,0.03%, 0.02%, 0.01%, 0.009%, 0.008%, 0.007%, 0.006%, 0.005%, 0.004%,0.003%, 0.002%, 0.001%, 0.0009%, 0.0008%, 0.0007%, 0.0006%, 0.0005%,0.0004%, 0.0003%, 0.0002%, or 0.0001% w/w, w/v or v/v.

In some embodiments, the concentration of one or more of the compoundsof the present invention is greater than 90%, 80%, 70%, 60%, 50%, 40%,30%, 20%, 19.75%, 19.50%, 19.25% 19%, 18.75%, 18.50%, 18.25% 18%,17.75%, 17.50%, 17.25% 17%, 16.75%, 16.50%, 16.25% 16%, 15.75%, 15.50%,15.25% 15%, 14.75%, 14.50%, 14.25% 14%, 13.75%, 13.50%, 13.25% 13%,12.75%, 12.50%, 12.25% 12%, 11.75%, 11.50%, 11.25% 11%, 10.75%, 10.50%,10.25% 10%, 9.75%, 9.50%, 9.25% 9%, 8.75%, 8.50%, 8.25% 8%, 7.75%,7.50%, 7.25% 7%, 6.75%, 6.50%, 6.25% 6%, 5.75%, 5.50%, 5.25% 5%, 4.75%,4.50%, 4.25%, 4%, 3.75%, 3.50%, 3.25%, 3%, 2.75%, 2.50%, 2.25%, 2%,1.75%, 1.50%, 125%, 1%, 0.5%, 0.4%, 0.3%, 0.2%, 0.1%, 0.09%, 0.08%,0.07%, 0.06%, 0.05%, 0.04%, 0.03%, 0.02%, 0.01%, 0.009%, 0.008%, 0.007%,0.006%, 0.005%, 0.004%, 0.003%, 0.002%, 0.001%, 0.0009%, 0.0008%,0.0007%, 0.0006%, 0.0005%, 0.0004%, 0.0003%, 0.0002%, or 0.0001% w/w,w/v, or v/v.

In some embodiments, the concentration of one or more of the compoundsof the present invention is in the range from approximately 0.0001% toapproximately 50%, approximately 0.001% to approximately 40%,approximately 0.01% to approximately 30%, approximately 0.02% toapproximately 29%, approximately 0.03% to approximately 28%,approximately 0.04% to approximately 27%, approximately 0.05% toapproximately 26%, approximately 0.06% to approximately 25%,approximately 0.07% to approximately 24%, approximately 0.08% toapproximately 23%, approximately 0.09% to approximately 22%,approximately 0.1% to approximately 21%, approximately 0.2% toapproximately 20%, approximately 0.3% to approximately 19%,approximately 0.4% to approximately 18%, approximately 0.5% toapproximately 17%, approximately 0.6% to approximately 16%,approximately 0.7% to approximately 15%, approximately 0.8% toapproximately 14%, approximately 0.9% to approximately 12%,approximately 1% to approximately 10% w/w, w/v or v/v. v/v.

In some embodiments, the concentration of one or more of the compoundsof the present invention is in the range from approximately 0.001% toapproximately 10%, approximately 0.01% to approximately 5%,approximately 0.02% to approximately 4.5%, approximately 0.03% toapproximately 4%, approximately 0.04% to approximately 3.5%,approximately 0.05% to approximately 3%, approximately 0.06% toapproximately 2.5%, approximately 0.07% to approximately 2%,approximately 0.08% to approximately 1.5%, approximately 0.09% toapproximately 1%, approximately 0.1% to approximately 0.9% w/w, w/v orv/v.

In some embodiments, the amount of one or more of the compounds of thepresent invention is equal to or less than 10 g, 9.5 g, 9.0 g, 8.5 g,8.0 g, 7.5 g, 7.0 g, 6.5 g, 6.0 g, 5.5 g, 5.0 g, 4.5 g, 4.0 g, 3.5 g,3.0 g, 2.5 g, 2.0 g, 1.5 g, 1.0 g, 0.95 g, 0.9 g, 0.85 g, 0.8 g, 0.75 g,0.7 g, 0.65 g, 0.6 g, 0.55 g, 0.5 g, 0.45 g, 0.4 g, 0.35 g, 0.3 g, 0.25g, 0.2 g, 0.15 g, 0.1 g, 0.09 g, 0.08 g, 0.07 g, 0.06 g, 0.05 g, 0.04 g,0.03 g, 0.02 g, 0.01 g, 0.009 g, 0.008 g, 0.007 g, 0.006 g, 0.005 g,0.004 g, 0.003 g, 0.002 g, 0.001 g, 0.0009 g, 0.0008 g, 0.0007 g, 0.0006g, 0.0005 g, 0.0004 g, 0.0003 g, 0.0002 g, or 0.0001 g.

In some embodiments, the amount of one or more of the compounds of thepresent invention is more than 0.0001 g, 0.0002 g, 0.0003 g, 0.0004 g,0.0005 g, 0.0006 g, 0.0007 g, 0.0008 g, 0.0009 g, 0.001 g, 0.0015 g,0.002 g, 0.0025 g, 0.003 g, 0.0035 g, 0.004 g, 0.0045 g, 0.005 g, 0.0055g, 0.006 g, 0.0065 g, 0.007 g, 0.0075 g, 0.008 g, 0.0085 g, 0.009 g,0.0095 g, 0.01 g, 0.015 g, 0.02 g, 0.025 g, 0.03 g, 0.035 g, 0.04 g,0.045 g, 0.05 g, 0.055 g, 0.06 g, 0.065 g, 0.07 g, 0.075 g, 0.08 g,0.085 g, 0.09 g, 0.095 g, 0.1 g, 0.15 g, 0.2 g, 0.25 g, 0.3 g, 0.35 g,0.4 g, 0.45 g, 0.5 g, 0.55 g, 0.6 g, 0.65 g, 0.7 g, 0.75 g, 0.8 g, 0.85g, 0.9 g, 0.95 g, 1 g, 1.5 g, 2 g, 2.5, 3 g, 3.5, 4 g, 4.5 g, 5 g, 5.5g, 6 g, 6.5 g, 7 g, 7.5 g, 8 g, 8.5 g, 9 g, 9.5 g, or 10 g.

In some embodiments, the amount of one or more of the compounds of thepresent invention is in the range of 0.0001-10 g, 0.0005-9 g, 0.001-8 g,0.005-7 g, 0.01-6 g, 0.05-5 g, 0.1-4 g, 0.5-4 g, or 1-3 g.

The compounds according to the invention are effective over a widedosage range. For example, in the treatment of adult humans, dosagesfrom 0.01 to 1000 mg, from 0.5 to 100 mg, from 1 to 50 mg per day, andfrom 5 to 40 mg per day are examples of dosages that may be used. Anexemplary dosage is 10 to 30 mg per day. The exact dosage will dependupon the route of administration, the form in which the compound isadministered, the subject to be treated, the body weight of the subjectto be treated, and the preference and experience of the attendingphysician.

A pharmaceutical composition of the present invention typically containsan active ingredient (e.g., a compound of the present invention or apharmaceutically acceptable salt and/or coordination complex thereof,and one or more pharmaceutically acceptable excipients, carriers,including but not limited inert solid diluents and fillers, diluents,sterile aqueous solution and various organic solvents, permeationenhancers, solubilizers and adjuvants.

Described below are non-limiting exemplary pharmaceutical compositionsand methods for preparing the same.

Pharmaceutical compositions for oral administration. In someembodiments, the invention provides a pharmaceutical composition fororal administration containing a compound of the present invention, anda pharmaceutical excipient suitable for oral administration.

In some embodiments, the invention provides a solid pharmaceuticalcomposition for oral administration containing: (i) an effective amountof a compound of the present invention; optionally (ii) an effectiveamount of a second agent; and (iii) a pharmaceutical excipient suitablefor oral administration. In some embodiments, the composition furthercontains: (iv) an effective amount of a third agent.

In some embodiments, the pharmaceutical composition may be a liquidpharmaceutical composition suitable for oral consumption. Pharmaceuticalcompositions of the invention suitable for oral administration can bepresented as discrete dosage forms, such as capsules, cachets, ortablets, or liquids or aerosol sprays each containing a predeterminedamount of an active ingredient as a powder or in granules, a solution,or a suspension in an aqueous or non-aqueous liquid, an oil-in-wateremulsion, or a water-in-oil liquid emulsion. Such dosage forms can beprepared by any of the methods of pharmacy, but all methods include thestep of bringing the active ingredient into association with thecarrier, which constitutes one or more necessary ingredients. Ingeneral, the compositions are prepared by uniformly and intimatelyadmixing the active ingredient with liquid carriers or finely dividedsolid carriers or both, and then, if necessary, shaping the product intothe desired presentation. For example, a tablet can be prepared bycompression or molding, optionally with one or more accessoryingredients. Compressed tablets can be prepared by compressing in asuitable machine the active ingredient in a free-flowing form such aspowder or granules, optionally mixed with an excipient such as, but notlimited to, a binder, a lubricant, an inert diluent, and/or a surfaceactive or dispersing agent. Molded tablets can be made by molding in asuitable machine a mixture of the powdered compound moistened with aninert liquid diluent.

This invention further encompasses anhydrous pharmaceutical compositionsand dosage forms comprising an active ingredient, since water canfacilitate the degradation of some compounds. For example, water may beadded (e.g., 5%) in the pharmaceutical arts as a means of simulatinglong-term storage in order to determine characteristics such asshelf-life or the stability of formulations over time. Anhydrouspharmaceutical compositions and dosage forms of the invention can beprepared using anhydrous or low moisture containing ingredients and lowmoisture or low humidity conditions. Pharmaceutical compositions anddosage forms of the invention which contain lactose can be madeanhydrous if substantial contact with moisture and/or humidity duringmanufacturing, packaging, and/or storage is expected. An anhydrouspharmaceutical composition may be prepared and stored such that itsanhydrous nature is maintained. Accordingly, anhydrous compositions maybe packaged using materials known to prevent exposure to water such thatthey can be included in suitable formulary kits. Examples of suitablepackaging include, but are not limited to, hermetically sealed foils,plastic or the like, unit dose containers, blister packs, and strippacks.

An active ingredient can be combined in an intimate admixture with apharmaceutical carrier according to conventional pharmaceuticalcompounding techniques. The carrier can take a wide variety of formsdepending on the form of preparation desired for administration. Inpreparing the compositions for an oral dosage form, any of the usualpharmaceutical media can be employed as carriers, such as, for example,water, glycols, oils, alcohols, flavoring agents, preservatives,coloring agents, and the like in the case of oral liquid preparations(such as suspensions, solutions, and elixirs) or aerosols; or carrierssuch as starches, sugars, micro-crystalline cellulose, diluents,granulating agents, lubricants, binders, and disintegrating agents canbe used in the case of oral solid preparations, in some embodimentswithout employing the use of lactose. For example, suitable carriersinclude powders, capsules, and tablets, with the solid oralpreparations. If desired, tablets can be coated by standard aqueous ornonaqueous techniques.

Binders suitable for use in pharmaceutical compositions and dosage formsinclude, but are not limited to, corn starch, potato starch, or otherstarches, gelatin, natural and synthetic gums such as acacia, sodiumalginate, alginic acid, other alginates, powdered tragacanth, guar gum,cellulose and its derivatives (e.g., ethyl cellulose, cellulose acetate,carboxymethyl cellulose calcium, sodium carboxymethyl cellulose),polyvinyl pyrrolidone, methyl cellulose, pre-gelatinized starch,hydroxypropyl methyl cellulose, microcrystalline cellulose, and mixturesthereof.

Examples of suitable fillers for use in the pharmaceutical compositionsand dosage forms disclosed herein include, but are not limited to, talc,calcium carbonate (e.g., granules or powder), microcrystallinecellulose, powdered cellulose, dextrates, kaolin, mannitol, silicicacid, sorbitol, starch, pre-gelatinized starch, and mixtures thereof.

Disintegrants may be used in the compositions of the invention toprovide tablets that disintegrate when exposed to an aqueousenvironment. Too much of a disintegrant may produce tablets which maydisintegrate in the bottle. Too little may be insufficient fordisintegration to occur and may thus alter the rate and extent ofrelease of the active ingredient(s) from the dosage form. Thus, asufficient amount of disintegrant that is neither too little nor toomuch to detrimentally alter the release of the active ingredient(s) maybe used to form the dosage forms of the compounds disclosed herein. Theamount of disintegrant used may vary based upon the type of formulationand mode of administration, and may be readily discernible to those ofordinary skill in the art. About 0.5 to about 15 weight percent ofdisintegrant, or about 1 to about 5 weight percent of disintegrant, maybe used in the pharmaceutical composition. Disintegrants that can beused to form pharmaceutical compositions and dosage forms of theinvention include, but are not limited to, agar-agar, alginic acid,calcium carbonate, microcrystalline cellulose, croscarmellose sodium,crospovidone, polacrilin potassium, sodium starch glycolate, potato ortapioca starch, other starches, pre-gelatinized starch, other starches,clays, other algins, other celluloses, gums or mixtures thereof.

Lubricants which can be used to form pharmaceutical compositions anddosage forms of the invention include, but are not limited to, calciumstearate, magnesium stearate, mineral oil, light mineral oil, glycerin,sorbitol, mannitol, polyethylene glycol, other glycols, stearic acid,sodium lauryl sulfate, talc, hydrogenated vegetable oil (e.g., peanutoil, cottonseed oil, sunflower oil, sesame oil, olive oil, corn oil, andsoybean oil), zinc stearate, ethyl oleate, ethylaureate, agar, ormixtures thereof. Additional lubricants include, for example, a syloidsilica gel, a coagulated aerosol of synthetic silica, or mixturesthereof. A lubricant can optionally be added, in an amount of less thanabout 1 weight percent of the pharmaceutical composition.

When aqueous suspensions and/or elixirs are desired for oraladministration, the essential active ingredient therein may be combinedwith various sweetening or flavoring agents, coloring matter or dyesand, if so desired, emulsifying and/or suspending agents, together withsuch diluents as water, ethanol, propylene glycol, glycerin and variouscombinations thereof.

The tablets can be uncoated or coated by known techniques to delaydisintegration and absorption in the gastrointestinal tract and therebyprovide a sustained action over a longer period. For example, a timedelay material such as glyceryl monostearate or glyceryl distearate canbe employed. Formulations for oral use can also be presented as hardgelatin capsules wherein the active ingredient is mixed with an inertsolid diluent, for example, calcium carbonate, calcium phosphate orkaolin, or as soft gelatin capsules wherein the active ingredient ismixed with water or an oil medium, for example, peanut oil, liquidparaffin or olive oil.

Surfactant which can be used to form pharmaceutical compositions anddosage forms of the invention include, but are not limited to,hydrophilic surfactants, lipophilic surfactants, and mixtures thereof.That is, a mixture of hydrophilic surfactants may be employed, a mixtureof lipophilic surfactants may be employed, or a mixture of at least onehydrophilic surfactant and at least one lipophilic surfactant may beemployed.

A suitable hydrophilic surfactant may generally have an HLB value of atleast 10, while suitable lipophilic surfactants may generally have anHLB value of or less than about 10. An empirical parameter used tocharacterize the relative hydrophilicity and hydrophobicity of non-ionicamphiphilic compounds is the hydrophilic-lipophilic balance (“HLB”value). Surfactants with lower HLB values are more lipophilic orhydrophobic, and have greater solubility in oils, while surfactants withhigher HLB values are more hydrophilic, and have greater solubility inaqueous solutions. Hydrophilic surfactants are generally considered tobe those compounds having an HLB value greater than about 10, as well asanionic, cationic, or zwitterionic compounds for which the HLB scale isnot generally applicable. Similarly, lipophilic (i.e., hydrophobic)surfactants are compounds having an HLB value equal to or less thanabout 10. However, HLB value of a surfactant is merely a rough guidegenerally used to enable formulation of industrial, pharmaceutical andcosmetic emulsions.

Hydrophilic surfactants may be either ionic or non-ionic. Suitable ionicsurfactants include, but are not limited to, alkylammonium salts;fusidic acid salts; fatty acid derivatives of amino acids,oligopeptides, and polypeptides; glyceride derivatives of amino acids,oligopeptides, and polypeptides; lecithins and hydrogenated lecithins;lysolecithins and hydrogenated lysolecithins; phospholipids andderivatives thereof; lysophospholipids and derivatives thereof;carnitine fatty acid ester salts; salts of alkylsulfates; fatty acidsalts; sodium docusate; acylactylates; mono- and di-acetylated tartaricacid esters of mono- and di-glycerides; succinylated mono- anddi-glycerides; citric acid esters of mono- and di-glycerides; andmixtures thereof.

Within the aforementioned group, ionic surfactants include, by way ofexample: lecithins, lysolecithin, phospholipids, lysophospholipids andderivatives thereof; carnitine fatty acid ester salts; salts ofalkylsulfates; fatty acid salts; sodium docusate; acylactylates; mono-and di-acetylated tartaric acid esters of mono- and di-glycerides;succinylated mono- and di-glycerides; citric acid esters of mono- anddi-glycerides; and mixtures thereof.

Ionic surfactants may be the ionized forms of lecithin, lysolecithin,phosphatidylcholine, phosphatidylethanolamine, phosphatidylglycerol,phosphatidic acid, phosphatidylserine, lysophosphatidylcholine,lysophosphatidylethanolamine, lysophosphatidylglycerol, lysophosphatidicacid, lysophosphatidylserine, PEG-phosphatidylethanolamine,PVP-phosphatidylethanolamine, lactylic esters of fatty acids,stearoyl-2-lactylate, stearoyl lactylate, succinylated monoglycerides,mono/diacetylated tartaric acid esters of mono/diglycerides, citric acidesters of mono/diglycerides, cholylsarcosine, caproate, caprylate,caprate, laurate, myristate, palmitate, oleate, ricinoleate, linoleate,linolenate, stearate, lauryl sulfate, teracecyl sulfate, docusate,lauroyl carnitines, palmitoyl carnitines, myristoyl carnitines, andsalts and mixtures thereof.

Hydrophilic non-ionic surfactants may include, but not limited to,alkylglucosides; alkylmaltosides; alkylthioglucosides; laurylmacrogolglycerides; polyoxyalkylene alkyl ethers such as polyethyleneglycol alkyl ethers; polyoxyalkylene alkylphenols such as polyethyleneglycol alkyl phenols; polyoxyalkylene alkyl phenol fatty acid esterssuch as polyethylene glycol fatty acids monoesters and polyethyleneglycol fatty acids diesters; polyethylene glycol glycerol fatty acidesters; polyglycerol fatty acid esters; polyoxyalkylene sorbitan fattyacid esters such as polyethylene glycol sorbitan fatty acid esters;hydrophilic transesterification products of a polyol with at least onemember of the group consisting of glycerides, vegetable oils,hydrogenated vegetable oils, fatty acids, and sterols; polyoxyethylenesterols, derivatives, and analogues thereof; polyoxyethylated vitaminsand derivatives thereof; polyoxyethylene-polyoxypropylene blockcopolymers; and mixtures thereof; polyethylene glycol sorbitan fattyacid esters and hydrophilic transesterification products of a polyolwith at least one member of the group consisting of triglycerides,vegetable oils, and hydrogenated vegetable oils. The polyol may beglycerol, ethylene glycol, polyethylene glycol, sorbitol, propyleneglycol, pentaerythritol, or a saccharide.

Other hydrophilic-non-ionic surfactants include, without limitation,PEG-10 laurate, PEG-12 laurate, PEG-20 laurate, PEG-32 laurate, PEG-32dilaurate, PEG-12 oleate, PEG-15 oleate, PEG-20 oleate, PEG-20 dioleate,PEG-32 oleate, PEG-200 oleate, PEG-400 oleate, PEG-15 stearate, PEG-32distearate, PEG-40 stearate, PEG-100 stearate, PEG-20 dilaurate, PEG-25glyceryl trioleate, PEG-32 dioleate, PEG-20 glyceryl laurate, PEG-30glyceryl laurate, PEG-20 glyceryl stearate, PEG-20 glyceryl oleate,PEG-30 glyceryl oleate, PEG-30 glyceryl laurate, PEG-40 glyceryllaurate, PEG-40 palm kernel oil, PEG-50 hydrogenated castor oil, PEG-40castor oil, PEG-35 castor oil, PEG-60 castor oil, PEG-40 hydrogenatedcastor oil, PEG-60 hydrogenated castor oil, PEG-60 corn oil, PEG-6caprate/caprylate glycerides, PEG-8 caprate/caprylate glycerides,polyglyceryl-10 laurate, PEG-30 cholesterol, PEG-25 phyto sterol, PEG-30soya sterol, PEG-20 trioleate, PEG-40 sorbitan oleate, PEG-80 sorbitanlaurate, polysorbate 20, polysorbate 80, POE-9 lauryl ether, POE-23lauryl ether, POE-10 oleyl ether, POE-20 oleyl ether, POE-20 stearylether, tocopheryl PEG-100 succinate, PEG-24 cholesterol,polyglyceryl-10oleate, Tween 40, Tween 60, sucrose monostearate, sucrosemonolaurate, sucrose monopalmitate, PEG 10-100 nonyl phenol series, PEG15-100 octyl phenol series, and poloxamers.

Suitable lipophilic surfactants include, by way of example only: fattyalcohols; glycerol fatty acid esters; acetylated glycerol fatty acidesters; lower alcohol fatty acids esters; propylene glycol fatty acidesters; sorbitan fatty acid esters; polyethylene glycol sorbitan fattyacid esters; sterols and sterol derivatives; polyoxyethylated sterolsand sterol derivatives; polyethylene glycol alkyl ethers; sugar esters;sugar ethers; lactic acid derivatives of mono- and di-glycerides;hydrophobic transesterification products of a polyol with at least onemember of the group consisting of glycerides, vegetable oils,hydrogenated vegetable oils, fatty acids and sterols; oil-solublevitamins/vitamin derivatives; and mixtures thereof. Within this group,preferred lipophilic surfactants include glycerol fatty acid esters,propylene glycol fatty acid esters, and mixtures thereof, or arehydrophobic transesterification products of a polyol with at least onemember of the group consisting of vegetable oils, hydrogenated vegetableoils, and triglycerides.

In one embodiment, the composition may include a solubilizer to ensuregood solubilization and/or dissolution of the compound of the presentinvention and to minimize precipitation of the compound of the presentinvention. This can be especially important for compositions fornon-oral use, e.g., compositions for injection. A solubilizer may alsobe added to increase the solubility of the hydrophilic drug and/or othercomponents, such as surfactants, or to maintain the composition as astable or homogeneous solution or dispersion.

Examples of suitable solubilizers include, but are not limited to, thefollowing: alcohols and polyols, such as ethanol, isopropanol, butanol,benzyl alcohol, ethylene glycol, propylene glycol, butanediols andisomers thereof, glycerol, pentaerythritol, sorbitol, mannitol,transcutol, dimethyl isosorbide, polyethylene glycol, polypropyleneglycol, polyvinylalcohol, hydroxypropyl methylcellulose and othercellulose derivatives, cyclodextrins and cyclodextrin derivatives;ethers of polyethylene glycols having an average molecular weight ofabout 200 to about 6000, such as tetrahydrofurfuryl alcohol PEG ether(glycofurol) or methoxy PEG; amides and other nitrogen-containingcompounds such as 2-pyrrolidone, 2-piperidone, .epsilon.-caprolactam,N-alkylpyrrolidone, N-hydroxyalkylpyrrolidone, N-alkylpiperidone,N-alkylcaprolactam, dimethylacetamide and polyvinylpyrrolidone; esterssuch as ethyl propionate, tributylcitrate, acetyl triethylcitrate,acetyl tributyl citrate, triethylcitrate, ethyl oleate, ethyl caprylate,ethyl butyrate, triacetin, propylene glycol monoacetate, propyleneglycol diacetate, ε-caprolactone and isomers thereof, δ-valerolactoneand isomers thereof, β-butyrolactone and isomers thereof; and othersolubilizers known in the art, such as dimethyl acetamide, dimethylisosorbide, N-methyl pyrrolidones, monooctanoin, diethylene glycolmonoethyl ether, and water.

Mixtures of solubilizers may also be used. Examples include, but notlimited to, triacetin, triethylcitrate, ethyl oleate, ethyl caprylate,dimethylacetamide, N-methylpyrrolidone, N-hydroxyethylpyrrolidone,polyvinylpyrrolidone, hydroxypropyl methylcellulose, hydroxypropylcyclodextrins, ethanol, polyethylene glycol 200-100, glycofurol,transcutol, propylene glycol, and dimethyl isosorbide. Particularlypreferred solubilizers include sorbitol, glycerol, triacetin, ethylalcohol, PEG-400, glycofurol and propylene glycol.

The amount of solubilizer that can be included is not particularlylimited. The amount of a given solubilizer may be limited to abioacceptable amount, which may be readily determined by one of skill inthe art. In some circumstances, it may be advantageous to includeamounts of solubilizers far in excess of bioacceptable amounts, forexample to maximize the concentration of the drug, with excesssolubilizer removed prior to providing the composition to a patientusing conventional techniques, such as distillation or evaporation.Thus, if present, the solubilizer can be in a weight ratio of 10%, 25%,50%, 100%, or up to about 200% by weight, based on the combined weightof the drug, and other excipients. If desired, very small amounts ofsolubilizer may also be used, such as 5%, 2%, 1% or even less.Typically, the solubilizer may be present in an amount of about 1% toabout 100%, more typically about 5% to about 25% by weight.

The composition can further include one or more pharmaceuticallyacceptable additives and excipients. Such additives and excipientsinclude, without limitation, detackifiers, anti-foaming agents,buffering agents, polymers, antioxidants, preservatives, chelatingagents, viscomodulators, tonicifiers, flavorants, colorants, odorants,opacifiers, suspending agents, binders, fillers, plasticizers,lubricants, and mixtures thereof.

In addition, an acid or a base may be incorporated into the compositionto facilitate processing, to enhance stability, or for other reasons.Examples of pharmaceutically acceptable bases include amino acids, aminoacid esters, ammonium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, sodium hydroxide,sodium hydrogen carbonate, aluminum hydroxide, calcium carbonate,magnesium hydroxide, magnesium aluminum silicate, synthetic aluminumsilicate, synthetic hydrocalcite, magnesium aluminum hydroxide,diisopropylethylamine, ethanolamine, ethylenediamine, triethanolamine,triethylamine, triisopropanolamine, trimethylamine,tris(hydroxymethyl)aminomethane (TRIS) and the like. Also suitable arebases that are salts of a pharmaceutically acceptable acid, such asacetic acid, acrylic acid, adipic acid, alginic acid, alkanesulfonicacid, amino acids, ascorbic acid, benzoic acid, boric acid, butyricacid, carbonic acid, citric acid, fatty acids, formic acid, fumaricacid, gluconic acid, hydroquinosulfonic acid, isoascorbic acid, lacticacid, maleic acid, oxalic acid, para-bromophenylsulfonic acid, propionicacid, p-toluenesulfonic acid, salicylic acid, stearic acid, succinicacid, tannic acid, tartaric acid, thioglycolic acid, toluenesulfonicacid, uric acid, and the like. Salts of polyprotic acids, such as sodiumphosphate, disodium hydrogen phosphate, and sodium dihydrogen phosphatecan also be used. When the base is a salt, the cation can be anyconvenient and pharmaceutically acceptable cation, such as ammonium,alkali metals, alkaline earth metals, and the like. Example may include,but not limited to, sodium, potassium, lithium, magnesium, calcium andammonium.

Suitable acids are pharmaceutically acceptable organic or inorganicacids. Examples of suitable inorganic acids include hydrochloric acid,hydrobromic acid, hydriodic acid, sulfuric acid, nitric acid, boricacid, phosphoric acid, and the like. Examples of suitable organic acidsinclude acetic acid, acrylic acid, adipic acid, alginic acid,alkanesulfonic acids, amino acids, ascorbic acid, benzoic acid, boricacid, butyric acid, carbonic acid, citric acid, fatty acids, formicacid, fumaric acid, gluconic acid, hydroquinosulfonic acid, isoascorbicacid, lactic acid, maleic acid, methanesulfonic acid, oxalic acid,para-bromophenylsulfonic acid, propionic acid, p-toluenesulfonic acid,salicylic acid, stearic acid, succinic acid, tannic acid, tartaric acid,thioglycolic acid, toluenesulfonic acid, uric acid and the like.

Pharmaceutical compositions for injection. In some embodiments, theinvention provides a pharmaceutical composition for injection containinga compound of the present invention and a pharmaceutical excipientsuitable for injection. Components and amounts of agents in thecompositions are as described herein.

The forms in which the novel compositions of the present invention maybe incorporated for administration by injection include aqueous or oilsuspensions, or emulsions, with sesame oil, corn oil, cottonseed oil, orpeanut oil, as well as elixirs, mannitol, dextrose, or a sterile aqueoussolution, and similar pharmaceutical vehicles.

Aqueous solutions in saline are also conventionally used for injection.Ethanol, glycerol, propylene glycol, liquid polyethylene glycol, and thelike (and suitable mixtures thereof), cyclodextrin derivatives, andvegetable oils may also be employed. The proper fluidity can bemaintained, for example, by the use of a coating, such as lecithin, forthe maintenance of the required particle size in the case of dispersionand by the use of surfactants. The prevention of the action ofmicroorganisms can be brought about by various antibacterial andantifungal agents, for example, parabens, chlorobutanol, phenol, sorbicacid, thimerosal, and the like.

Sterile injectable solutions are prepared by incorporating the compoundof the present invention in the required amount in the appropriatesolvent with various other ingredients as enumerated above, as required,followed by filtered sterilization. Generally, dispersions are preparedby incorporating the various sterilized active ingredients into asterile vehicle which contains the basic dispersion medium and therequired other ingredients from those enumerated above. In the case ofsterile powders for the preparation of sterile injectable solutions,certain desirable methods of preparation are vacuum-drying andfreeze-drying techniques which yield a powder of the active ingredientplus any additional desired ingredient from a previouslysterile-filtered solution thereof.

Pharmaceutical compositions for topical (e.g., transdermal) delivery. Insome embodiments, the invention provides a pharmaceutical compositionfor transdermal delivery containing a compound of the present inventionand a pharmaceutical excipient suitable for transdermal delivery.

Compositions of the present invention can be formulated intopreparations in solid, semi-solid, or liquid forms suitable for local ortopical administration, such as gels, water soluble jellies, creams,lotions, suspensions, foams, powders, slurries, ointments, solutions,oils, pastes, suppositories, sprays, emulsions, saline solutions,dimethylsulfoxide (DMSO)-based solutions. In general, carriers withhigher densities are capable of providing an area with a prolongedexposure to the active ingredients. In contrast, a solution formulationmay provide more immediate exposure of the active ingredient to thechosen area.

The pharmaceutical compositions also may comprise suitable solid or gelphase carriers or excipients, which are compounds that allow increasedpenetration of, or assist in the delivery of, therapeutic moleculesacross the stratum corneum permeability barrier of the skin. There aremany of these penetration-enhancing molecules known to those trained inthe art of topical formulation. Examples of such carriers and excipientsinclude, but are not limited to, humectants (e.g., urea), glycols (e.g.,propylene glycol), alcohols (e.g., ethanol), fatty acids (e.g., oleicacid), surfactants (e.g., isopropyl myristate and sodium laurylsulfate), pyrrolidones, glycerol monolaurate, sulfoxides, terpenes(e.g., menthol), amines, amides, alkanes, alkanols, water, calciumcarbonate, calcium phosphate, various sugars, starches, cellulosederivatives, gelatin, and polymers such as polyethylene glycols.

Another exemplary formulation for use in the methods of the presentinvention employs transdermal delivery devices (“patches”). Suchtransdermal patches may be used to provide continuous or discontinuousinfusion of a compound of the present invention in controlled amounts,either with or without another agent.

The construction and use of transdermal patches for the delivery ofpharmaceutical agents is well known in the art. See, e.g., U.S. Pat.Nos. 5,023,252, 4,992,445 and 5,001,139. Such patches may be constructedfor continuous, pulsatile, or on demand delivery of pharmaceuticalagents.

Pharmaceutical compositions for inhalation. Compositions for inhalationor insufflation include solutions and suspensions in pharmaceuticallyacceptable, aqueous or organic solvents, or mixtures thereof, andpowders. The liquid or solid compositions may contain suitablepharmaceutically acceptable excipients as described supra. Preferablythe compositions are administered by the oral or nasal respiratory routefor local or systemic effect. Compositions in preferablypharmaceutically acceptable solvents may be nebulized by use of inertgases. Nebulized solutions may be inhaled directly from the nebulizingdevice or the nebulizing device may be attached to a face mask tent, orintermittent positive pressure breathing machine. Solution, suspension,or powder compositions may be administered, preferably orally ornasally, from devices that deliver the formulation in an appropriatemanner.

Other pharmaceutical compositions. Pharmaceutical compositions may alsobe prepared from compositions described herein and one or morepharmaceutically acceptable excipients suitable for sublingual, buccal,rectal, intraosseous, intraocular, intranasal, epidural, or intraspinaladministration. Preparations for such pharmaceutical compositions arewell-known in the art. See, e.g., See, e.g., Anderson, Philip O.;Knoben, James E.; Troutman, William G, eds., Handbook of Clinical DrugData, Tenth Edition, McGraw-Hill, 2002; Pratt and Taylor, eds.,Principles of Drug Action, Third Edition, Churchill Livingston, N.Y.,1990; Katzung, ed., Basic and Clinical Pharmacology, Ninth Edition,McGraw Hill, 20037ybg; Goodman and Gilman, eds., The PharmacologicalBasis of Therapeutics, Tenth Edition, McGraw Hill, 2001; RemingtonsPharmaceutical Sciences, 20th Ed., Lippincott Williams & Wilkins., 2000;Martindale, The Extra Pharmacopoeia, Thirty-Second Edition (ThePharmaceutical Press, London, 1999); all of which are incorporated byreference herein in their entirety.

Administration of the compounds or pharmaceutical composition of thepresent invention can be effected by any method that enables delivery ofthe compounds to the site of action. These methods include oral routes,intraduodenal routes, parenteral injection (including intravenous,intraarterial, subcutaneous, intramuscular, intravascular,intraperitoneal or infusion), topical (e.g. transdermal application),rectal administration, via local delivery by catheter or stent orthrough inhalation. Compounds can also abe administered intraadiposallyor intrathecally.

The amount of the compound administered will be dependent on the mammalbeing treated, the severity of the disorder or condition, the rate ofadministration, the disposition of the compound and the discretion ofthe prescribing physician. However, an effective dosage is in the rangeof about 0.001 to about 100 mg per kg body weight per day, preferablyabout 1 to about 35 mg/kg/day, in single or divided doses. For a 70 kghuman, this would amount to about 0.05 to 7 g/day, preferably about 0.05to about 2.5 g/day. In some instances, dosage levels below the lowerlimit of the aforesaid range may be more than adequate, while in othercases still larger doses may be employed without causing any harmfulside effect, e.g. by dividing such larger doses into several small dosesfor administration throughout the day.

In some embodiments, a compound of the invention is administered in asingle dose. Typically, such administration will be by injection, e.g.,intravenous injection, in order to introduce the agent quickly. However,other routes may be used as appropriate. A single dose of a compound ofthe invention may also be used for treatment of an acute condition.

In some embodiments, a compound of the invention is administered inmultiple doses. Dosing may be about once, twice, three times, fourtimes, five times, six times, or more than six times per day. Dosing maybe about once a month, once every two weeks, once a week, or once everyother day. In another embodiment a compound of the invention and anotheragent are administered together about once per day to about 6 times perday.

In another embodiment the administration of a compound of the inventionand an agent continues for less than about 7 days. In yet anotherembodiment the administration continues for more than about 6, 10, 14,28 days, two months, six months, or one year. In some cases, continuousdosing is achieved and maintained as long as necessary.

Administration of the agents of the invention may continue as long asnecessary. In some embodiments, an agent of the invention isadministered for more than 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 14, or 28 days. In someembodiments, an agent of the invention is administered for less than 28,14, 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, or 1 day. In some embodiments, an agent of theinvention is administered chronically on an ongoing basis, e.g., for thetreatment of chronic effects.

An effective amount of a compound of the invention may be administeredin either single or multiple doses by any of the accepted modes ofadministration of agents having similar utilities, including rectal,buccal, intranasal and transdermal routes, by intra-arterial injection,intravenously, intraperitoneally, parenterally, intramuscularly,subcutaneously, orally, topically, or as an inhalant.

The compositions of the invention may also be delivered via animpregnated or coated device such as a stent, for example, or anartery-inserted cylindrical polymer. Such a method of administrationmay, for example, aid in the prevention or amelioration of restenosisfollowing procedures such as balloon angioplasty. Without being bound bytheory, compounds of the invention may slow or inhibit the migration andproliferation of smooth muscle cells in the arterial wall whichcontribute to restenosis. A compound of the invention may beadministered, for example, by local delivery from the struts of a stent,from a stent graft, from grafts, or from the cover or sheath of a stent.In some embodiments, a compound of the invention is admixed with amatrix. Such a matrix may be a polymeric matrix, and may serve to bondthe compound to the stent. Polymeric matrices suitable for such use,include, for example, lactone-based polyesters or copolyesters such aspolylactide, polycaprolactonglycolide, polyorthoesters, polyanhydrides,polyaminoacids, polysaccharides, polyphosphazenes, poly(ether-ester)copolymers (e.g. PEO-PLLA); polydimethylsiloxane,poly(ethylene-vinylacetate), acrylate-based polymers or copolymers (e.g.polyhydroxyethyl methylmethacrylate, polyvinyl pyrrolidinone),fluorinated polymers such as polytetrafluoroethylene and celluloseesters. Suitable matrices may be nondegrading or may degrade with time,releasing the compound or compounds. Compounds of the invention may beapplied to the surface of the stent by various methods such as dip/spincoating, spray coating, dip-coating, and/or brush-coating. The compoundsmay be applied in a solvent and the solvent may be allowed to evaporate,thus forming a layer of compound onto the stent. Alternatively, thecompound may be located in the body of the stent or graft, for examplein microchannels or micropores. When implanted, the compound diffusesout of the body of the stent to contact the arterial wall. Such stentsmay be prepared by dipping a stent manufactured to contain suchmicropores or microchannels into a solution of the compound of theinvention in a suitable solvent, followed by evaporation of the solvent.Excess drug on the surface of the stent may be removed via an additionalbrief solvent wash. In yet other embodiments, compounds of the inventionmay be covalently linked to a stent or graft. A covalent linker may beused which degrades in vivo, leading to the release of the compound ofthe invention. Any bio-labile linkage may be used for such a purpose,such as ester, amide or anhydride linkages. Compounds of the inventionmay additionally be administered intravascularly from a balloon usedduring angioplasty. Extravascular administration of the compounds viathe pericard or via advential application of formulations of theinvention may also be performed to decrease restenosis.

A variety of stent devices which may be used as described are disclosed,for example, in the following references, all of which are herebyincorporated by reference: U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,451,233; 5,040,548;5,061,273; 5,496,346; 5,292,331; 5,674,278; 3,657,744;4,739,762;5,195,984; 5,292,331; 5,674,278; 5,879,382; and 6,344,053.

The compounds of the invention may be administered in dosages. It isknown in the art that due to intersubject variability in compoundpharmacokinetics, individualization of dosing regimen is necessary foroptimal therapy. Dosing for a compound of the invention may be found byroutine experimentation in light of the instant disclosure.

When a compound of the invention, is administered in a composition thatcomprises one or more agents, and the agent has a shorter half-life thanthe compound of the invention unit dose forms of the agent and thecompound of the invention may be adjusted accordingly.

The subject pharmaceutical composition may, for example, be in a formsuitable for oral administration as a tablet, capsule, pill, powder,sustained release formulations, solution, suspension, for parenteralinjection as a sterile solution, suspension or emulsion, for topicaladministration as an ointment or cream or for rectal administration as asuppository. The pharmaceutical composition may be in unit dosage formssuitable for single administration of precise dosages. Thepharmaceutical composition will include a conventional pharmaceuticalcarrier or excipient and a compound according to the invention as anactive ingredient. In addition, it may include other medicinal orpharmaceutical agents, carriers, adjuvants, etc.

Exemplary parenteral administration forms include solutions orsuspensions of active compound in sterile aqueous solutions, forexample, aqueous propylene glycol or dextrose solutions. Such dosageforms can be suitably buffered, if desired.

The invention also provides kits. The kits include a compound orcompounds of the present invention as described herein, in suitablepackaging, and written material that can include instructions for use,discussion of clinical studies, listing of side effects, and the like.Such kits may also include information, such as scientific literaturereferences, package insert materials, clinical trial results, and/orsummaries of these and the like, which indicate or establish theactivities and/or advantages of the composition, and/or which describedosing, administration, side effects, drug interactions, or otherinformation useful to the health care provider. Such information may bebased on the results of various studies, for example, studies usingexperimental animals involving in vivo models and studies based on humanclinical trials. The kit may further contain another agent. In someembodiments, the compound of the present invention and the agent areprovided as separate compositions in separate containers within the kit.In some embodiments, the compound of the present invention and the agentare provided as a single composition within a container in the kit.Suitable packaging and additional articles for use (e.g., measuring cupfor liquid preparations, foil wrapping to minimize exposure to air, andthe like) are known in the art and may be included in the kit. Kitsdescribed herein can be provided, marketed and/or promoted to healthproviders, including physicians, nurses, pharmacists, formularyofficials, and the like. Kits may also, in some embodiments, be marketeddirectly to the consumer.

The invention also provides methods of using the compounds orpharmaceutical compositions of the present invention to treat diseaseconditions, including but not limited to diseases associated withmalfunctioning of one or more types of PI3 kinase and/or mTOR. Adetailed description of conditions and disorders mediated by p110δkinase activity is set forth in Sadu et al., WO 01/81346, which isincorporated herein by reference in its entirety for all purposes.

The invention also relates to a method of treating a hyperproliferativedisorder in a mammal that comprises administering to said mammal atherapeutically effective amount of a compound of the present invention,or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, ester, prodrug, solvate, hydrateor derivative thereof. In some embodiments, said method relates to thetreatment of cancer such as acute myeloid leukemia, thymus, brain, lung,squamous cell, skin, eye, retinoblastoma, intraocular melanoma, oralcavity and oropharyngeal, bladder, gastric, stomach, pancreatic,bladder, breast, cervical, head, neck, renal, kidney, liver, ovarian,prostate, colorectal, esophageal, testicular, gynecological, thyroid,CNS, PNS, AIDS-related (e.g. Lymphoma and Kaposi's Sarcoma) orviral-induced cancer. In some embodiments, said method relates to thetreatment of a non-cancerous hyperproliferative disorder such as benignhyperplasia of the skin (e.g., psoriasis), restenosis, or prostate(e.g., benign prostatic hypertrophy (BPH)).

The treatment methods provided herein comprise administering to thesubject a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of theinvention. In one embodiment, the present invention provides a method oftreating an inflammation disorder, including autoimmune diseases in amammal. The method comprises administering to said mammal atherapeutically effective amount of a compound of the present invention,or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, ester, prodrug, solvate, hydrateor derivative thereof. Examples of autoimmune diseases includes but isnot limited to acute disseminated encephalomyelitis (ADEM), Addison'sdisease, antiphospholipid antibody syndrome (APS), aplastic anemia,autoimmune hepatitis, coeliac disease, Crohn's disease, Diabetesmellitus (type 1), Goodpasture's syndrome, Graves' disease,Guillain-Barrd syndrome (GBS), Hashimoto's disease, lupus erythematosus,multiple sclerosis, myasthenia gravis, opsoclonus myoclonus syndrome(OMS), optic neuritis, Ord's thyroiditis, oemphigus, polyarthritis,primary biliary cirrhosis, psoriasis, rheumatoid arthritis, Reiter'ssyndrome, Takayasu's arteritis, temporal arteritis (also known as “giantcell arteritis”), warm autoimmune hemolytic anemia, Wegener'sgranulomatosis, alopecia universalis, Chagas' disease, chronic fatiguesyndrome, dysautonomia, endometriosis, hidradenitis suppurativa,interstitial cystitis, neuromyotonia, sarcoidosis, scleroderma,ulcerative colitis, vitiligo, and vulvodynia. Other disorders includebone-resorption disorders and thromobsis.

In some embodiments, the method of treating inflammatory or autoimmunediseases comprises administering to a subject (e.g. a mammal) atherapeutically effective amount of one or more compounds of the presentinvention that selectively inhibit PI3K-δ and/or PI3K-γ as compared toall other type I PI3 kinases. Such selective inhibition of PI3K-δ and/orPI3K-γ may be advantageous for treating any of the diseases orconditions described herein. For example, selective inhibition of PI3K-δmay inhibit inflammatory responses associated with inflammatorydiseases, autoimmune disease, or diseases related to an undesirableimmune response including but not limited to asthma, emphysema, allergy,dermatitis, rheumatoid arthritis, psoriasis, lupus erythematosus, orgraft versus host disease. Selective inhibition of PI3K-δ may furtherprovide for a reduction in the inflammatory or undesirable immuneresponse without a concomitant reduction in the ability to reduce abacterial, viral, and/or fungal infection. Selective inhibition of bothPI3K-δ and PI3K-γ may be advantageous for inhibiting the inflammatoryresponse in the subject to a greater degree than that would be providedfor by inhibitors that selectively inhibit PI3K-δ or PI3K-γ alone. Inone aspect, one or more of the subject methods are effective in reducingantigen specific antibody production in vivo by about 2-fold, 3-fold,4-fold, 5-fold, 7.5-fold, 10-fold, 25-fold, 50-fold, 100-fold, 250-fold,500-fold, 750-fold, or about 1000-fold or more. In another aspect, oneor more of the subject methods are effective in reducing antigenspecific IgG3 and/or IgGM production in vivo by about 2-fold, 3-fold,4-fold, 5-fold, 7.5-fold, 10-fold, 25-fold, 50-fold, 100-fold, 250-fold,500-fold, 750-fold, or about 1000-fold or more.

In one aspect, one of more of the subject methods are effective inameliorating symptoms associated with rheumatoid arthritis including butnot limited to a reduction in the swelling of joints, a reduction inserum anti-collagen levels, and/or a reduction in joint pathology suchas bone resorption, cartilage damage, pannus, and/or inflammation. Inanother aspect, the subject methods are effective in reducing ankleinflammation by at least about 2%, 5%, 10%, 15%, 20%, 25%, 30%, 50%,60%, or about 75% to 90%. In another aspect, the subject methods areeffective in reducing knee inflammation by at least about 2%, 5%, 10%,15%, 20%, 25%, 30%, 50%, 60%, or about 75% to 90% or more. In stillanother aspect, the subject methods are effective in reducing serumanti-type II collagen levels by at least about 10%, 12%, 15%, 20%, 24%,25%, 30%, 35%, 50%, 60%, 75%, 80%, 86%, 87%, or about 90% or more. Inanother aspect, the subject methods are effective in reducing anklehistopathology scores by about 5%, 10%, 15%, 20%, 25%, 30%, 40%, 50%,60%, 75%, 80%, 90% or more. In still another aspect, the subject methodsare effective in reducing knee histopathology scores by about 5%, 10%,15%, 20%, 25%, 30%, 40%, 50%, 60%, 75%, 80%, 90% or more.

In other embodiments, the present invention provides methods of usingthe compounds or pharmaceutical compositions to treat respiratorydiseases including but not limited to diseases affecting the lobes oflung, pleural cavity, bronchial tubes, trachea, upper respiratory tract,or the nerves and muscle for breathing. For example, methods areprovided to treat obstructive pulmonary disease. Chronic obstructivepulmonary disease (COPD) is an umbrella term for a group of respiratorytract diseases that are characterized by airflow obstruction orlimitation. Conditions included in this umbrella term are: chronicbronchitis, emphysema, and bronchiectasis.

In another embodiment, the compounds described herein are used for thetreatment of asthma. Also, the compounds or pharmaceutical compositionsdescribed herein may be used for the treatment of endotoxemia andsepsis. In one embodiment, the compounds or pharmaceutical compositionsdescribed herein are used to for the treatment of rheumatoid arthritis(RA). In yet another embodiment, the compounds or pharmaceuticalcompositions described herein is used for the treatment of contact oratopic dermatitis. Contact dermatitis includes irritant dermatitis,phototoxic dermatitis, allergic dermatitis, photoallergic dermatitis,contact urticaria, systemic contact-type dermatitis and the like.Irritant dermatitis can occur when too much of a substance is used onthe skin of when the skin is sensitive to certain substance. Atopicdermatitis, sometimes called eczema, is a kind of dermatitis, an atopicskin disease.

The invention also relates to a method of treating diseases related tovasculogenesis or angiogenesis in a mammal that comprises administeringto said mammal a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of thepresent invention, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, ester,prodrug, solvate, hydrate or derivative thereof. In some embodiments,said method is for treating a disease selected from the group consistingof tumor angiogenesis, chronic inflammatory disease such as rheumatoidarthritis, atherosclerosis, inflammatory bowel disease, skin diseasessuch as psoriasis, eczema, and scleroderma, diabetes, diabeticretinopathy, retinopathy of prematurity, age-related maculardegeneration, hemangioma, glioma, melanoma, Kaposi's sarcoma andovarian, breast, lung, pancreatic, prostate, colon and epidermoidcancer.

Patients that can be treated with compounds of the present invention, orpharmaceutically acceptable salt, ester, prodrug, solvate, hydrate orderivative of said compounds, according to the methods of this inventioninclude, for example, patients that have been diagnosed as havingpsoriasis; restenosis; atherosclerosis; BPH; breast cancer such as aductal carcinoma in duct tissue in a mammary gland, medullarycarcinomas, colloid carcinomas, tubular carcinomas, and inflammatorybreast cancer; ovarian cancer, including epithelial ovarian tumors suchas adenocarcinoma in the ovary and an adenocarcinoma that has migratedfrom the ovary into the abdominal cavity; uterine cancer; cervicalcancer such as adenocarcinoma in the cervix epithelial includingsquamous cell carcinoma and adenocarcinomas; prostate cancer, such as aprostate cancer selected from the following: an adenocarcinoma or anadenocarinoma that has migrated to the bone; pancreatic cancer such asepitheliod carcinoma in the pancreatic duct tissue and an adenocarcinomain a pancreatic duct; bladder cancer such as a transitional cellcarcinoma in urinary bladder, urothelial carcinomas (transitional cellcarcinomas), tumors in the urothelial cells that line the bladder,squamous cell carcinomas, adenocarcinomas, and small cell cancers;leukemia such as acute myeloid leukemia (AML), acute lymphocyticleukemia, chronic lymphocytic leukemia, chronic myeloid leukemia, hairycell leukemia, myelodysplasia, myeloproliferative disorders, acutemyelogenous leukemia (AML), chronic myelogenous leukemia (CML),mastocytosis, chronic lymphocytic leukemia (CLL), multiple myeloma (MM),and myelodysplastic syndrome (MDS); bone cancer; lung cancer such asnon-small cell lung cancer (NSCLC), which is divided into squamous cellcarcinomas, adenocarcinomas, and large cell undifferentiated carcinomas,and small cell lung cancer; skin cancer such as basal cell carcinoma,melanoma, squamous cell carcinoma and actinic keratosis, which is a skincondition that sometimes develops into squamous cell carcinoma; eyeretinoblastoma; cutaneous or intraocular (eye) melanoma; primary livercancer (cancer that begins in the liver); kidney cancer; thyroid cancersuch as papillary, follicular, medullary and anaplastic; AIDS-relatedlymphoma such as diffuse large B-cell lymphoma, B-cell immunoblasticlymphoma and small non-cleaved cell lymphoma; Kaposi's Sarcoma;viral-induced cancers including hepatitis B virus (HBV), hepatitis Cvirus (HCV), and hepatocellular carcinoma; human lymphotropic virus-type1 (HTLV-1) and adult T-cell leukemia/lymphoma; and human papilloma virus(HPV) and cervical cancer; central nervous system cancers (CNS) such asprimary brain tumor, which includes gliomas (astrocytoma, anaplasticastrocytoma, or glioblastoma multiforme), Oligodendroglioma, Ependymoma,Meningioma, Lymphoma, Schwannoma, and Medulloblastoma; peripheralnervous system (PNS) cancers such as acoustic neuromas and malignantperipheral nerve sheath tumor (MPNST) including neurofibromas andschwannomas, malignant fibrous cytoma, malignant fibrous histiocytoma,malignant meningioma, malignant mesothelioma, and malignant mixedMüllerian tumor; oral cavity and oropharyngeal cancer such as,hypopharyngeal cancer, laryngeal cancer, nasopharyngeal cancer, andoropharyngeal cancer; stomach cancer such as lymphomas, gastric stromaltumors, and carcinoid tumors; testicular cancer such as germ cell tumors(GCTs), which include seminomas and nonseminomas, and gonadal stromaltumors, which include Leydig cell tumors and Sertoli cell tumors; thymuscancer such as to thymomas, thymic carcinomas, Hodgkin disease,non-Hodgkin lymphomas carcinoids or carcinoid tumors; rectal cancer; andcolon cancer.

The invention also relates to a method of treating diabetes in a mammalthat comprises administering to said mammal a therapeutically effectiveamount of a compound of the present invention, or a pharmaceuticallyacceptable salt, ester, prodrug, solvate, hydrate or derivative thereof.

In addition, the compounds described herein may be used to treat acne.

In addition, the compounds described herein may be used for thetreatment of arteriosclerosis, including atherosclerosis.Arteriosclerosis is a general term describing any hardening of medium orlarge arteries.

Atherosclerosis is a hardening of an artery specifically due to anatheromatous plaque.

Further the compounds described herein may be used for the treatment ofglomerulonephritis. Glomerulonephritis is a primary or secondaryautoimmune renal disease characterized by inflammation of the glomeruli.It may be asymptomatic, or present with hematuria and/or proteinuria.There are many recognized types, divided in acute, subacute or chronicglomerulonephritis. Causes are infectious (bacterial, viral or parasiticpathogens), autoimmune or paraneoplastic.

Additionally, the compounds described herein may be used for thetreatment of bursitis, lupus, acute disseminated encephalomyelitis(ADEM), addison's disease, antiphospholipid antibody syndrome (APS),aplastic anemia, autoimmune hepatitis, coeliac disease, crohn's disease,diabetes mellitus (type 1), goodpasture's syndrome, graves' disease,guillain-barré syndrome (GBS), hashimoto's disease, inflammatory boweldisease, lupus erythematosus, myasthenia gravis, opsoclonus myoclonussyndrome (OMS), optic neuritis, ord's thyroiditis, ostheoarthritis,uveoretinitis, pemphigus, polyarthritis, primary biliary cirrhosis,reiter's syndrome, takayasu's arteritis, temporal arteritis, warmautoimmune hemolytic anemia, wegener's granulomatosis, alopeciauniversalis, chagas' disease, chronic fatigue syndrome, dysautonomia,endometriosis, hidradenitis suppurativa, interstitial cystitis,neuromyotonia, sarcoidosis, scleroderma, ulcerative colitis, vitiligo,vulvodynia, appendicitis, arteritis, arthritis, blepharitis,bronchiolitis, bronchitis, cervicitis, cholangitis, cholecystitis,chorioamnionitis, colitis, conjunctivitis, cystitis, dacryoadenitis,dermatomyositis, endocarditis, endometritis, enteritis, enterocolitis,epicondylitis, epididymitis, fasciitis, fibrositis, gastritis,gastroenteritis, gingivitis, hepatitis, hidradenitis, ileitis, iritis,laryngitis, mastitis, meningitis, myelitis, myocarditis, myositis,nephritis, omphalitis, oophoritis, orchitis, osteitis, otitis,pancreatitis, parotitis, pericarditis, peritonitis, pharyngitis,pleuritis, phlebitis, pneumonitis, proctitis, prostatitis,pyelonephritis, rhinitis, salpingitis, sinusitis, stomatitis, synovitis,tendonitis, tonsillitis, uveitis, vaginitis, vasculitis, or vulvitis.

The invention also relates to a method of treating a cardiovasculardisease in a mammal that comprises administering to said mammal atherapeutically effective amount of a compound of the present invention,or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, ester, prodrug, solvate, hydrateor derivative thereof. Examples of cardiovascular conditions include,but are not limited to, atherosclerosis, restenosis, vascular occlusionand carotid obstructive disease.

In another aspect, the present invention provides methods of disruptingthe function of a leukocyte or disrupting a function of an osteoclast.The method includes contacting the leukocyte or the osteoclast with afunction disrupting amount of a compound of the invention.

In another aspect of the present invention, methods are provided fortreating ophthalmic disease by administering one or more of the subjectcompounds or pharmaceutical compositions to the eye of a subject.

Methods are further provided for administering the compounds of thepresent invention via eye drop, intraocular injection, intravitrealinjection, topically, or through the use of a drug eluting device,microcapsule, implant, or microfluidic device. In some cases, thecompounds of the present invention are administered with a carrier orexcipient that increases the intraocular penetrance of the compound suchas an oil and water emulsion with colloid particles having an oily coresurrounded by an interfacial film.

In some cases, the colloid particles include at least one cationic agentand at least one non-ionic sufactant such as a poloxamer, tyloxapol, apolysorbate, a polyoxyethylene castor oil derivative, a sorbitan ester,or a polyoxyl stearate. In some cases, the cationic agent is analkylamine, a tertiary alkyl amine, a quarternary ammonium compound, acationic lipid, an amino alcohol, a biguanidine salt, a cationiccompound or a mixture thereof. In some cases the cationic agent is abiguanidine salt such as chlorhexidine, polyaminopropyl biguanidine,phenformin, alkylbiguanidine, or a mixture thereof. In some cases, thequaternary ammonium compound is a benzalkonium halide, lauralkoniumhalide, cetrimide, hexadecyltrimethylammonium halide,tetradecyltrimethylammonium halide, dodecyltrimethylammonium halide,cetrimonium halide, benzethonium halide, behenalkonium halide,cetalkonium halide, cetethyldimonium halide, cetylpyridinium halide,benzododecinium halide, chlorallyl methenamine halide, rnyristylalkoniumhalide, stearalkonium halide or a mixture of two or more thereof. Insome cases, cationic agent is a benzalkonium chloride, lauralkoniumchloride, benzododecinium bromide, benzethenium chloride,hexadecyltrimethylammonium bromide, tetradecyltrimethylammonium bromide,dodecyltrimethylammonium bromide or a mixture of two or more thereof. Insome cases, the oil phase is mineral oil and light mineral oil, mediumchain triglycerides (MCT), coconut oil; hydrogenated oils comprisinghydrogenated cottonseed oil, hydrogenated palm oil, hydrogenate castoroil or hydrogenated soybean oil; polyoxyethylene hydrogenated castor oilderivatives comprising poluoxyl-40 hydrogenated castor oil, polyoxyl-60hydrogenated castor oil or polyoxyl-100 hydrogenated castor oil.

The invention further provides methods of modulating a PI3K and/or mTorkinase activity by contacting the kinase with an amount of an effectiveamount of compound of the invention. Modulate can be inhibiting oractivating kinase activity. In some embodiments, the invention providesmethods of inhibiting kinase activity by contacting the kinase with anamount of an effective amount of a compound of the invention insolution. In some embodiments, the invention provides methods ofinhibiting the kinase activity by contacting a cell, tissue, organ thatexpress the kinase of interest. In some embodiments, the inventionprovides methods of inhibiting kinase activity in subject including butnot limited to rodents and mammal (e.g., human) by administering intothe subject an effective amount of a compound of the invention. In someembodiments, the percentage of inhibiting exceeds 50%, 60%, 70%, 80%, or90%.

In some embodiments, the kinase is selected from the group consisting ofPI3 kinase including different isorforms such as PI3 kinase α, PI3kinase β, PI3 kinase γ, PI3 kinase δ; DNA-PK; mTor; Abl, VEGFR, Ephrinreceptor B4 (EphB4); TEK receptor tyrosine kinase (TIE2); FMS-relatedtyrosine kinase 3 (FLT-3); Platelet derived growth factor receptor(PDGFR); RET; ATM; ATR; hSmg-1; Hck; Src; Epidermal growth factorreceptor (EGFR); KIT; Inulsin Receptor (IR) and IGFR.

The present invention also provides methods for combination therapies inwhich an agent known to modulate other pathways, or other components ofthe same pathway, or even overlapping sets of target enzymes are used incombination with a compound of the present invention, or apharmaceutically acceptable salt, ester, prodrug, solvate, hydrate orderivative thereof. In one aspect, such therapy includes but is notlimited to the combination of the subject compound with chemotherapeuticagents, therapeutic antibodies, and radiation treatment, to provide asynergistic or additive therapeutic effect.

In one aspect, the compounds or pharmaceutical compositions of thepresent invention may present synergistic or additive efficacy whenadministered in combination with agents that inhibit IgE production oractivity. Such combination can reduce the undesired effect of high levelof IgE associated with the use of one or more PI3Kδ inhibitors, if sucheffect occurs. This may be particularly useful in treatment ofautoimmune and inflammatory disorders (AIID) such as rheumatoidarthritis. Additionally, the administration of PI3Kδ or PI3Kδ/γinhibitors of the present invention in combination with inhibitors ofmTOR may also exhibit synergy through enhanced inhibition of the PI3Kpathway.

In a separate but related aspect, the present invention provides acombination treatment of a disease associated with PI3Kδ comprisingadministering to a PI3Kδ inhibitor and an agent that inhibits IgEproduction or activity. Other exemplary PI3Kδ inhibitors are applicableand they are described, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 6,800,620. Such combinationtreatment is particularly useful for treating autoimmune andinflammatory diseases (AIID) including but not limited to rheumatoidarthritis.

Agents that inhibit IgE production are known in the art and they includebut are not limited to one or more of TEI-9874,2-(4-(6-cyclohexyloxy-2-naphtyloxy)phenylacetamide)benzoic acid,rapamycin, rapamycin analogs (i.e. rapalogs), TORC1 inhibitors, TORC2inhibitors, and any other compounds that inhibit mTORC1 and mTORC2.Agents that inhibit IgE activity include, for example, anti-IgEantibodies such as for example Omalizumab and TNX-901.

For treatment of autoimmune diseases, the subject compounds orpharmaceutical compositions can be used in combination with commonlyprescribed drugs including but not limited to Enbrel®, Remicade®,Humira®, Avonex®, and Rebif®. For treatment of respiratory diseaseses,the subject compounds or pharmaceutical compositions can be administeredin combination with commonly prescribed drugs including but not limitedto Xolair®, Advair®, Singulair®, and Spiriva®.

The compounds of the invention may be formulated or administered inconjunction with other agents that act to relieve the symptoms ofinflammatory conditions such as encephalomyelitis, asthma, and the otherdiseases described herein. These agents include non-steroidalanti-inflammatory drugs (NSAIDs), e.g. acetylsalicylic acid; ibuprofen;naproxen; indomethacin; nabumetone; tolmetin; etc. Corticosteroids areused to reduce inflammation and suppress activity of the immune system.The most commonly prescribed drug of this type is Prednisone.Chloroquine (Aralen) or hydroxychloroquine (Plaquenil) may also be veryuseful in some individuals with lupus. They are most often prescribedfor skin and joint symptoms of lupus. Azathioprine (Imuran) andcyclophosphamide (Cytoxan) suppress inflammation and tend to suppressthe immune system. Other agents, e.g. methotrexate and cyclosporin areused to control the symptoms of lupus. Anticoagulants are employed toprevent blood from clotting rapidly. They range from aspirin at very lowdose which prevents platelets from sticking, to heparin/coumadin.

In another one aspect, this invention also relates to methods andpharmaceutical compositions for inhibiting abnormal cell growth in amammal which comprises an amount of a compound of the present invention,or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, ester, prodrug, solvate, hydrateor derivative thereof, in combination with an amount of an anti-canceragent (e.g. a chemotherapeutic agent). Many chemotherapeutics arepresently known in the art and can be used in combination with thecompounds of the invention.

In some embodiments, the chemotherapeutic is selected from the groupconsisting of mitotic inhibitors, alkylating agents, anti-metabolites,intercalating antibiotics, growth factor inhibitors, cell cycleinhibitors, enzymes, topoisomerase inhibitors, biological responsemodifiers, anti-hormones, angiogenesis inhibitors, and anti-androgens.Non-limiting examples are chemotherapeutic agents, cytotoxic agents, andnon-peptide small molecules such as Gleevec (Imatinib Mesylate), Velcade(bortezomib), Casodex (bicalutamide), Iressa (gefitinib), and Adriamycinas well as a host of chemotherapeutic agents. Non-limiting examples ofchemotherapeutic agents include alkylating agents such as thiotepa andcyclosphosphamide (CYTOXAN™); alkyl sulfonates such as busulfan,improsulfan and piposulfan; aziridines such as benzodopa, carboquone,meturedopa, and uredopa; ethylenimines and methylamelamines includingaltretamine, triethylenemelamine, trietylenephosphoramide,triethylenethiophosphaoramide and trimethylolomelamine; nitrogenmustards such as chlorambucil, chlornaphazine, cholophosphamide,estramustine, ifosfamide, mechlorethamine, mechlorethamine oxidehydrochloride, melphalan, novembichin, phenesterine, prednimustine,trofosfamide, uracil mustard; nitrosureas such as carmustine,chlorozotocin, fotemustine, lomustine, nimustine, ranimustine;antibiotics such as aclacinomysins, actinomycin, authramycin, azaserine,bleomycins, cactinomycin, calicheamicin, carabicin, carminomycin,carzinophilin, Casodex™, chromomycins, dactinomycin, daunorubicin,detorubicin, 6-diazo-5-oxo-L-norleucine, doxorubicin, epirubicin,esorubicin, idarubicin, marcellomycin, mitomycins, mycophenolic acid,nogalamycin, olivomycins, peplomycin, potfiromycin, puromycin,quelamycin, rodorubicin, streptonigrin, streptozocin, tubercidin,ubenimex, zinostatin, zorubicin; anti-metabolites such as methotrexateand 5-fluorouracil (5-FU); folic acid analogues such as denopterin,methotrexate, pteropterin, trimetrexate; purine analogs such asfludarabine, 6-mercaptopurine, thiamiprine, thioguanine; pyrimidineanalogs such as ancitabine, azacitidine, 6-azauridine, carmofur,cytarabine, dideoxyuridine, doxifluridine, enocitabine, floxuridine,androgens such as calusterone, dromostanolone propionate, epitiostanol,mepitiostane, testolactone; anti-adrenals such as aminoglutethimide,mitotane, trilostane; folic acid replenisher such as frolinic acid;aceglatone; aldophosphamide glycoside; aminolevulinic acid; amsacrine;bestrabucil; bisantrene; edatraxate; defofamine; demecolcine;diaziquone; elfomithine; elliptinium acetate; etoglucid; galliumnitrate; hydroxyurea; lentinan; lonidamine; mitoguazone; mitoxantrone;mopidamol; nitracrine; pentostatin; phenamet; pirarubicin; podophyllinicacid; 2-ethylhydrazide; procarbazine; PSK.R™; razoxane; sizofiran;spirogermanium; tenuazonic acid; triaziquone;2,2′,2″-trichlorotriethyla-mine; urethan; vindesine; dacarbazine;mannomustine; mitobronitol; mitolactol; pipobroman; gacytosine;arabinoside (“Ara-C”); cyclophosphamide; thiotepa; taxanes, e.g.paclitaxel (TAXOL™, Bristol-Myers Squibb Oncology, Princeton, N.J.) anddocetaxel (TAXOTERE™, Rhone-Poulenc Rorer, Antony, France); retinoicacid; esperamicins; capecitabine; and pharmaceutically acceptable salts,acids or derivatives of any of the above. Also included as suitablechemotherapeutic cell conditioners are anti-hormonal agents that act toregulate or inhibit hormone action on tumors such as anti-estrogensincluding for example tamoxifen (Nolvadex™), raloxifene, aromataseinhibiting 4(5)-imidazoles, 4-hydroxytamoxifen, trioxifene, keoxifene,LY 117018, onapristone, and toremifene (Fareston); and anti-androgenssuch as flutamide, nilutamide, bicalutamide, leuprolide, and goserelin;chlorambucil; gemcitabine; 6-thioguanine; mercaptopurine; methotrexate;platinum analogs such as cisplatin and carboplatin; vinblastine;platinum; etoposide (VP-16); ifosfamide; mitomycin C; mitoxantrone;vincristine; vinorelbine; navelbine; novantrone; teniposide; daunomycin;aminopterin; xeloda; ibandronate; camptothecin-11 (CPT-11);topoisomerase inhibitor RFS 2000; difluoromethylornithine (DMFO). Wheredesired, the compounds or pharmaceutical composition of the presentinvention can be used in combination with commonly prescribedanti-cancer drugs such as Herceptin®, Avastin®, Erbitux®, Rituxan®,Taxol®, Arimidex®, Taxotere®, and Velcade®.

This invention further relates to a method for using the compounds orpharmaceutical composition in combination with radiation therapy ininhibiting abnormal cell growth or treating the hyperproliferativedisorder in the mammal. Techniques for administering radiation therapyare known in the art, and these techniques can be used in thecombination therapy described herein. The administration of the compoundof the invention in this combination therapy can be determined asdescribed herein.

Radiation therapy can be administered through one of several methods, ora combination of methods, including without limitation external-beamtherapy, internal radiation therapy, implant radiation, stereotacticradiosurgery, systemic radiation therapy, radiotherapy and permanent ortemporary interstitial brachytherapy. The term “brachytherapy,” as usedherein, refers to radiation therapy delivered by a spatially confinedradioactive material inserted into the body at or near a tumor or otherproliferative tissue disease site. The term is intended withoutlimitation to include exposure to radioactive isotopes (e.g. At-211,I-131, I-125, Y-90, Re-186, Re-188, Sm-153, Bi-212, P-32, andradioactive isotopes of Lu). Suitable radiation sources for use as acell conditioner of the present invention include both solids andliquids. By way of non-limiting example, the radiation source can be aradionuclide, such as I-125, I-131, Yb-169, Ir-192 as a solid source,I-125 as a solid source, or other radionuclides that emit photons, betaparticles, gamma radiation, or other therapeutic rays. The radioactivematerial can also be a fluid made from any solution of radionuclide(s),e.g., a solution of I-125 or I-131, or a radioactive fluid can beproduced using a slurry of a suitable fluid containing small particlesof solid radionuclides, such as Au-198, Y-90. Moreover, theradionuclide(s) can be embodied in a gel or radioactive micro spheres.

Without being limited by any theory, the compounds of the presentinvention can render abnormal cells more sensitive to treatment withradiation for purposes of killing and/or inhibiting the growth of suchcells. Accordingly, this invention further relates to a method forsensitizing abnormal cells in a mammal to treatment with radiation whichcomprises administering to the mammal an amount of a compound of thepresent invention or pharmaceutically acceptable salt, ester, prodrug,solvate, hydrate or derivative thereof, which amount is effective issensitizing abnormal cells to treatment with radiation. The amount ofthe compound, salt, or solvate in this method can be determinedaccording to the means for ascertaining effective amounts of suchcompounds described herein.

The compounds or pharmaceutical compositions of the present inventioncan be used in combination with an amount of one or more substancesselected from anti-angiogenesis agents, signal transduction inhibitors,and antiproliferative agents.

Anti-angiogenesis agents, such as MMP-2 (matrix-metalloprotienase 2)inhibitors, MMP-9 (matrix-metalloprotienase 9) inhibitors, and COX-11(cyclooxygenase 11) inhibitors, can be used in conjunction with acompound of the present invention and pharmaceutical compositionsdescribed herein. Examples of useful COX-II inhibitors include CELEBREX™(alecoxib), valdecoxib, and rofecoxib. Examples of useful matrixmetalloproteinase inhibitors are described in WO 96/33172 (publishedOct. 24, 1996), WO 96/27583 (published Mar. 7, 1996), European PatentApplication No. 97304971.1 (filed Jul. 8, 1997), European PatentApplication No. 99308617.2 (filed Oct. 29, 1999), WO 98/07697 (publishedFeb. 26, 1998), WO 98/03516 (published Jan. 29, 1998), WO 98/34918(published Aug. 13, 1998), WO 98/34915 (published Aug. 13, 1998), WO98/33768 (published Aug. 6, 1998), WO 98/30566 (published Jul. 16,1998), European Patent Publication 606,046 (published Jul. 13, 1994),European Patent Publication 931, 788 (published Jul. 28, 1999), WO90/05719 (published May 31, 1990), WO 99/52910 (published Oct. 21,1999), WO 99/52889 (published Oct. 21, 1999), WO 99/29667 (publishedJun. 17, 1999), PCT International Application No. PCT/IB98/01113 (filedJul. 21, 1998), European Patent Application No. 99302232.1 (filed Mar.25, 1999), Great Britain Patent Application No. 9912961.1 (filed Jun. 3,1999), U.S. Provisional Application No. 60/148,464 (filed Aug. 12,1999), U.S. Pat. No. 5,863,949 (issued Jan. 26, 1999), U.S. Pat. No.5,861,510 (issued Jan. 19, 1999), and European Patent Publication780,386 (published Jun. 25, 1997), all of which are incorporated hereinin their entireties by reference. Preferred MMP-2 and MMP-9 inhibitorsare those that have little or no activity inhibiting MMP-1. Morepreferred, are those that selectively inhibit MMP-2 and/or AMP-9relative to the other matrix-metalloproteinases (i.e., MAP-1, MMP-3,MMP-4, MMP-5, MMP-6, MMP-7, MMP-8, MMP-10, MMP-11, MMP-12, andMMP-13).Some specific examples of MMP inhibitors useful in the present inventionare AG-3340, RO 32-3555, and RS 13-0830.

The invention also relates to a method of and to a pharmaceuticalcomposition of treating a cardiovascular disease in a mammal whichcomprises an amount of a compound of the present invention, or apharmaceutically acceptable salt, ester, prodrug, solvate, hydrate orderivative thereof, or an isotopically-labeled derivative thereof, andan amount of one or more therapeutic agents use for the treatment ofcardiovascular diseases.

Exemplary agents for use in cardiovascular disease applications areanti-thrombotic agents, e.g., prostacyclin and salicylates, thrombolyticagents, e.g., streptokinase, urokinase, tissue plasminogen activator(TPA) and anisoylated plasminogen-streptokinase activator complex(APSAC), anti-platelets agents, e.g., acetyl-salicylic acid (ASA) andclopidrogel, vasodilating agents, e.g., nitrates, calcium channelblocking drugs, anti-proliferative agents, e.g., colchicine andalkylating agents, intercalating agents, growth modulating factors suchas interleukins, transformation growth factor-beta and congeners ofplatelet derived growth factor, monoclonal antibodies directed againstgrowth factors, anti-inflammatory agents, both steroidal andnon-steroidal, and other agents that can modulate vessel tone, function,arteriosclerosis, and the healing response to vessel or organ injurypost intervention.

Antibiotics can also be included in combinations or coatings comprisedby the invention. Moreover, a coating can be used to effect therapeuticdelivery focally within the vessel wall. By incorporation of the activeagent in a swellable polymer, the active agent will be released uponswelling of the polymer.

The compounds describe herein may be formulated or administered inconjunction with liquid or solid tissue barriers also known aslubricants. Examples of tissue barriers include, but are not limited to,polysaccharides, polyglycans, seprafilm, interceed and hyaluronic acid.

Medicaments which may be administered in conjunction with the compoundsdescribed herein include any suitable drugs usefully delivered byinhalation for example, analgesics, e.g. codeine, dihydromorphine,ergotamine, fentanyl or morphine; anginal preparations, e.g. diltiazem;antiallergics, e.g. cromoglycate, ketotifen or nedocromil;anti-infectives, e.g. cephalosporins, penicillins, streptomycin,sulphonamides, tetracyclines or pentamidine; antihistamines, e.g.methapyrilene; anti-inflammatories, e.g. beclomethasone, flunisolide,budesonide, tipredane, triamcinolone acetonide or fluticasone;antitussives, e.g. noscapine; bronchodilators, e.g. ephedrine,adrenaline, fenoterol, formoterol, isoprenaline, metaproterenol,phenylephrine, phenylpropanolamine, pirbuterol, reproterol, rimiterol,salbutamol, salmeterol, terbutalin, isoetharine, tulobuterol,orciprenaline or(−)-4-amino-3,5-dichloro-α-[[[6-[2-(2-pyridinyl)ethoxy]hexyl]-amino]methyl]benzenemethanol;diuretics, e.g. amiloride; anticholinergics e.g. ipratropium, atropineor oxitropium; hormones, e.g. cortisone, hydrocortisone or prednisolone;xanthines e.g. aminophylline, choline theophyllinate, lysinetheophyllinate or theophylline; and therapeutic proteins and peptides,e.g. insulin or glucagon. It will be clear to a person skilled in theart that, where appropriate, the medicaments may be used in the form ofsalts (e.g. as alkali metal or amine salts or as acid addition salts) oras esters (e.g. lower alkyl esters) or as solvates (e.g. hydrates) tooptimize the activity and/or stability of the medicament.

Other exemplary therapeutic agents useful for a combination therapyinclude but are not limited to agents as described above, radiationtherapy, hormone antagonists, hormones and their releasing factors,thyroid and antithyroid drugs, estrogens and progestins, androgens,adrenocorticotropic hormone; adrenocortical steroids and their syntheticanalogs; inhibitors of the synthesis and actions of adrenocorticalhormones, insulin, oral hypoglycemic agents, and the pharmacology of theendocrine pancreas, agents affecting calcification and bone turnover:calcium, phosphate, parathyroid hormone, vitamin D, calcitonin, vitaminssuch as water-soluble vitamins, vitamin B complex, ascorbic acid,fat-soluble vitamins, vitamins A, K, and E, growth factors, cytokines,chemokines, muscarinic receptor agonists and antagonists;anticholinesterase agents; agents acting at the neuromuscular junctionand/or autonomic ganglia; catecholamines, sympathomimetic drugs, andadrenergic receptor agonists or antagonists; and 5-hydroxytryptamine(5-HT, serotonin) receptor agonists and antagonists.

Therapeutic agents can also include agents for pain and inflammationsuch as histamine and histamine antagonists, bradykinin and bradykininantagonists, 5-hydroxytryptamine (serotonin), lipid substances that aregenerated by biotransformation of the products of the selectivehydrolysis of membrane phospholipids, eicosanoids, prostaglandins,thromboxanes, leukotrienes, aspirin, nonsteroidal anti-inflammatoryagents, analgesic-antipyretic agents, agents that inhibit the synthesisof prostaglandins and thromboxanes, selective inhibitors of theinducible cyclooxygenase, selective inhibitors of the induciblecyclooxygenase-2, autacoids, paracrine hormones, somatostatin, gastrin,cytokines that mediate interactions involved in humoral and cellularimmune responses, lipid-derived autacoids, eicosanoids, 3-adrenergicagonists, ipratropium, glucocorticoids, methylxanthines, sodium channelblockers, opioid receptor agonists, calcium channel blockers, membranestabilizers and leukotriene inhibitors.

Additional therapeutic agents contemplated herein include diuretics,vasopressin, agents affecting the renal conservation of water, rennin,angiotensin, agents useful in the treatment of myocardial ischemia,anti-hypertensive agents, angiotensin converting enzyme inhibitors,3-adrenergic receptor antagonists, agents for the treatment ofhypercholesterolemia, and agents for the treatment of dyslipidemia.

Other therapeutic agents contemplated include drugs used for control ofgastric acidity, agents for the treatment of peptic ulcers, agents forthe treatment of gastroesophageal reflux disease, prokinetic agents,antiemetics, agents used in irritable bowel syndrome, agents used fordiarrhea, agents used for constipation, agents used for inflammatorybowel disease, agents used for biliary disease, agents used forpancreatic disease.

Therapeutic agents used to treat protozoan infections, drugs used totreat Malaria, Amebiasis, Giardiasis, Trichomoniasis, Trypanosomiasis,and/or Leishmaniasis, and/or drugs used in the chemotherapy ofhelminthiasis.

Other therapeutic agents include antimicrobial agents, sulfonamides,trimethoprim-sulfamethoxazole quinolones, and agents for urinary tractinfections, penicillins, cephalosporins, and other, 3-Lactamantibiotics, an agent comprising an aminoglycoside, protein synthesisinhibitors, drugs used in the chemotherapy of tuberculosis,mycobacterium avium complex disease, and leprosy, antifungal agents,antiviral agents including nonretroviral agents and antiretroviralagents.

Examples of therapeutic antibodies that can be combined with a subjectcompound include but are not limited to anti-receptor tyrosine kinaseantibodies (cetuximab, panitumumab, trastuzumab), anti CD20 antibodies(rituximab, tositumomab), and other antibodies such as alemtuzumab,bevacizumab, and gemtuzumab.

Moreover, therapeutic agents used for immunomodulation, such asimmunomodulators, immunosuppressive agents, tolerogens, andimmunostimulants are contemplated by the methods herein. In addition,therapeutic agents acting on the blood and the blood-forming organs,hematopoietic agents, growth factors, minerals, and vitamins,anticoagulant, thrombolytic, and antiplatelet drugs.

Further therapeutic agents that can be combined with a subject compoundmay be found in Goodman and Gilman's “The Pharmacological Basis ofTherapeutics” Tenth Edition edited by Hardman, Limbird and Gilman or thePhysician's Desk Reference, both of which are incorporated herein byreference in their entirety.

The compounds described herein can be used in combination with theagents disclosed herein or other suitable agents, depending on thecondition being treated. Hence, in some embodiments the compounds of theinvention will be co-administer with other agents as described above.When used in combination therapy, the compounds described herein may beadministered with the second agent simultaneously or separately. Thisadministration in combination can include simultaneous administration ofthe two agents in the same dosage form, simultaneous administration inseparate dosage forms, and separate administration. That is, a compounddescribed herein and any of the agents described above can be formulatedtogether in the same dosage form and administered simultaneously.Alternatively, a compound of the present invention and any of the agentsdescribed above can be simultaneously administered, wherein both theagents are present in separate formulations. In another alternative, acompound of the present invention can be administered just followed byand any of the agents described above, or vice versa. In the separateadministration protocol, a compound of the present invention and any ofthe agents described above may be administered a few minutes apart, or afew hours apart, or a few days apart.

Administration of the compounds of the present invention can be effectedby any method that enables delivery of the compounds to the site ofaction. An effective amount of a compound of the invention may beadministered in either single or multiple doses by any of the acceptedmodes of administration of agents having similar utilities, includingrectal, buccal, intranasal and transdermal routes, by intra-arterialinjection, intravenously, intraperitoneally, parenterally,intramuscularly, subcutaneously, orally, topically, as an inhalant, orvia an impregnated or coated device such as a stent, for example, or anartery-inserted cylindrical polymer.

The amount of the compound administered will be dependent on the mammalbeing treated, the severity of the disorder or condition, the rate ofadministration, the disposition of the compound and the discretion ofthe prescribing physician. However, an effective dosage is in the rangeof about 0.001 to about 100 mg per kg body weight per day, preferablyabout 1 to about 35 mg/kg/day, in single or divided doses. For a 70 kghuman, this would amount to about 0.05 to 7 g/day, preferably about 0.05to about 2.5 g/day. In some instances, dosage levels below the lowerlimit of the aforesaid range may be more than adequate, while in othercases still larger doses may be employed without causing any harmfulside effect, e.g. bydividing such larger doses into several small dosesfor administration throughout the day.

In some embodiments, a compound of the invention is administered in asingle dose. Typically, such administration will be by injection, e.g.,intravenous injection, in order to introduce the agent quickly. However,other routes may be used as appropriate. A single dose of a compound ofthe invention may also be used for treatment of an acute condition.

In some embodiments, a compound of the invention is administered inmultiple doses. Dosing may be about once, twice, three times, fourtimes, five times, six times, or more than six times per day. Dosing maybe about once a month, once every two weeks, once a week, or once everyother day. In another embodiment a compound of the invention and anotheragent are administered together about once per day to about 6 times perday.

In another embodiment the administration of a compound of the inventionand an agent continues for less than about 7 days. In yet anotherembodiment the administration continues for more than about 6, 10, 14,28 days, two months, six months, or one year. In some cases, continuousdosing is achieved and maintained as long as necessary.

Administration of the agents of the invention may continue as long asnecessary. In some embodiments, an agent of the invention isadministered for more than 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 14, or 28 days. In someembodiments, an agent of the invention is administered for less than 28,14, 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, or 1 day. In some embodiments, an agent of theinvention is administered chronically on an ongoing basis, e.g., for thetreatment of chronic effects.

When a compound of the invention, is administered in a composition thatcomprises one or more agents, and the agent has a shorter half-life thanthe compound of the invention unit dose forms of the agent and thecompound of the invention may be adjusted accordingly.

The examples and preparations provided below further illustrate andexemplify the compounds of the present invention and methods ofpreparing such compounds. It is to be understood that the scope of thepresent invention is not limited in any way by the scope of thefollowing examples and preparations. In the following examples moleculeswith a single chiral center, unless otherwise noted, exist as a racemicmixture. Those molecules with two or more chiral centers, unlessotherwise noted, exist as a racemic mixture of diastereomers. Singleenantiomers/diastereomers may be obtained by methods known to thoseskilled in the art.

EXAMPLES Example 11-(6-(4-amino-7-isopropyl-7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-5-yl)benzo[d]thiazol-2-yl)-3-methylurea

A solution of 6-bromobenzo[d]thiazol-2-amine (I-2) (750 mg, 3.3 mmol) inDMF(50 mL) was cooled to 0° C., methylcarbamic chloride (1.23 g, 13.2mmol, 4 eq) was added slowly, and the mixture was stirred at roomtemperature overnight. The mixture was concentrated in vacuo, then water(20 mL) was added. The resulting solid was collected by filtration anddried in vacuo to afford the desired product,1-(6-bromobenzo[d]thiazol-2-yl)-3-methylurea (J-1) (900 mg, 95.7%) as awhite solid. The product obtained was used directly in the next stepwithout further purification.

1-(6-bromobenzo[d]thiazol-2-yl)-3-methylurea (J−1) (800 mg, 2.8 mmol),bis(pinacolato)diboron (853 mg, 3.36 mmol), Pd₂(dba)₃ (51 mg, 0.056mmol), 2-dicyclohexylphosphino-2′,4′,6′-triisopropylbiphenyl (80 mg,0.168 mmol) and potassium acetate (440 mg, 1.6 mmol) were dissolved in1,4-dioxane (15 mL) and heated to reflux for overnight under argon. Themixture was allowed to cool to room temperature, filtered, and the cakewas washed with 1,4-dioxane. The combined filtrate was concentrated invacuo and the residue was purified by flash column chromatographyeluting with MeOH/DCM (1/50) to afford the desired product,1-methyl-3-(6-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-1,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl)benzo[d]thiazol-2-yl)urea(J-2) (800 mg, 85%) as a white solid. ESI-MS m/z: 333.95 [M+1]⁺

A solution of 4-chloro-7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidine (201) (500 mg, 3.25mmol) and NIS (805 mg, 1.1 eq, 3.6 mmol) in DMF (1 mL) was stirred atroom temperature for 1 h. The mixture was concentrated in vacuo, thenwater (10 mL) was added. The resulting solid was collected byfiltration. Then dried in vacuo to afford the desired product,4-chloro-5-iodo-7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidine (202) (900 mg, 99% yield) asa off-white solid. ESI-MS m/z: 277.85 [M−H]⁻. The product obtained wasused directly in the next step without purification.

A solution of 4-chloro-5-iodo-7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidine (202) (900 mg,3.22 mmol) in DMF (50 mL) was heated to 70° C., K₂CO₃ (890 mg, 2 eq,6.45 mmol) was added slowly and then 2-bromopropane (363 uL, 3.87 mmol,1.2 eq) was added dropwise. The mixture was stirred overnight at 70° C.The mixture was cooled to room temperature and concentrated in vacuo.Then water (20 mL) was added. The resulting solid was collected byfiltration and dried in vacuo to afford the desired product,4-chloro-5-iodo-7-isopropyl-7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidine (301) (850 mg,82% yield) as a white solid. The product obtained was used directly inthe next step without purification.

A solution of 4-chloro-5-iodo-7-isopropyl-7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidine(301) (850 mg, 2.64 mmol) and NH₄OH (5 mL) in 1.4-dioxane (6 mL) wasstirred in a sealed-tube at 120-150° C. for 24 h. The mixture wasallowed to cool to room temperature and concentrated in vacuo, thenwater (20 mL) was added. The resulting solid was collected by filtrationand dried in vacuo to afford the desired product,5-iodo-7-isopropyl-7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4-amine (302) (640 mg, 80%yield) as a white solid. The product obtained was used directly in thenext step without further purification. ESI-MS m/z: 302.85 [M+H]⁺.

A mixture of 5-iodo-7-isopropyl-7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4-amine (302)(200 mg, 0.66 mmol),1-methyl-3-(6-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-1,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl)benzo[d]thiazol-2-yl)urea(J-2)(333 mg, 1.5 eq, 1.0 mmol), Pd(PPh₃)₄ (76 mg, 0.1 eq, 0.066 mmol)and Na₂CO₃ (2 N, 2 mL) in DME (10 mL) was stirred at reflux for 30 minunder Ar. The mixture was cooled to room temperature, and thenconcentrated in vacuo. Brine (10 mL) was added to the residue and thenextracted with ethyl acetate (3×30 mL). The combined organic layer waswashed with brine (10 mL), dried over MgSO₄ and filtered. The filtratewas concentrated in vacuo and the residue was purified by flash columnchromatography eluting with MeOH/DCM (1/30) to afford the desiredproduct,1-(6-(4-amino-7-isopropyl-7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-5-yl)benzo[d]thiazol-2-yl)-3-methylurea(303) (147 mg 58% yield) as a white solid ESI-MS m/z: 382.00 [M+1]⁺.

Example 21-(6-(4-amino-7-(tetrahydro-2H-pyran-4-yl)-7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-5-yl)benzo[d]thiazol-2-yl)-3-methylurea

A solution of 4-chloro-5-iodo-7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidine (202) (1.842g, 6.602 mmol) in DMF (50 mL) was heated to 70° C., K₂CO₃ (1.78 g, 2 eq,13.2 mmol) was added slowly and then tetrahydro-2H-pyran-4-yl4-methylbenzenesulfonate (2.2 g, 8.583 mmol, 1.3 eq) was added dropwise.The solution was stirred overnight at 70° C. The mixture wasconcentrated in vacuo. Then water (20 mL) was added. The resulting solidwas collected by filtration and dried in vacuo to afford the desiredproduct,4-chloro-5-iodo-7-(tetrahydro-2H-pyran-4-yl)-7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidine(401) (1.7 g, 82% yield) as a white solid. The product obtained was useddirectly in the next step without further purification.

A solution of4-chloro-5-iodo-7-(tetrahydro-2H-pyran-4-yl)-7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidine(401) (1.7 g, 2.64 mmol) and NH₄OH (15 mL) in 1.4-dioxane (5 mL) wasstirred in a sealed-tube at 120-150° C. for 24 h. The mixture wasallowed to cool to room temperature and then concentrated in vacuo, thenwater (30 mL) was added. The resulting solid was collected byfiltration. Then dried in vacuo to afford the desired product,5-iodo-7-(tetrahydro-2H-pyran-4-yl)-7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4-amine(402) (1.6 g, 80% yield) as a white solid. The product obtained was useddirectly in the next step without further purification. ESI-MS m/z:344.90 [M+H]⁺.

A mixture of5-iodo-7-(tetrahydro-2H-pyran-4-yl)-7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4-amine(402) (100 mg, 0.29 mmol),1-methyl-3-(6-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-1,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl)benzo[d]thiazol-2-yl)urea(J-2)(127 mg, 1.3 eq, 0.38 mmol), Pd(PPh₃)₄ (38 mg, 0.1 eq, 0.03 mmol)and Na₂CO₃ (2 N, 2 mL) in DME (10 mL) was stirred at reflux for 30 min.under argon. The mixture was cooled to room temperature, and thenconcentrated in vacuo. Brine (10 mL) was added to the residue and thenextracted with ethyl acetate (3×30 mL). The combined organic layer waswashed with brine (10 mL), dried over MgSO₄ and filtered. The filtratewas concentrated in vacuo and the residue was purified by flash columnchromatography eluting with MeOH/DCM (1/30) to afford the desiredproduct,1-(6-(4-amino-7-(tetrahydro-2H-pyran-4-yl)-7H-pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-5-yl)benzo[d]thiazol-2-yl)-3-methylurea(403) (60 mg 58% yield) as a white solid. ESI-MS m/z: 424.05 [M+1]⁺.

Example 3N-(6-(4-amino-1-isopropyl-1H-pyrazolo[3,4-d]pyrimidin-3-yl)benzo[d]thiazol-2-yl)acetamide

A solution of 200 mL of formamide and 3-amino-4-pyrazolecarbonitrile(101) (55 g, 0.509 mol) was stirred at reflux for 1 h. The reactionmixture was cooled to room temperature and 800 mL of water was added.The resulting solid was collected by filtration, rinsed with water anddried in vacuo to yield the desired product,1H-pyrazolo[3,4-d]pyrimidin-4-amine (102) (64 g, 93% yield) as anoff-white solid. ESI-MS (M+H)+m/z: 135.95

A solution of 3H-pyrazolo[3,4-d]pyrimidin-4-amine (102) (22.8 g, 0.169mol) and N-iodo-succinamide (45.3 g, 0.201 mol, 1.2 eq.) in DMF (100 mL)was stirred at 80 OC for 7-8 h. The resulting solid was collected byfiltration, rinsed with EtOH (100 mL) and dried in vacuo overnight toyield the desired product, 3-iodo-1H-pyrazolo[3,4-d]pyrimidin-4-amine(103) (31.7 g, 71.9% yield). ESI-MS (M+H)+m/z: 261.8

To a suspension of 3-iodo-1H-pyrazolo[3,4-d]pyrimidin-4-amine (103) (2.0g, 7.66 mmol) in anhydrous N,N-dimethylformamide (50 mL) under an argonatmosphere, potassium carbonate (4.23 g, 30.6 mmol) and 2-bromopropane(0.79 mL, 8.43 mmol) were added sequentially. The resulting mixture wasstirred at 80 OC for 5 h and then was allowed to cool to roomtemperature. The mixture was filtered. The filtrate was concentrated invacuo to half volume and then partitioned between water and ethylacetate. The organic layer was washed with brine, dried over sodiumsulfate and filtered. The filtrate was concentrated in vacuo to affordthe desired product,3-iodo-1-isopropyl-1H-pyrazolo[3,4-d]pyrimidin-4-amine (4) (1.86 g,80.2% yield) as a yellow solid. ESI-MS (M+H)+m/z: 303.9.

4-Bromoaniline (I−1) (120 g, 0.697 mol) and KSCN (69 g, 0.697 mol) weredissolved in a mixture of THF (500 mL) and AcOH (450 mL). The mixturewas stirred at RT for 30 min. and then was cooled to −30° C., solid NBS(124 g, 0.697 mol) was added slowly. The resulting mixture was stirredat −30° C. for 30 min., and then was allowed to warm to RT and stirredovernight. The solution was poured into stirred ice-water (3000 mL),ammonia solution was added to adjust the pH value to 9 and thenfiltered. The filtrate was extracted with ethyl acetate (2000 mL),washed with water (500 mL), dried over Na₂SO₄ and filtered. The filtratewas heated to reflux for 20 min., and then cooled to 0° C. The mixturewas filtered through silica gel (10 g), and the filtrate wasconcentrated in vacuo. The crude product was taken in chloroform (1500mL), heated to reflux for 30 min., and then cooled to 0° C. Theprecipitate was collected by filtration and further dried in vacuo toafford the desired product, 6-bromobenzo[d]thiazol-2-amine I-2 (78 g,49% yield) as a white solid. ESI-MS (M+H)+m/z: 230.90

To a stirred solution of 6-bromobenzo[d]thiazol-2-amine I-2 (229 g, 1.0mol), pyridine (237 g, 3.0 mol) and DMAP (1.0 g) in anhydrous THF (1800mL) at 10° C., CH₃COCl (87 g, 1.1 mol) was added dropwise and thetemperature was kept below 20° C. The resulting mixture was allowed towarm to RT and stirred overnight. The mixture was poured into H₂O (2000mL) and extracted with ethyl acetate (2000 mL). The organic layer wasdried over Na₂SO₄ and filtered. The filtrate was concentrated in vacuo.The crude product was suspended in chloroform (1200 mL), heated toreflux for 20 min. and then cooled to RT. The precipitate was collectedby filtration and further dried in vacuo to afford the desired product,N-(6-bromobenzo[d]thiazol-2-yl) acetamide (I-3) (231 g, 85% yield) as awhite solid. ESI-MS (M+H)⁺ m/z: 270.95

To a stirred mixture of N-(6-bromobenzo[d]thiazol-2-yl) acetamide (I-3)(32.5 g, 120 mmol) and4,4,4′,4′,5,5,5′,5′-octamethyl-2,2′-bi(1,3,2-dioxaborolane) (I-4) (36.5g, 144 mmol) in 1,4-dioxane (1000 mL), dppf(PdCl₂) (10 g, 12 mmol) andKOAc (70 g, 720 mmol) were added sequentially. The resulting mixture wasdegassed and back-filled with argon three times and then stirred at 110°C. for 2 h. The mixture was allowed to cool to RT, filtered throughsilica gel (10 g) and concentrated in vacuo. The residue was purified byflash column chromatography on silica gel (10-50% ethylacetate/petroether) to afford the desired product,N-(6-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-1,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl)benzo[d]thiazol-2-yl)acetamide(I-5) (35 g, 93% yield) as a white solid. ESI-MS (M+H)⁺ m/z: 317.05.

A mixture of 3-iodo-1-isopropyl-1H-pyrazolo[3,4-d]pyrimidin-4-amine(104) (1.88 g, 6.2 mmol),N-(6-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-1,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl)benzo[d]thiazol-2-yl)acetamide (I-5) (2.0 g, 6.3 mmol), Pd(OAc)₂ (0.28 g, 1.24 mmol),triphenyl phosphine (0.98 g, 3.7 mmol) and Na₂CO₃ (3.3 g, 31 mmol) wasdissolved in a mixture of DMF (5 mL), EtOH (2 mL) and H₂O (2 mL). Theresulting mixture was degassed and back-filled with argon three timesand then stirred at 80° C. for 4 h. The mixture was allowed to cool toroom temperature and filtered. The filtrate was concentrated in vacuo.The crude product was purified by chromatography eluting with DCM/MeOH(20/1) on a silica gel column (200-300 mesh) to afford the desiredproductN-(6-(4-amino-1-isopropyl-1H-pyrazolo[3,4-d]pyrimidin-3-yl)benzo[d]thiazol-2-yl)acetamide(501) (1.1 g, 48.2%) as a white solid. ESI-MS (M+H)⁺ m/z: 368.4.

Example 4N-(6-(4-amino-1-cyclopentyl-1H-pyrazolo[3,4-d]pyrimidin-3-yl)benzo[d]thiazol-2-yl)acetamide

To a suspension of 3-iodo-1H-pyrazolo[3,4-d]pyrimidin-4-amine (103) (2.0g, 7.66 mmol) in anhydrous N,N-dimethylformamide (50 mL) under an argonatmosphere, potassium carbonate (4.23 g, 30.6 mmol) andbromocyclopentane (1.37 g, 9.20 mmol, 1.2 eq) were added sequentially.The resulting mixture was stirred at 80° C. for 5 h and then was allowedto cool to room temperature. The mixture was filtered and the filtratewas concentrated to half volume in vacuo and then partitioned betweenwater and ethyl acetate. The organic layer was dried over sodiumsulfate, filtered and concentrated in vacuo to afford the desiredproduct, 1-cyclopentyl-3-iodo-1H-pyrazolo[3,4-d]pyrimidin-4-amine (601)(1.27 g, 50.4% yield) as a yellow solid. ESI-MS (M+H)⁺ m/z: 330.1.

A mixture of 3-iodo-1-isopropyl-1H-pyrazolo[3,4-d]pyrimidin-4-amine (601(1.21 g, 3.68 mmol),N-(6-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-1,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl)benzo[d]thiazol-2-yl)acetamide (I-5) (1.18 g, 3.71 mmol), Pd(OAc)₂ (0.17 g, 0.75 mmol),triphenyl phosphine (0.59 g, 2.22 mmol) and Na₂CO₃ (1.98 g, 18.6 mmol)was dissolved in a mixture of DMF (3 mL), EtOH (1.5 mL) and H₂O (1.5mL). The resulting mixture was degassed and back-filled with argon threetimes and then stirred at 80° C. for 4 h. The mixture was allowed tocool to room temperature and filtered. The filtrate was concentrated invacuo. The crude product was purified by flash column chromatography onsilica gel (200-300 mesh) eluting with DCM/MeOH (20/1) to give thedesired product,N-(6-(4-amino-1-cyclopentyl-1H-pyrazolo[3,4-d]pyrimidin-3-yl)benzo[d]thiazol-2-yl)acetamide(602) (0.52 g, 35.9%) as an off-white solid. ESI-MS (M+H)+m/z: 394.1.

Example 51-isopropyl-3-(2-(methylamino)benzo[d]thiazol-6-yl)-1H-pyrazolo[3,4-d]pyrimidin-4-amine

Iso-Pentyl nitrite (0.9 mL, 6.8 mmol) and copper (II) chloride (0.938 g,5.5 mmol) were suspended in CH₃CN (25 mL), and the mixture was stirredat 65° C. for 30 min. A solution of 6-bromobenzo[d]thiazol-2-amine (I-2)(1 g, 4.37 mmol) in THF (20 mL) was added dropwise, and the resultingmixture was stirred at 85° C. for 1 h. The mixture was allowed to coolto RT, poured into 20% HCl (200 mL), filtered, and the cake was washedwith water (50 mL). The crude product was purified by flash columnchromatography on silica gel (200-300 mesh) eluting withpetroether/ethyl acetate (40/1) to give the desired product,6-bromo-2-chlorobenzo[d]thiazole (701) (0.58 g, 53.7% yield) as a palesolid. ESI-MS (M+H)+m/z: 247.9. [00394]6-Bromo-2-chlorobenzo[d]thiazole(701) (0.5 g, 2.0 mmol) was dissolved in methanamine solution (20 ml) ina sealed tube, and the resulting mixture was stirred at 60° C.overnight. The mixture was allowed to cool to RT, concentrated in vacuoand water (20 mL) was added. The solid was collected by filtration toafford the desired product, 6-bromo-N-methylbenzo[d]thiazol-2-amine(702) (0.43 g, 87.9% yield). ESI-MS (M+H)+m/z: 242.8.

To a stirred mixture of 6-bromo-N-methylbenzo[d]thiazol-2-amine (702)(70 mg, 0.29 mmol) and4,4,4′,4′,5,5,5′,5′-octamethyl-2,2′-bi(1,3,2-dioxaborolane) (I-4)(88 mg,0.35 mmol) in 1,4-dioxane (7 mL), dppf(PdCl₂) (24 mg, 0.029 mmol) andKOAc (45 mg, 0.46 mmol) were added sequentially. The resulting mixturewas degassed and back-filled with argon three times and then stirred at110° C. for 8 h. The mixture was allowed to cool to RT and concentratedin vacuo. The residue was purified by flash column chromatography onsilica gel (DCM/MeOH=80/1) to affordN-methyl-6-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-1,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl)benzo[d]thiazol-2-amine(703) (40 mg, 47.6% yield) as a pale solid. ESI-MS (M+H)⁺ m/z: 291.00.

A mixture of 3-iodo-1-isopropyl-1H-pyrazolo[3,4-d]pyrimidin-4-amine(104) (47 mg, 0.16 mmol),N-methyl-6-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-1,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl)benzo[d]thiazol-2-amine(703 (37 mg, 0.13 mmol), Pd(OAc)₂ (6 mg, 0.027 mmol), triphenylphosphine (20 mg, 0.076 mmol) and Na₂CO₃ (69 mg, 0.65 mmol) wasdissolved in a mixture of DMF (4 mL), EtOH (4 mL) and H₂O (2 mL). Theresulting mixture was degassed and back-filled with argon three timesand then stirred at 90° C. for 1.5 h. The mixture was allowed to cool toroom temperature and filtered. The filtrate was concentrated in vacuo.The crude product was purified by flash chromatography on silica gel(200-300 mesh) eluting with DCM/MeOH (20/1) to give the desired product1-isopropyl-3-(2-(methylamino)benzo[d]thiazol-6-yl)-1H-pyrazolo[3,4-d]pyrimidin-4-amine(704) (15 mg, 34.1%) as a pale solid. ESI-MS (M+H)⁺ m/z: 340.05.

Example 6 In Vitro Activity of Selected Compounds of Formula I

TABLE 4 IC50 values for selected assays. 50 nm or less 100 nm or less500 nm or less 1000 nm or less >1000 nm IC₅₀ results (Compound #)(Compound #) (Compound #) (Compound #) (Compound #) mTORC 1, 3, 4, 5,11, 10 8, 9, 12, 15, 15, 16, 17, 2, 6, 7, 13, 14, 19, 20, 21, 22, 18 23PI3K alpha 4, 20, 21, 22, 5, 10, 11, 1, 3, 9, 12, 19, 6, 8, 16, 2, 7,13, 14, 15, 23 30 17, 18 PI3K beta 21, 22, 23 20 1, 3, 4, 5, 10, 11, 12,15, 18,19 PI3K gamma 1, 3, 4, 5, 10, 12, 18 11, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, PI3Kdelta 1, 4, 5, 19, 20, 3, 10, 11, 12, 18 21, 22, 23 PC3 proliferation 2221 23

TABLE 5 Structures corresponding to the compound number listed in Table4.

Compound 1

Compound 2

Compound 3

Compound 4

Compound 5

Compound 6

Compound 7

Compound 8

Compound 9

Compound 10

Compound 11

Compound 12

Compound 13

Compound 14

Compound 15

Compound 16

Compound 17

Compound 18

Compound 19

Compound 20

Compound 21

Compound 22

Compound 23

Example 7 Expression and Inhibition Assays of p110α/p85α, p110β/p85α,p110δ/p85α, and p110γ

Class I PI3-Ks can be either purchased (p110α/p85α, p110β/p85a,p110δ/p85 (from Upstate, and p110γ from Sigma) or expressed aspreviously described (Knight et al., 2004). IC50 values are measuredusing either a standard TLC assay for lipid kinase activity (describedbelow) or a high-throughput membrane capture assay. Kinase reactions areperformed by preparing a reaction mixture containing kinase, inhibitor(2% DMSO final concentration), buffer (25 mM HEPES, pH 7.4, 10 mMMgCl2), and freshly sonicated phosphatidylinositol (100 g/ml). Reactionsare initiated by the addition of ATP containing 10 μCi of γ-32P-ATP to afinal concentration 10 or 100 μM and allowed to proceed for 5 minutes atroom temperature. For TLC analysis, reactions are then terminated by theaddition of 105 μl 1N HCl followed by 160 μl CHC13:MeOH (1:1). Thebiphasic mixture is vortexed, briefly centrifuged, and the organic phaseis transferred to a new tube using a gel loading pipette tip precoatedwith CHCl₃. This extract is spotted on TLC plates and developed for 3-4hours in a 65:35 solution of n-propanol:1M acetic acid. The TLC platesare then dried, exposed to a phosphorimager screen (Storm, Amersham),and quantitated. For each compound, kinase activity is measured at 10-12inhibitor concentrations representing two-fold dilutions from thehighest concentration tested (typically, 200 μM). For compounds showingsignificant activity, IC50 determinations are repeated two to fourtimes, and the reported value is the average of these independentmeasurements.

Other commercial kits or systems for assaying PI3-K activities areavailable. The commercially available kits or systems can be used toscreen for inhibitors and/or agonists of PI3-Ks including but notlimited to PI 3-Kinase α, β, δ, and γ. Anr exemplary system is PI3-Kinase (human) HTRF™ Assay from Upstate. The assay can be carried outaccording to the procedures suggested by the manufacturer. Briefly, theassay is a time resolved FRET assay that indirectly measures PIP3product formed by the activity of a PI3-K. The kinase reaction isperformed in a microtitre plate (e.g., a 384 well microtitre plate). Thetotal reaction volume is approximately 20 ul per well. In the firststep, each well receives 2 ul of test compound in 20% dimethylsulphoxideresulting in a 2% DMSO final concentration. Next, approximately 14.5 ulof a kinase/PIP2 mixture (diluted in 1× reaction buffer) is added perwell for a final concentration of 0.25-0.3 ug/ml kinase and 10 uM PIP2.The plate is sealed and incubated for 15 minutes at room temperature. Tostart the reaction, 3.5 ul of ATP (diluted in 1× reaction buffer) isadded per well for a final concentration of 10 uM ATP. The plate issealed and incubated for 1 hour at room temperature. The reaction isstopped by adding 5 ul of Stop Solution per well and then 5 ul ofDetection Mix is added per well. The plate is sealed, incubated for 1hour at room temperature, and then read on an appropriate plate reader.Data is analyzed and IC50s are generated using GraphPad Prism 5.

Example 8 Expression and Inhibition Assays of Abl

The compounds described herein can be assayed in triplicate againstrecombinant full-length Abl or Abl (T315I) (Upstate) in an assaycontaining 25 mM HEPES, pH 7.4, 10 mM MgCl2, 200 μM ATP (2.5 μCi ofγ-32P-ATP), and 0.5 mg/mL BSA. The optimized Abl peptide substrateEAIYAAPFAKKK is used as phosphoacceptor (200 μM). Reactions areterminated by spotting onto phosphocellulose sheets, which are washedwith 0.5% phosphoric acid (approximately 6 times, 5-10 minutes each).Sheets are dried and the transferred radioactivity quantitated byphosphorimaging.

Example 9 Expression and Inhibition Assays of Hck

The compounds described herein can be assayed in triplicate againstrecombinant full-length Hck in an assay containing 25 mM HEPES, pH 7.4,10 mM MgCl2, 200 μM ATP (2.5 μCi of γ-32P-ATP), and 0.5 mg/mL BSA. Theoptimized Src family kinase peptide substrate EIYGEFKKK is used asphosphoacceptor (200 μM). Reactions are terminated by spotting ontophosphocellulose sheets, which are washed with 0.5% phosphoric acid(approximately 6 times, 5-10 minutes each). Sheets are dried and thetransferred radioactivity quantitated by phosphorimaging.

Example 10 Expression and Inhibition Assays of Inulsin Receptor (IR)

The compounds described herein can be assayed in triplicate againstrecombinant insulin receptor kinase domain (Upstate) in an assaycontaining 25 mM HEPES, pH 7.4, 10 mM MgCl2, 10 mM MnCl2, 200 μM ATP(2.5 μCi of γ-32P-ATP), and 0.5 mg/mL BSA. Poly E-Y (Sigma; 2 mg/mL) isused as a substrate. Reactions are terminated by spotting ontonitrocellulose, which is washed with 1M NaCl/1% phosphoric acid(approximately 6 times, 5-10 minutes each). Sheets are dried and thetransferred radioactivity quantitated by phosphorimaging.

Example 11 Expression and Inhibition Assays of Src

The compounds described herein can be assayed in triplicate againstrecombinant full-length Src or Src (T338I) in an assay containing 25 mMHEPES, pH 7.4, 10 mM MgCl2, 200 μM ATP (2.5 μCi of γ-32P-ATP), and 0.5mg/mL BSA. The optimized Src family kinase peptide substrate EIYGEFKKKis used as phosphoacceptor (200 μM). Reactions are terminated byspotting onto phosphocellulose sheets, which are washed with 0.5%phosphoric acid (approximately 6 times, 5-10 minutes each). Sheets weredried and the transferred radioactivity quantitated by phosphorimaging.

Example 12 Expression and Inhibition Assays of DNA-PK (DNAK)

DNA-PK can be purchased from Promega and assayed using the DNA-PK AssaySystem (Promega) according to the manufacturer's instructions.

Example 13 Expression and Inhibition Assays mTOR

The compounds described herein can be tested against recombinant mTOR(Invitrogen) in an assay containing 50 mM HEPES, pH 7.5, 1 mM EGTA, 10mM MgCl2, 2.5 mM, 0.01% Tween, 10 μM ATP (2.5 μCi of μ-32P-ATP), and 3μg/mL BSA. Rat recombinant PHAS-1/4EBP1 (Calbiochem; 2 mg/mL) is used asa substrate. Reactions are terminated by spotting onto nitrocellulose,which is washed with 1M NaCl/1% phosphoric acid (approximately 6 times,5-10 minutes each). Sheets are dried and the transferred radioactivityquantitated by phosphorimaging.

Other kits or systems for assaying mTOR activity are commerciallyavaiable. For instance, one can use Invitrogen's LanthaScreen™ Kinaseassay to test the inhibitors of mTOR disclosed herein. This assay is atime resolved FRET platform that measures the phosphorylation of GFPlabeled 4EBP1 by mTOR kinase. The kinase reaction is performed in awhite 384 well microtitre plate. The total reaction volume is 20 ul perwell and the reaction buffer composition is 50 mM HEPES pH7.5, 0.01%Polysorbate 20, 1 mM EGTA, 10 mM MnC12, and 2 mM DTT. In the first step,each well receives 2 ul of test compound in 20% dimethylsulphoxideresulting in a 2% DMSO final concentration. Next, 8 ul of mTOR dilutedin reaction buffer is added per well for a 60 ng/ml final concentration.To start the reaction, 10 ul of an ATP/GFP-4EBP1 mixture (diluted inreaction buffer) is added per well for a final concentration of 10 uMATP and 0.5 uM GFP-4EBP1. The plate is sealed and incubated for 1 hourat room temperature. The reaction is stopped by adding 10 ul per well ofa Tb-anti-pT46 4EBP1 antibody/EDTA mixture (diluted in TR-FRET buffer)for a final concentration of 1.3 nM antibody and 6.7 mM EDTA. The plateis sealed, incubated for 1 hour at room temperature, and then read on aplate reader set up for LanthaScreen™ TR-FRET. Data is analyzed andIC50s are generated using GraphPad Prism 5.

Example 14 Expression and Inhibition Assays of Vascular EndothelialGrowth Receptor

The compounds described herein can be tested against recombinant KDRreceptor kinase domain (Invitrogen) in an assay containing 25 mM HEPES,pH 7.4, 10 mM MgCl2, 0.1% BME, 10 μM ATP (2.5 μCi of μ-32P-ATP), and 3μg/mL BSA. Poly E-Y (Sigma; 2 mg/mL) is used as a substrate. Reactionsare terminated by spotting onto nitrocellulose, which is washed with 1MNaCl/1% phosphoric acid (approximately 6 times, 5-10 minutes each).Sheets are dried and the transferred radioactivity quantitated byphosphorimaging.

Example 15 Expression and Inhibition Assays of Ephrin receptor B4(EphB4)

The compounds described herein can be tested against recombinant Ephrinreceptor B4 kinase domain (Invitrogen) in an assay containing 25 mMHEPES, pH 7.4, 10 mM MgCl2, 0.1% BME, 10 μM ATP (2.5 μCi of μ-32P-ATP),and 3 μg/mL BSA. Poly E-Y (Sigma; 2 mg/mL) is used as a substrate.Reactions are terminated by spotting onto nitrocellulose, which iswashed with 1M NaCl/1% phosphoric acid (approximately 6 times, 5-10minutes each). Sheets are dried and the transferred radioactivityquantitated by phosphorimaging.

Example 16 Expression and Inhibition Assays of Epidermal Growth FactorReceptor (EGFR)

The compounds described herein can be tested against recombinant EGFreceptor kinase domain (Invitrogen) in an assay containing 25 mM HEPES,pH 7.4, 10 mM MgCl2, 0.1% BME, 10 μM ATP (2.5 μCi of μ-32P-ATP), and 3μg/mL BSA. Poly E-Y (Sigma; 2 mg/mL) is used as a substrate. Reactionsare terminated by spotting onto nitrocellulose, which is washed with 1MNaCl/1% phosphoric acid (approximately 6 times, 5-10 minutes each).Sheets are dried and the transferred radioactivity quantitated byphosphorimaging.

Example 17 Expression and Inhibition Assays of KIT Assay

The compounds described herein can be tested against recombinant KITkinase domain (Invitrogen) in an assay containing 25 mM HEPES, pH 7.4,10 mM MgCl2, 1 mM DTT, 10 mM MnC12, 10 μM ATP (2.5 μCi of μ-32P-ATP),and 3 μg/mL BSA. Poly E-Y (Sigma; 2 mg/mL) is used as a substrate.Reactions are terminated by spotting onto nitrocellulose, which iswashed with 1M NaCl/1% phosphoric acid (approximately 6 times, 5-10minutes each). Sheets are dried and the transferred radioactivityquantitated by phosphorimaging.

Example 18 Expression and Inhibition Assays of RET

The compounds described herein can be tested against recombinant RETkinase domain (Invitrogen) in an assay containing 25 mM HEPES, pH 7.4,10 mM MgCl2, 2.5 mM DTT, 10 μM ATP (2.5 μCi of μ-32P-ATP), and 3 μg/mLBSA. The optimized Abl peptide substrate EAIYAAPFAKKK is used asphosphoacceptor (200 μM). Reactions are terminated by spotting ontophosphocellulose sheets, which are washed with 0.5% phosphoric acid(approximately 6 times, 5-10 minutes each). Sheets are dried and thetransferred radioactivity quantitated by phosphorimaging.

Example 19 Expression and Inhibition Assays of Platelet derived growthfactor receptor (PDGFR)

The compounds described herein can be tested against recombinant PDGreceptor kinase domain (Invitrogen) in an assay containing 25 mM HEPES,pH 7.4, 10 mM MgCl2, 2.5 mM DTT, 10 μM ATP (2.5 μCi of μ-32P-ATP), and 3μg/mL BSA. The optimized Abl peptide substrate EAIYAAPFAKKK is used asphosphoacceptor (200 μM). Reactions are terminated by spotting ontophosphocellulose sheets, which are washed with 0.5% phosphoric acid(approximately 6 times, 5-10 minutes each). Sheets are dried and thetransferred radioactivity quantitated by phosphorimaging.

Example 20 Expression and Inhibition Assays of FMS-related tyrosinekinase 3 (FLT-3)

The compounds described herein can be tested against recombinant FLT-3kinase domain (Invitrogen) in an assay containing 25 mM HEPES, pH 7.4,10 mM MgCl2, 2.5 mM DTT, 10 μM ATP (2.5 μCi of μ-32P-ATP), and 3 μg/mLBSA. The optimized Abl peptide substrate EAIYAAPFAKKK is used asphosphoacceptor (200 μM). Reactions are terminated by spotting ontophosphocellulose sheets, which are washed with 0.5% phosphoric acid(approximately 6 times, 5-10 minutes each). Sheets are dried and thetransferred radioactivity quantitated by phosphorimaging.

Example 21 Expression and Inhibition Assays of TEK Receptor TyrosineKinase (TIE2)

The compounds described herein can be tested against recombinant TIE2kinase domain (Invitrogen) in an assay containing 25 mM HEPES, pH 7.4,10 mM MgCl2, 2 mM DTT, 10 mM MnCl2, 10 μM ATP (2.5 μCi of μ-32P-ATP),and 3 μg/mL BSA. Poly E-Y (Sigma; 2 mg/mL) is used as a substrate.Reactions are terminated by spotting onto nitrocellulose, which iswashed with 1M NaCl/1% phosphoric acid (approximately 6 times, 5-10minutes each). Sheets are dried and the transferred radioactivityquantitated by phosphorimaging.

Example 22 B Cell Activation and Proliferation Assay

The ability of one or more subject compounds to inhibit B cellactivitation and proliferation is determined according to standardprocedures known in the art. For example, an in vitro cellularproliferation assay is established that measures the metabolic activityof live cells. The assay is performed in a 96 well microtiter plateusing Alamar Blue reduction. Balb/c splenic B cells are purified over aFicoll-Paque™ PLUS gradient followed by magnetic cell separation using aMACS B cell Isolation Kit (Miletenyi). Cells are plated in 90 ul at50,000 cells/well in B Cell Media (RPMI+10% FBS+Penn/Strep+50 uM bME+5mM HEPES). A compound disclosed herein is diluted in B Cell Media andadded in a 10 ul volume. Plates are incubated for 30 min at 37 C and 5%CO₂ (0.2% DMSO final concentration). A 50 ul B cell stimulation cocktailis then added containing either 10 ug/ml LPS or 5 ug/ml F(ab′)2 Donkeyanti-mouse IgM plus 2 ng/ml recombinant mouse IL4 in B Cell Media.Plates are incubated for 72 hours at 37° C. and 5% CO₂. A volume of 15uL of Alamar Blue reagent is added to each well and plates are incubatedfor 5 hours at 37 C and 5% CO₂. Alamar Blue fluoresce is read at560Ex/590Em, and IC50 values are calculated using GraphPad Prism 5.

Example 23 Tumor Cell Line Proliferation Assay

The ability of one or more subject compounds to inhibit tumor cell lineproliferation is determined according to standard procedures known inthe art. For instance, an in vitro cellular proliferation assay can beperformed to measure the metabolic activity of live cells. The assay isperformed in a 96 well microtiter plate using Alamar Blue reduction.Human tumor cell lines are obtained from ATCC (e.g., MCF7, U-87 MG,MDA-MB-468, PC-3), grown to confluency in T75 flasks, trypsinized with0.25% trypsin, washed one time with Tumor Cell Media (DMEM+10% FBS), andplated in 90 ul at 5,000 cells/well in Tumor Cell Media. A compounddisclosed herein is diluted in Tumor Cell Media and added in a 10 ulvolume. Plates are incubated for 72 hours at 37 C and 5% CO₂. A volumeof 10 uL of Alamar Blue reagent is added to each well and plates areincubated for 3 hours at 37 C and 5% CO₂. Alamar Blue fluoresce is readat 560Ex/590Em, and IC50 values are calculated using GraphPad Prism 5.

Example 24 Antitumor Activity In Vivo

The compounds described herein can be evaluated in a panel of human andmurine tumor models.

Paclitaxel-Refractory Tumor Models

1. Clinically-Derived Ovarian Carcinoma Model.

This tumor model is established from a tumor biopsy of an ovarian cancerpatient. Tumor biopsy is taken from the patient.

The compounds described herein are administered to nude mice bearingstaged tumors using an every 2 days.times.5 schedule.

2. A2780Tax Human Ovarian Carcinoma Xenograft (Mutated Tubulin)

A2780Tax is a paclitaxel-resistant human ovarian carcinoma model. It isderived from the sensitive parent A2780 line by co-incubation of cellswith paclitaxel and verapamil, an MDR-reversal agent. Its resistancemechanism has been shown to be non-MDR related and is attributed to amutation in the gene encoding the beta-tubulin protein.

The compounds described herein can be administered to mice bearingstaged tumors on an every 2 days.times.5 schedule.

3. HCT116/VM46 Human Colon Carcinoma Xenograft (Multi-Drug Resistant).

HCT116/VM46 is an MDR-resistant colon carcinoma developed from thesensitive HCT116 parent line. In vivo, grown in nude mice, HCT116/VM46has consistently demonstrated high resistance to paclitaxel.

The compounds described herein can be administered to mice bearingstaged tumors on an every 2 days×5 schedule.

4. M5076 Murine Sarcoma Model

M5076 is a mouse fibrosarcoma that is inherently refractory topaclitaxel in vivo.

The compounds described herein can be administered to mice bearingstaged tumors on an every 2 days×5 schedule.

One or more compounds of the invention can be used in combination othertherapeutic agents in vivo in the multidrug resistant human coloncarcinoma xenografts HCT/VM46 or any other model known in the artincluding those described herein.

Example 25 Microsome Stability Assay

The stability of one or more subject compounds is determined accordingto standard procedures known in the art. For example, stability of oneor more subject compounds is established by an in vitro assay. Inparticular, an in vitro microsome stability assay is established thatmeasures stability of one or more subject compounds when reacting withmouse, rat or human microsomes from liver. The microsome reaction withcompounds is performed in 1.5 mL Eppendorf tube. Each tube contains 0.1μL of 10.0 mg/ml NADPH; 75 μL of 20.0 mg/ml mouse, rat or human livermicrosome; 0.4 μL of 0.2 M phosphate buffer, and 425 μL of ddH₂O.Negative control (without NADPH) tube contains 75 μL of 20.0 mg/mlmouse, rat or human liver microsome; 0.4 μL of 0.2 M phosphate buffer,and 525 μL of ddH₂O. The reaction is started by adding 1.0 μL of 10.0 mMtested compound. The reaction tubes are incubated at 37° C. 100 μLsample is collected into new Eppendorf tube containing 300 μL coldMethanol at 0, 5, 10, 15, 30 and 60 minutes of reaction. Samples arecentrifuged at 15,000 rpm to remove protein. Supernatant of centrifugedsample is transferred to new tube. Concentration of stable compoundafter reaction with microsome in the supernatant is measured by LiquidChromatography/Mass Spectrometry (LC-MS).

Example 26 Plasma Stability Assay

The stability of one or more subject compounds in plasma is determinedaccording to standard procedures known in the art. See, e.g., RapidCommun. Mass Spectrom., 10: 1019-1026. The following procedure is anHPLC-MS/MS assay using human plasma; other species including monkey,dog, rat, and mouse are also available. Frozen, heparinized human plasmais thawed in a cold water bath and spun for 10 minutes at 2000 rpm at 4°C. prior to use. A subject compound is added from a 400 μM stocksolution to an aliquot of pre-warmed plasma to give a final assay volumeof 400 μL (or 800 μL for half-life determination), containing 5 μM testcompound and 0.5% DMSO. Reactions are incubated, with shaking, for 0minutes and 60 minutes at 37° C., or for 0, 15, 30, 45 and 60 minutes at37 C for half life determination. Reactions are stopped by transferring50 μL of the incubation mixture to 200 μL of ice-cold acetonitrile andmixed by shaking for 5 minutes. The samples are centrifuged at 6000×gfor 15 minutes at 4° C. and 120 μL of supernatant removed into cleantubes. The samples are then evaporated to dryness and submitted foranalysis by HPLC-MS/MS.

Where desired, one or more control or reference compounds (5 μM) aretested simultaneously with the test compounds: one compound,propoxycaine, with low plasma stability and another compound,propantheline, with intermediate plasma stability.

Samples are reconstituted in acetonitrile/methanol/water (1/1/2, v/v/v)and analyzed via (RP)HPLC-MS/MS using selected reaction monitoring(SRM). The HPLC conditions consist of a binary LC pump with autosampler,a mixed-mode, C12, 2×20 mm column, and a gradient program. Peak areascorresponding to the analytes are recorded by HPLC-MS/MS. The ratio ofthe parent compound remaining after 60 minutes relative to the amountremaining at time zero, expressed as percent, is reported as plasmastability. In case of half-life determination, the half-life isestimated from the slope of the initial linear range of the logarithmiccurve of compound remaining (%) vs. time, assuming first order kinetics.

Example 27 Chemical Stability

The chemical stability of one or more subject compounds is determinedaccording to standard procedures known in the art. The following detailsan exemplary procedure for ascertaining chemical stability of a subjectcompound. The default buffer used for the chemical stability assay isphosphate-buffered saline (PBS) at pH 7.4; other suitable buffers can beused. A subject compound is added from a 100 μM stock solution to analiquot of PBS (in duplicate) to give a final assay volume of 400 μL,containing 5 μM test compound and 1% DMSO (for half-life determination atotal sample volume of 700 μL is prepared). Reactions are incubated,with shaking, for 0 minutes and 24 hours at 37° C.; for half-lifedetermination samples are incubated for 0, 2, 4, 6, and 24 hours.Reactions are stopped by adding immediately 100 μL of the incubationmixture to 100 μL of acetonitrile and vortexing for 5 minutes. Thesamples are then stored at −20° C. until analysis by HPLC-MS/MS. Wheredesired, a control compound or a reference compound such as chlorambucil(5 jM) is tested simultaneously with a subject compound of interest, asthis compound is largely hydrolyzed over the course of 24 hours. Samplesare analyzed via (RP)HPLC-MS/MS using selected reaction monitoring(SRM). The HPLC conditions consist of a binary LC pump with autosampler,a mixed-mode, C12, 2×20 mm column, and a gradient program. Peak areascorresponding to the analytes are recorded by HPLC-MS/MS. The ratio ofthe parent compound remaining after 24 hours relative to the amountremaining at time zero, expressed as percent, is reported as chemicalstability. In case of half-life determination, the half-life isestimated from the slope of the initial linear range of the logarithmiccurve of compound remaining (%) vs. time, assuming first order kinetics.

Example 28 Akt Kinase Assay

Cells comprising components of the Akt/mTOR pathway, including but notlimited to L6 myoblasts, B-ALL cells, B-cells, T-cells, leukemia cells,bone marrow cells, p190 transduced cells, philladelphia chromosomepositive cells (Ph+), and mouse embryonic fibroblasts, are typicallygrown in cell growth media such as DMEM supplemented with fetal bovineserum and/or antibiotics, and grown to confluency.

In order to compare the effect of one or more compounds disclosed hereinon Akt activation, said cells are serum starved overnight and incubatedwith one or more compounds disclosed herein or about 0.1% DMSO forapproximately 1 minute to about 1 hour prior to stimulation with insulin(e.g. 100 nM) for about 1 minutes to about 1 hour. Cells are lysed byscraping into ice cold lysis buffer containing detergents such as sodiumdodecyl sulfate and protease inhibitors (e.g., PMSF). After contactingcells with lysis buffer, the solution is briefly sonicated, cleared bycentrifugation, resolved by SDS-PAGE, transferred to nitrocellulose orPVDF and immunoblotted using antibodies to phospho-Akt S473, phospho-AktT308, Akt, and β-actin (Cell Signaling Technologies).

When tested under these conditions, one or more compounds of the presentdisclosure are expected to inhibit insulin stimulated phosphorylation ofAkt at S473. Alternatively, some compounds disclosed herein are expectedto additionally inhibit insulin stimulated phosphorylation of Akt atT308. Such class of compounds may inhibit Akt more effectively thanrapamycin.

Example 29 Kinase Signaling in Blood

PI3K/Akt/mTor signaling is measured in blood cells using the phosflowmethod (Methods Enzymol. 2007; 434:131-54). The advantage of this methodis that it is by nature a single cell assay so that cellularheterogeneity can be detected rather than population averages. Thisallows concurrent dinstinction of signaling states in differentpopulations defined by other markers. Phosflow is also highlyquantitative. To test the effects of one or more compounds disclosedherein, unfractionated splenocytes, or peripheral blood mononuclearcells are stimulated with anti-CD3 to initiate T-cell receptorsignaling. The cells are then fixed and stained for surface markers andintracellular phosphoproteins. It is expected that inhibitors disclosedherein inhibit anti-CD3 mediated phosphorylation of Akt-S473 and S6,whereas rapamycin inhibits S6 phosphorylation and enhances Aktphosphorylation under the conditions tested.

Similarly, aliquots of whole blood are incubated for 15 minutes withvehicle (e.g. 0.1% DMSO) or kinase inhibitors at various concentrations,before addition of stimuli to crosslink the T cell receptor (TCR)(anti-CD3 with secondary antibody) or the B cell receptor (BCR) usinganti-kappa light chain antibody (Fab′2 fragments). After approximately 5and 15 minutes, samples are fixed (e.g. with cold 4% paraformaldehyde)and used for phosflow. Surface staining is used to distinguish T and Bcells using antibodies directed to cell surface markers that are knownto the art. The level of phosphrylation of kinase substrates such as Aktand S6 are then measured by incubating the fixed cells with labeledantibodies specific to the phosphorylated isoforms of these proteins.The population of cells is then analyzed by flow cytometry.

This assay can be employed to demonstrate that one or more of thecompounds of the present invention are potent and selective inhibitorsof one or more members of one or more of PI3K, mTOR, and/or Aktsignaling in blood cells under the conditions tested.

Example 30 Colony Formation Assay

Murine bone marrow cells freshly transformed with a p190 BCR-Ablretrovirus (herein referred to as p190 transduced cells) are plated inthe presence of various drug combinations in M3630 methylcellulose mediafor about 7 days with recombinant human IL-7 in about 30% serum, and thenumber of colonies formed is counted by visual examination under amicroscope.

Alternatively, human peripheral blood mononuclear cells are obtainedfrom Philadelphia chromosome positive (Ph+) and negative (Ph−) patientsupon initial diagnosis or relapse. Live cells are isolated and enrichedfor CD19+CD34+B cell progenitors. After overnight liquid culture, cellsare plated in methocult GF+H4435, Stem Cell Technologies) supplementedwith cytokines (IL-3, IL-6, IL-7, G-CSF, GM-CSF, CF, Flt3 ligand, anderythropoietin) and various concentrations of known chemotherapeuticagents in combination with either compounds of the present disclosure.Colonies are counted by microscopy 12-14 days later. This method can beused to test for evidence of additive or synergistic activity.

One or more of the compounds of the present invention are expected to bepotent and selective inhibitors of p190 transduced cell colony formationunder the conditions tested.

Example 31 In Vivo Effect of Kinase Inhibitors on Leukemic Cells

Female recipient mice are lethally irradiated from a γ source in twodoses about 4 hr apart, with approximately 5Gy each. About 1 hr afterthe second radiation dose, mice are injected i.v. with about 1×10⁶leukemic cells (e.g. Ph+ human or murine cells, or p190 transduced bonemarrow cells). These cells are administered together with aradioprotective dose of about 5×10⁶ normal bone marrow cells from 3-5week old donor mice. Recipients are given antibiotics in the water andmonitored daily. Mice who become sick after about 14 days are euthanizedand lymphoid organs are harvested for analysis. Kinase inhibitortreatment begins about 10 days after leukemic cell injection andcontinues daily until the mice become sick or a maximum of approximately35 days post-transplant. Inhibitors are given by oral lavage.

Peripheral blood cells are collected approximately on day 10(pre-treatment) and upon euthanization (post treatment), contacted withlabeled anti-hCD4 antibodies and counted by flow cytometry. This methodcan be used to demonstrate that the synergistic effect of one or morecompounds disclosed herein in combination with known chemotherapeuticagents significantly reduce leukemic blood cell counts as compared totreatment with known chemotherapeutic agents (e.g. Gleevec) alone underthe conditions tested.

Example 32 Treatment of Lupus Disease Model Mice

Mice lacking the inhibitory receptor FcγRIIb that opposes PI3K signalingin B cells develop lupus with high penetrance. FcγRIIb knockout mice(R2KO, Jackson Labs) are considered a valid model of the human diseaseas some lupus patients show decreased expression or function of FcγRIIb(S. Bolland and J. V. Ravtech 2000. Immunity 12:277-285).

The R2KO mice develop lupus-like disease with anti-nuclear antibodies,glomerulonephritis and proteinurea within about 4-6 months of age. Forthese experiments, the rapamycin analogue RAD001 (available from LCLaboratories) is used as a benchmark compound, and administered orally.This compound has been shown to ameliorate lupus symptoms in theB6.Sle1z.Sle3z model (T. Wu et al. J. Clin Invest. 117:2186-2196).

Lupus disease model mice such as R2KO, BXSB or MLR/lpr are treated atabout 2 months old, approximately for about two months. Mice are givendoses of: vehicle, RAD001 at about 10 mg/kg, or compounds disclosedherein at approximately 1 mg/kg to about 500 mg/kg. Blood and urinesamples are obtained at approximately throughout the testing period, andtested for antinuclear antibodies (in dilutions of serum) or proteinconcentration (in urine). Serum is also tested for anti-ssDNA andanti-dsDNA antibodies by ELISA. Animals are euthanized at day 60 andtissues harvested for measuring spleen weight and kidney disease.Glomerulonephritis is assessed in kidney sections stained with H&E.Other animals are studied for about two months after cessation oftreatment, using the same endpoints.

This model can be employed to demonstrate that the kinase inhibitorsdisclosed herein can suppress or delay the onset of lupus symptoms inlupus disease model mice.

Example 33 Murine Bone Marrow Transplant Assay

Female recipient mice are lethally irradiated from a γ ray source. About1 hr after the radiation dose, mice are injected with about 1×106leukemic cells from early passage p190 transduced cultures (e.g. asdescribed in Cancer Genet Cytogenet. 2005 August; 161(1):51-6). Thesecells are administered together with a radioprotective dose ofapproximately 5×106 normal bone marrow cells from 3-5 wk old donor mice.Recipients are given antibiotics in the water and monitored daily. Micewho become sick after about 14 days are euthanized and lymphoid organsharvested for flow cytometry and/or magnetic enrichment. Treatmentbegins on approximately day 10 and continues daily until mice becomesick, or after a maximum of about 35 days post-transplant. Drugs aregiven by oral gavage (p.o.). In a pilot experiment a dose ofchemotherapeutic that is not curative but delays leukemia onset by aboutone week or less is identified; controls are vehicle-treated or treatedwith chemotherapeutic agent, previously shown to delay but not cureleukemogenesis in this model (e.g. imatinib at about 70 mg/kg twicedaily). For the first phase p190 cells that express eGFP are used, andpostmortem analysis is limited to enumeration of the percentage ofleukemic cells in bone marrow, spleen and lymph node (LN) by flowcytometry. In the second phase, p190 cells that express a tailless formof human CD4 are used and the postmortem analysis includes magneticsorting of hCD4+ cells from spleen followed by immunoblot analysis ofkey signaling endpoints: p Akt-T308 and S473; pS6 and p4EBP-1. Ascontrols for immunoblot detection, sorted cells are incubated in thepresence or absence of kinase inhibitors of the present disclosureinhibitors before lysis. Optionally, “phosflow” is used to detect pAkt-S473 and pS6-S235/236 in hCD4-gated cells without prior sorting.These signaling studies are particularly useful if, for example,drug-treated mice have not developed clinical leukemia at the 35 daytime point. Kaplan-Meier plots of survival are generated and statisticalanalysis done according to methods known in the art. Results from p190cells are analyzed separated as well as cumulatively.

Samples of peripheral blood (100-200 μl) are obtained weekly from allmice, starting on day 10 immediately prior to commencing treatment.Plasma is used for measuring drug concentrations, and cells are analyzedfor leukemia markers (eGFP or hCD4) and signaling biomarkers asdescribed herein.

This general assay may be used to demonstrate that effective therapeuticdoses of the compounds disclosed herein can be used for inhibiting theproliferation of leukemic cells.

Example 34 TNP-Ficoll T-cell Independent B-cell Activation Assay

To test the effects of the compounds of the present invention insuppressing T cell independent antibody production, the TNP-FicollB-cell activation assay is used as described herein. Compounds of thepresent invention are dissolved in an appropriate vehicle (e.g. 5%1-methyl-2-pyrrolidinone, 85% polyethylene glycol 400, 10% Solutor).Compounds are administered orally approximately 1hr before TNP-Ficolltreatment to 4-10 week old mice.

To study the effects of the compounds on B-cell activation, one set ofmice are grouped according to the following table:

Antigen injection Compound Administration Mice/ at day-1 from day-1 today-7 Group # group Comp treated Group TNP-F Route (mg/kg) Route Regimen1 4 Vehicle Antigen only 200 uL ip 0 PO BID for 2 8 — Antigen only (0.5mg/ml) 0 7 days 3 8 Reference reference 30 compound #1 4 8 Test compoundAntigen + cmp 1 5 8 3 6 8 10 7 8 30 8 8 60

Four animals in group 1, and eight animals in groups 2 to 7 areeuthanized in CO₂ 2 hours after the last compound administration on day7. Blood is immediately collected by cadio-puncture and kept at 37° C.for 1 hr to clot followed by overnight incubation at 4° C. to allow theclot to contract. The following day, serum is collected by decanting andcentrifugation at 3000 rpm for 10 min. The collected serum is thenfrozen at −80° C. for future analysis.

Serum samples are analyzed for anti-TNP antibody titers by ELISA asdescribed herein. TNP-BSA is coated onto a Nunc Maxisorb microtiterplate with 100 μl/well at a concentration of 10 μg/ml in phosphatebuffered saline (PBS). The Maxisorb plate is incubated for 1.5 hours atroom temperature and the solution is removed. 200 μl/well of blockingbuffer (e.g. 1% BSA in PBS) is added to each well and incubated 1hr atroom temperature. The plate is washed once with 200 μl/well of PBS 0.05%Tween-20 (wash buffer). A 1:2 dilution of serum from each mouse inblocking buffer is added to each well in the first column (1) of themicrotiter plate. The serum in each well of column 1 is then diluted3-fold in blocking buffer and added to column 2. The serum in each wellof column 2 is diluted 3-fold in blocking buffer and added to column 3.The procedure is repeated across the twelve columns of the microtiterplate. The microtiter plate is incubated 1 hr at room temperature. Serumis removed from the plate and the plate is washed three times with washbuffer. 100 μl/well of goat anti-mouse IgG3-HRP diluted 1:250 inblocking buffer is added to each well and incubated 1 hr at roomtemperature. The anti-mouse IgG3-HRP is removed from the microtiterplate and the plate is washed six times with wash buffer. HRP substrate(200 μl ABTS solution+30% H₂O₂+10 ml citrate buffer) is added to eachwell at 100 μl/well, incubated 2-20 minutes in the dark and the amountof anti-TNP IgG3 is determined spectrophotometrically at 405 nm.Similarly, anti-TNP IgM and total anti-TNP Ab are determined usinganti-mouse IgM-HRP and anti-mouse Ig-HRP respectively.

This model can be employed to demonstrate that the test compounds arecapable of reducing IgG3 levels relative to vehicle control mice at thetested dose levels.

Example 35 Rat Developing Type II Collagen Induced Arthritis Assay

In order to study the effects of the compounds of the present inventionon the autoimmune disease arthritis, a collagen induced developingarthritis model is used. Female Lewis rats are given collagen injectionsat day 0. Bovine type II collagen is prepared as a 4 mg/ml solution in0.01N acetic acid. Equal volumes of collagen and Freund's incompleteadjuvant are emulsified by hand mixing until a bead of the emulsifiedmaterial holds its form in water. Each rodent receives a 300 μlinjection of the mixture at each injection time spread over threesubcutaneous sites on the back.

Oral compound administration begins on day 0 and continues through day16 with vehicle (5% NMP, 85% PEG 400, 10% Solutol) or compounds of thepresent invention in vehicle or control (e.g. methotrexate) at 12 hourintervals daily. Rats are weighed on days 0, 3, 6, 9-17 and calipermeasurements of ankles are taken on days 9-17. Final body weights aretaken, and then the animals are euthanized on day 17. Aftereuthanization, blood is drawn and hind paws and knees are removed. Bloodis further processed for pharmacokinetics experiments as well as ananti-type II collagen antibody ELISA assay. Hind paws are weighed andthen, with the knees, preserved in 10% formalin. The paws and knees aresubsequently processed for microscopy. Livers, spleen and thymus areweighed. Sciatic nerves are prepared for histopathology.

Knee and ankle joints are fixed for 1-2 days and decalcified for 4-5days. Ankle joints are cut in half longitudinally, and knees are cut inhalf along the frontal plane. Joints are processed, embedded, sectionedand stained with toluidine blue. Scoring of the joints is done accordingto the following criteria:

Knee and Ankle Inflammation

-   0=Normal-   1=Minimal infiltration of inflammatory cells in    synovium/periarticular tissue-   2=Mild infiltration-   3=Moderate infiltration with moderate edema-   4=Marked infiltration with marked edema-   5=Severe infiltration with severe edema    Ankle Pannus-   0=Normal-   1=Minimal infiltration of pannus in cartilage and subchondral bone-   2=Mild infiltration (<¼ of tibia or tarsals at marginal zones)-   3=Moderate infiltration (¼ to ⅓ of tibia or small tarsals affected    at marginal zones)-   4=Marked infiltration (½-¾ of tibia or tarsals affected at marginal    zones)-   5=Severe infiltration (>¾ of tibia or tarsals affected at marginal    zones, severe distortion of overall architecture)    Knee Pannus-   0=Normal-   1=Minimal infiltration of pannus in cartilage and subchondral bone-   2=Mild infiltration (extends over up to ¼ of surface or subchondral    area of tibia or femur)-   3=Moderate infiltration (extends over >¼ but <½ of surface or    subchondral area of tibia or femur)-   4=Marked infiltration (extends over ½ to ¾ oftibial or femoral    surface)-   5=Severe infiltration (covers >¾ of surface)    Cartilage Damage (Ankle, Emphasis on Small Tarsals)-   0=Normal-   1=Minimal=minimal to mild loss of toluidine blue staining with no    obvious chondrocyte loss or collagen disruption-   2=Mild=mild loss of toluidine blue staining with focal mild    (superficial) chondrocyte loss and/or collagen disruption-   3=Moderate=moderate loss of toluidine blue staining with multifocal    moderate (depth to middle zone) chondrocyte loss and/or collagen    disruption, smaller tarsals affected to ½-¾ depth-   4=Marked=marked loss of toluidine blue staining with multifocal    marked (depth to deep zone) chondrocyte loss and/or collagen    disruption, 1 or more small tarsals have full thickness loss of    cartilage-   5=Severe=severe diffuse loss of toluidine blue staining with    multifocal severe (depth to tide mark) chondrocyte loss and/or    collagen disruption    Cartilage Damage (Knee, emphasis on femoral condyles)-   0=Normal-   1=Minimal=minimal to mild loss of toluidine blue staining with no    obvious chondrocyte loss or collagen disruption-   2=Mild=mild loss of toluidine blue staining with focal mild    (superficial) chondrocyte loss and/or collagen disruption-   3=Moderate=moderate loss of toluidine blue staining with multifocal    to diffuse moderate (depth to middle zone) chondrocyte loss and/or    collagen disruption-   4=Marked=marked loss of toluidine blue staining with multifocal to    diffuse marked (depth to deep zone) chondrocyte loss and/or collagen    disruption or single femoral surface with total or near total loss-   5=Severe=severe diffuse loss of toluidine blue staining with    multifocal severe (depth to tide mark) chondrocyte loss and/or    collagen disruption on both femurs and/or tibias    Bone Resorption (Ankle)-   0=Normal-   1=Minimal=small areas of resorption, not readily apparent on low    magnification, rare osteoclasts-   2=Mild=more numerous areas of resorption, not readily apparent on    low magnification, osteoclasts more numerous, <¼ of tibia or tarsals    at marginal zones resorbed-   3=Moderate=obvious resorption of medullary trabecular and cortical    bone without full thickness defects in cortex, loss of some    medullary trabeculae, lesion apparent on low magnification,    osteoclasts more numerous, ¼ to ⅓ of tibia or tarsals affected at    marginal zones-   4=Marked=Full thickness defects in cortical bone, often with    distortion of profile of remaining cortical surface, marked loss of    medullary bone, numerous osteoclasts, ½-¾ of tibia or tarsals    affected at marginal zones-   5=Severe=Full thickness defects in cortical bone, often with    distortion of profile of remaining cortical surface, marked loss of    medullary bone, numerous osteoclasts, >¾ of tibia or tarsals    affected at marginal zones, severe distortion of overall    architecture    Bone Resorption (Knee)-   0=Normal-   1=Minimal=small areas of resorption, not readily apparent on low    magnification, rare osteoclasts-   2=Mild=more numerous areas of resorption, definite loss of    subchondral bone involving ¼ of tibial or femoral surface (medial or    lateral)-   3=Moderate=obvious resorption of subchondral bone involving >¼ but    <½ of tibial or femoral surface (medial or lateral)-   4=Marked=obvious resorption of subchondral bone involving ≧½ but <¾    of tibial or femoral surface (medial or lateral)-   5=Severe=distortion of entire joint due to destruction involving >¾    of tibial or femoral surface (medial or lateral)-   1. Statistical analysis of body/paw weights, paw AUC parameters and    histopathologic parameters were evaluated using a Student's t-test    or other appropriate (ANOVA with post-test) with significance set at    the 5% significance level. Percent inhibition of paw weight and AUC    was calculated using the following formula:    % Inhibition=A−B/A×100-   A=Mean Disease Control−Mean Normal-   B=Mean Treated−Mean Normal

This model can be employed to demonstrate that one or more compounds ofthe present invention are capable of ameliorating arthritis inducedankle diameter increase over time, and reduction of ankle histopathologyin at least one or more of the categories of inflammation, pannus,cartilage damage, and bone resporption as described above. The resultsare expected to show that one or more compounds of the present inventionmay be useful for the treatment and reduction of arthritis diseasesymptoms. The model can be employed to demonstrate that one or morecompounds of the present invention may not only be useful for treatingarthritis disease symptoms, but may also be useful for the inhibition ofthe autoimmune reaction itself.

Example 36 Rat Established Type II Collagen Induced Arthritis Assay

In order to examine the dose responsive efficacy of the compounds of thepresent invention in inhibiting the inflammation, cartilage destructionand bone resorption of 10 day established type II collagen inducedarthritis in rats, compounds are administered orally daily or twicedaily for 6 days.

Female Lewis rats are anesthetized and given collagen injectionsprepared and administered as described previously on day 0. On day 6,animals are anesthetized and given a second collagen injection. Calipermeasurements of normal (pre-disease) right and left ankle joints areperformed on day 9. On days 10-11, arthritis typically occurs and ratsarerandomized into treatment groups. Randomization is performed afterankle joint swelling is obviously established and there is evidence ofbilateral disease.

After an animal is selected for enrollment in the study, treatment isinitiated by the oral route. Animals are given vehicle, control (Enbrel)or compound doses, twice daily or once daily (BID or QD respectively).Administration is performed on days 1-6 using a volume of 2.5 ml/kg(BID) or 5 ml/kg (QD) for oral solutions. Rats are weighed on days 1-7following establishment of arthritis and caliper measurements of anklestaken every day. Final body weights are taken on day 7 and animals areeuthanized.

This model can be employed to demonstrate that the kinase inhibitorsdisclosed herein can reduce mean ankle diameter increase over time witha once daily administration or twice daily administration under theconditions tested. This suggests that the compounds of the presentinvention may be useful for the treatment of autoimmune diseases such asarthritis.

Example 37 Adjuvant Induced Arthritis Assay

Intrathecal Catheterization of Rats

Isoflurane-anesthetized Lewis rats (200-250 g) are implanted with anintrathecal (IT) catheter. After a 6 d recovery period, all animalsexcept those that appeared to have sensory or motor abnormalities(generally fewer than 5% of the total number) are used for experiments.For IT administration, 10 μl of drug or saline followed by 10 μl ofisotonic saline is injected through the catheter.

Adjuvant Arthritis and Drug Treatment

Lewis rats are immunized at the base of the tail with 0.1 ml of completeFreund's adjuvant (CFA) on day 0 several days after catheterimplantation (n=6/group). Drug (e.g. one or more compounds of thepresent invention or or vehicle) treatment is generally started on day 8and is continued daily until day 20. Clinical signs of arthritisgenerally begin on day 10, and paw swelling is determined every secondday by water displacement plethysmometry.

This model can be used to show that selected test compounds (e.g., oneor more compounds of the present invention) demonstrate a dose dependentreduction in the average paw volume increase as measured in thisadjuvant induced arthritis model system. These results would suggestthat one or more of the compounds of the present invention may be usefulfor the treatment of one or more of the diseases or conditions describedherein.

The results would also suggest that selected test compounds (one or morecompounds of the present invention) do not exhibit toxicity or otheradverse reaction under the conditions tested as measured by a lack ofweight loss.

Example 38 Rodent Pharmacokinetic Assay

In order to study the pharmacokinetics of the compounds of the presentinvention a set of 4-10 week old mice are grouped according to thefollowing table:

Compound Administration Mice/ from day-1 to day-7 Group # group (mg/kg)Route Regimen 1 3 1 Po BID for 7 2 3 3 days 3 3 10 4 3 30 5 3 60

ICompounds of the present invention are dissolved in an appropriatevehicle (e.g. 5% 1-methyl-2-pyrrolidinone, 85% polyethylene glycol 400,10% Solutor) and administered orally at 12 hour intervals daily. Allanimals are euthanized in CO₂ 2 hours after the final compound isadministered. Blood is collected immediately and kept on ice for plasmaisolation. Plasma is isolated by centrifuging at 5000 rpm for 10minutes. Harvested plasma is frozen for pharmacokinetic detection.

This assay are expected to demonstrate the pharmacokinetic parameterssuch as absorption, distribution, metabolism, excretion, and toxicityfor the compounds of the present invention.

Example 39 Basotest Assay

The basotest assay is performed using Orpegen Pharma Basotest reagentkit. Heparinized whole blood is pre-incubated with test compound orsolvent at 37 C for 20 min. Blood is then incubated with assay kitstimulation buffer (to prime cells for response) followed by allergen(dust mite extract or grass extract) for 20 min. The degranulationprocess is stopped by incubating the blood samples on ice. The cells arethen labeled with anti-IgE-PE to detect basophilic granulocytes, andanti-gp53-FITC to detect gp53 (a glycoprotein expressed on activatedbasophils). After staining red blood cells are lysed by addition ofLysing Solution. Cells are washed, and analyzed by flow cytometry. Thisassay can be used to show that under the conditions tested some of thecompound of the present invention are potent inhibitors of allergeninduced activation of basophils.

Example 40 Combination Use of PI3KδInhibitors and Agents that InhibitIgE Production or Activity

The compounds of the present invention may present synergistic oradditive efficacy when administered in combination with agents thatinhibit IgE production or activity. Agents that inhibit IgE productioninclude, for example, one or more of TEI-9874,2-(4-(6-cyclohexyloxy-2-naphtyloxy)phenylacetamide)benzoic acid,rapamycin, rapamycin analogs (i.e. rapalogs), TORC1 inhibitors, TORC2inhibitors, and any other compounds that inhibit mTORC1 and mTORC2.Agents that inhibit IgE activity include, for example, anti-IgEantibodies such as Omalizumab and TNX-901.

One or more of the subject compounds capable of inhibiting PI3Kδ areefficacious in treatment of autoimmune and inflammatory disorders (AIID)for example rheumatoid arthritis. If any of the compounds causes anundesired level of IgE production, one may choose to administer it incombination with an agent that inhibits IgE production or IgE activity.Additionally, the administration of PI3Kδ or PI3Kδ/γ inhibitors of thepresent invention in combination with inhibitors of existing mTOR ormTOR inhibitors provided by the present invention may also exhibitsynergy through enhanced inhibition of the PI3K pathway. Various in vivoand in vitro models may be used to establish the effect of suchcombination treatment on AIID including but not limited to (a) in vitroB-cell antibody production assay, (b) in vivo TNP assay, and (c) rodentcollagen induced arthritis model.

(a) B-cell Assay

Mice are euthanized, and the spleens are removed and dispersed through anylon mesh to generate a single-cell suspension. The splenocytes arewashed (following removal of erythrocytes by osmotic shock) andincubated with anti-CD43 and anti-Mac-1 antibody-conjugated microbeads(Miltenyi Biotec). The bead-bound cells are separated from unbound cellsusing a magnetic cell sorter. The magnetized column retains the unwantedcells and the resting B cells are collected in the flow-through.Purified B-cells are stimulated with lipopolysaccharide or an anti-CD40antibody and interleukin 4. Stimulated B-cells are treated with vehiclealone or with PI3K inhibitors of the present invention with and withoutknown mTOR inhibitors such as rapamycin, rapalogs, or mTORC1/C2inhibitors. The results are expected to show that in the presence ofmTOR inhibitors (e.g., rapamycin) alone, there is little to nosubstantial effect on IgG and IgE response. However, in the presence ofPI3Kδ and mTOR inhibitors, the B-cells are expected to exhibit adecreased IgG response as compared to the B-cells treated with vehiclealone, and the B-cells are expected to exhibit a decreased IgE responseas compared to the response from B-cells treated with PI3Kδ inhibitorsalone.

(b) TNP Assay

Mice are immunized with TNP-Ficoll or TNP-KHL and treated with: vehicle,a PI3Kδ inhibitor, an mTOR inhibitor, for example rapamycin, or a PI3Kδinhibitor in combination with an mTOR inhibitor such as rapamycin.Antigen-specific serum IgE is measured by ELISA using TNP-BSA coatedplates and isotype specific labeled antibodies. This assay can be usedto demonstrate that mice treated with an mTOR inhibitor alone exhibitlittle or no substantial effect on antigen specific IgG3 response and nostatistically significant elevation in IgE response as compared to thevehicle control. This assay can be used to demonstrate that mice treatedwith both PI3Kδ inhibitor and mTOR inhibitor exhibit a reduction inantigen specific IgG3 response as compared to the mice treated withvehicle alone. Additionally, This assay can be used to demonstrate thatthe mice treated with both PI3Kδ inhibitor and mTOR inhibitor exhibit adecrease in IgE response as compared to the mice treated with PI3Kδinhibitor alone.

(c) Rat Collagen Induced Arthritis Model

Female Lewis rats are anesthetized and given collagen injectionsprepared and administered as described previously on day 0. On day 6,animals are anesthetized and given a second collagen injection. Calipermeasurements of normal (pre-disease) right and left ankle joints areperformed on day 9. On days 10-11, arthritis typically occurs and ratsare randomized into treatment groups. Randomization is performed afterankle joint swelling is obviously established and there is good evidenceof bilateral disease.

After an animal is selected for enrollment in the study, treatment isinitiated. Animals are given vehicle, PI3Kδ inhibitor, or PI3Kδinhibitor in combination with rapamycin. Dosing is administered on days1-6. Rats are weighed on days 1-7 following establishment of arthritisand caliper measurements of ankles taken every day. Final body weightsare taken on day 7 and animals are euthanized.

This assay can be used to show that the combination treatment usingPI3Kδ inhibitor and rapamycin provides greater efficacy than treatmentwith PI3Kδ inhibitor alone.

Example 41 Use of the Compounds of the Present Invention for Inhibitionof Tumor Growth

Cell Lines. Cell lines of interest (A549, U87, ZR-75-1 and 786-O) areobtained from American Type Culture Collection (ATCC, Manassas, Va.).Cells are proliferated and preserved cryogenically at early passage(e.g. passage 3). One aliquot is used for further proliferation to getenough cells for one TGI study (at about passage 9).

Animals. Female athymic nude mice are supplied by Harlan. Mice arereceived at 4 to 6 weeks of age. All mice are acclimated for about oneday to two weeks prior to handling. The mice are housed in microisolatorcages and maintained under specific pathogen-free conditions. The miceare fed with irradiated mouse chow and freely available autoclaved wateris provided.

Tumor Xenograft Model. Mice are inoculated subcutaneously in the rightflank with 0.01 to 0.5 ml of tumor cells (approximately 1.0×10⁵ to1.0×10⁸ cells/mouse). Five to 10 days following inoculation, tumors aremeasured using calipers and tumor weight is calculated, for exampleusing the animal study management software, such as Study DirectorV.1.6.70 (Study Log). Mice with tumor sizes of about 120 mg arepair-matched into desired groups using Study Director (Day 1). Bodyweights are recorded when the mice are pair-matched. Tumor volume andbodyweight measurements are taken one to four times weekly and grossobservations are made at least once daily. On Day 1, compounds of thepresent invention and reference compounds as well as vehicle control areadministered by oral gavage or iv as indicated. At the last day of theexperiment, mice are sacrificed and their tumors are collected 1-4 hoursafter the final dose. The tumors are excised and cut into two sections.One third of the tumor is fixed in formalin and embedded in paraffinblocks and the remaining two thirds of tumor is snap frozen and storedat −80° C.

Data and Statistical Analysis

Mean tumor growth inhibition (TGI) is calculated utilizing the followingformula:

${TGI} = {\left\lbrack {1 - \frac{\left( {{\overset{\_}{\chi}}_{{Treated}{({Final})}} - {\overset{\_}{\chi}}_{{Treated}{({{Day}\; 1})}}} \right)}{\left( {{\overset{\_}{\chi}}_{{Control}{({Final})}} - \;{\overset{\_}{\chi}}_{{Control}{({{Day}\; 1})}}} \right.}} \right\rbrack \times 100\%}$

Tumors that regress from the Day 1 starting size are removed from thecalculations. Individual tumor shrinkage (TS) is calculated using theformula below for tumors that show regression relative to Day 1 tumorweight. The mean tumor shrinkage of each group is calculated andreported.

${TS} = {\left\lbrack {1 - \frac{\left( {{Tumor}\mspace{14mu}{Weight}_{({Final})}} \right)}{\left( {{Tumor}\mspace{14mu}{Weight}_{({{Day}\; 1})}} \right)}} \right\rbrack \times 100\%}$

This assay can be employed to show that one or more compounds of thepresent invention inhibit tumor cell growth including but not limited torenal carcinomoa cell growth, breast cancer cell growth, lung cancercell growth, or glioblastoma cell growth with an IC₅₀ of less than about10 to about 0.5 mg/kg at a once per day dosage under the conditionstested.

The invention claimed is:
 1. A compound of Formula I

or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein: M₁ isbenzothiazolyl substituted with —(W²)_(k)—R²; k, in each instance, is 0or 1; R₁ is —H, -L-alkyl, -L-cycloalkyl, -L-alkyl-cycloalkyl, -L-aryl,-L-heteroaryl, -L-alkylaryl, -L-alkylheteroaryl, -L-alkylheterocylyl,-L-alkenyl, -L-alkynyl, -L-alkenyl-cycloalkyl, -L-alkynyl-cycloalkyl, or-L-heterocyclyl, each of which is unsubstituted or substituted by one ormore independent R³ substituents; L is a bond, —C(═O)—, —C(═O)O—,—C(═O)NR³¹—, —S—, —S(O)—, —S(O)₂—, —S(O)₂NR³¹—, or —NR³¹—; X₁ is C-E¹and X₂ is N; E¹ and E² are independently —(W ¹)_(j)—R⁴; j, in eachinstance, is 0 or 1; W¹ is —O—, —NR⁶—, —S(O)₀₋₂—, —C(═O)—, —C(═O)N(R⁶)—,—N(R⁶)C(═O)—, —N(R⁶)S(O)—, —N(R⁶)S(O)₂—, —C(═O)O—, —CH(R⁶)N(C(═O)OR⁷)—,—CH(R⁷)N(C(═O)R⁷)—, —CH(R⁶)N(SO₂R⁷)—, —CH(R⁶)N(R⁷)—, —CH(R⁶)C(═O)N(R⁷)—,—CH(R⁶)N(R⁷)C(═O)—, —CH(R⁶)N(R⁷)S(O)—, or —CH(R⁶)N(R⁷)S(O)₂—; W² is —O—, —NR⁶—, —S(O)₀₋₂—, —C(═O)—, —C(═O)N(R⁶)—, —N(R⁶)C(═O)—,—N(R⁶)C(═O)N(R⁷)—, —N(R⁶)S(O)—, —N(R⁶)S(O)₂—, —C(═O)O—,—CH(R⁶)N(C(═O)OR⁷)—, —CH(R⁷)N(C(═O)R⁷)—, —CH(R⁶)N(SO₂R⁷)—,—CH(R⁶)N(R⁷)—, —CH(R⁶)C(═O)N(R⁷)—, —CH(R⁶)N(R⁷)C(═O)—,—CH(R⁶)N(R⁷)S(O)—, or —CH(R⁶)N(R⁷)S(O)₂—; R² is hydrogen, bicyclic aryl,substituted monocyclic aryl, hetaryl, alkyl, cycloalkyl,-alkyl-cycloalkyl, -alkyl-monocyclic aryl, -alkylbicycloaryl,-alkylhetaryl, -allcylheterocyclyl, -alkenyl, or -alkynyl; R³ and R⁴ areindependently hydrogen, halogen, —OH, —R³¹, —CF₃, —OCF₃, —OR³¹,—NR³¹R³², —NR³⁴R³⁵, —C(═O)R³¹, —CO₂R³¹, —C(═O)NR³¹R³², —C(═O)NNR³⁴R³⁵,—NO₂, —CN, —S(O)₀₋₂R³¹, —SO₂NR³¹R³², —SO₂NR³⁴R³⁵, —NR³¹C(═O)R³²,—NR³¹C(═O)OR³², —NR³¹C(═O)NR³²R³³, —NR³¹S(O)₀₋₂R³², —C(═S)OR³¹,—C(═O)SR³¹, —NR³¹C(═NR³²)NR³³R³², —NR³¹C(═NR³²)OR³³, —NR³¹C(═NR³²)SR³³,—OC(═O)OR³³, —OC(═O)NR³¹R³², —OC(═O)SR³¹, —SC(═O)OR³¹, —P(O)OR³¹OR³², or—SC(═O)NR³¹R³²; R⁶ and R⁷ are each independently hydrogen, alkyl,alkenyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl or cycloalkyl, wherein eachalkyl, alkenyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclyl or cycloalkyl isunsubstituted or substituted by one or more independent R⁸ substituents;R⁸ is halo, —OR³¹, —SH, —NH₂, —NR³⁴R³⁵, —NR³¹R³², —CO₂R³¹,—CO₂aryl-C(═O)NR³¹R³², —C(═O)NR³⁴R³⁵, —NO₂, —CN, —S(O)₀₋₂ alkyl,—S(O)₀₋₂aryl, —SO₂NR³⁴R³⁵, —SO₂NR³¹R³², alkyl, alkenyl, or alkynyl; R³¹,R³², and R³³, in each instance, are independently H or alkyl; and R³⁴and R³⁵ are taken together with the nitrogen atom to which they areattached to form a 3-10 membered ring.
 2. The compound orpharmaceutically acceptable salt of claim 1, wherein E² is —H.
 3. Thecompound or pharmaceutically acceptable salt of claim 2, wherein k is 1.4. The compound or pharmaceutically acceptable salt of claim 2, wherein—(W²)_(k)— is —N(R⁶)C(═O)N(R⁷)—.
 5. The compound or pharmaceuticallyacceptable salt of claim 2, wherein R¹ is alkyl, or heterocyclyl, eachof which is unsubstituted or substituted by R³, and wherein R³ is—C(═O)NR³¹R³².
 6. The compound of claim 1, wherein M₁ is6-benzothiazolyl substituted at the 2-position with —(W²)_(k)—R².
 7. Acompound of claim 1, wherein the compound is of Formula XII

or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
 8. The compound orpharmaceutically acceptable salt of claim 7, wherein k is
 1. 9. Thecompound or pharmaceutically acceptable salt of claim 7, wherein R₁ isC₁₋₄alkyl.
 10. The compound or pharmaceutically acceptable salt of claim7, wherein R₁ is heterocyclyl, which is unsubstituted or substitutedwith R³.
 11. The compound or pharmaceutically acceptable salt of claim10, wherein —(W²)_(k)— is —NHC(═O)NH—.
 12. The compound orpharmaceutically acceptable salt of claim 11, wherein R² is C₁₋₄alkyl.13. A pharmaceutical composition comprising a compound claim of 1 orclaim 7 and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
 14. A method ofinhibiting activity of mTor, PI3α PI3β, PI3γ, PI3δ, and prostate cancercells proliferation present in a cell, comprising contacting said cellwith an effective amount of a compound of claim 1 or claim
 7. 15. Themethod of claim 14, wherein the inhibiting activity takes place in asubject suffering from a disorder selected from of cancer, bonedisorder, inflammatory disease, immune disease, nervous system disease,metabolic disease, respiratory disease, or cardiac disease.
 16. Themethod of claim 15, further comprising administering a secondtherapeutic agent.
 17. A method for inhibiting prostate cancer cellproliferation comprising contacting a cell with a compound of claim 1 orclaim
 7. 18. A method of ameliorating transplant rejection, mantle celllymphoma, renal cell carcinoma, endometrial cancer, and restenosis,comprising administering to a subject in need thereof a therapeuticallyeffective amount of a compound of claim 1 or claim
 7. 19. A compound offormula or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein theformula is: